SECTION 25 00 00 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS (BAS ... · possible to access any data from any...

University of Houston Master Construction Specifications Insert project name

AE Project Number: BAS Systems General 25 00 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 00 00 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS (BAS) GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

Note: Reference the “University of Houston Design Guidelines, Element D3060, Controls and Instrumentation – General” document. This document describes how to employ this and other controls-related Specifications. The Engineer is instructed to consult the document for guidance on the nature of these Specifications, methods for deleting non-applicable text, and use and deletion of Editor’s Notes before proceeding with modification of this Specification to suit the Project.

Engineer shall utilize the BAS Retrofit Specifications 25 00 10, 25 11 19, 25 11 10, 25 14 10, 25 15 10, and 25 30 10 for all University of Houston area projects unless specifically directed to utilize Sections 25 00 00, 25 08 00, 25 11 09, 25 11 00, 25 14 00, 25 15 00, and 25 30 00. Engineer shall confirm with the Manager of Building Automation Services located in the departments and Environmental Health and Safety before utilizing Sections: 25 00 00, 25 08 00, 25 11 09, 25 11 00, 25 14 00, 25 15 00, and 25 30 00 for a Houston area project.

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions andDivision 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications,Electronic Safety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to thisSection, and this Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may bereciprocally applicable to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Description of Work.

2. Quality Assurance.

3. System Architecture.

4. Distributed Processing Units/Quantity and Location.

5. Demolition and Reuse of Existing Materials and Equipment.

6. Sequence of Work.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a direct digital control and building automation system(BAS). The new BAS shall utilize electronic sensing, microprocessor-based digital control,and electronic actuation of dampers and valves (except where noted otherwise) to performcontrol sequences and functions specified. The BAS for this Project will generally consist ofmonitoring and control of systems described herein. Reference shall also be made to controlDrawings, Sequence of Operation, and points lists.

C. The HVAC systems being controlled are [describe the type of mechanical systemsincluded in the Project]. This Section defines the manner and method by which these controlsfunction.

CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS AND ASSEMBLIES STANDARDS ANDGUIDELINES



1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unlessidentified by a specific edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall beapplicable to this Project.

C. The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for building automation systems (BAS) shall bethe Building Management Systems shop. All materials, installation and workmanship shallcomply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the followingreferences:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

2. ASHRAE 135: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation andControl Networks, latest edition. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. and all current addenda and annexes.

3. Electronics Industries Alliance:

a. EIA-709.1-A-99: Control Network Protocol Specification.

b. EIA-709.3-99: Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel Specification.

c. EIA-232: Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-TerminatingEquipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.

d. EIA-485: Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and Receivers for usein Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems

4. Underwriters Laboratories:

a. UL 916: Energy Management Systems.

b. UUKL 864: UL Supervised Smoke Control if the BAS is used for smoke control.

5. NEMA Compliance:

a. NEMA 250: Enclosure for Electrical Equipment.

b. NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial Controls.

6. NFPA Compliance:

a. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems"where applicable to controls and control sequences.

b. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

a. IEEE 142: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and CommercialPower Systems.

b. IEEE 802.3: CSMA/CD (Ethernet – Based) LAN.



c. IEEE 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control inElectric Power Systems.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Advanced Application Controller (AAC): A device with limited resources relative to theBuilding Controller (BC). It may support a level of programming and may also be intended forapplication specific applications.

B. Application Protocol Data Unit (APDU): A unit of data specified in an application protocoland consisting of application protocol control information and possible application user data(ISO 9545).

C. Application Specific Controller (ASC): A device with limited resources relative to theAdvanced Application Controller (AAC). It may support a level of programming and may alsobe intended for application-specific applications.

D. BACnet/BACnet Standard: BACnet communication requirements as defined byASHRAE/ANSI 135 and all current addenda and annexes.

E. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnetfunctionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBS are combined to build theBACnet functional requirements for a device in a Specification.

F. Binding: In the general sense, binding refers to the associations or mappings of thesources network variable and their intended or required destinations.

G. Building Automation System (BAS): The entire integrated management, monitoring, andcontrol system.

H. Building Controller (BC): A fully programmable device capable of carrying out a number oftasks including control and monitoring via direct digital control (DDC) of specific systems,acting as a communications router between the LAN backbone and sub-LANs, and datastorage for trend information, time schedules, and alarm data.

I. Change of Value (COV): An event that occurs when a measured or calculated analogvalue changes by a predefined amount (ASHRAE/ANSI 135).

J. Client: A device that is the requestor of services from a server. A client device makesrequests of and receives responses from a server device.

K. Continuous Monitoring: A sampling and recording of a variable based on time or changeof state (e.g. trending an analog value, monitoring a binary change of state).

L. Controller or Control Unit (CU): Intelligent stand-alone control panel. Controller is ageneric reference and shall include BCs, AACs, and ASCs as appropriate.

M. Control Systems Server (CSS): This shall be a computer (or computers) that maintainsthe systems configuration and programming database. This may double as an operatorworkstation.

N. Direct Digital Control (DDC): Microprocessor-based control including Analog/Digitalconversion and program logic.



O. Functional Profile: A collection of variables required to define key parameters for a standard application. For the HVAC industry, this would include applications like VAV terminal units, fan coil units, etc.

P. Gateway (GTWY): A device, which contains two or more dissimilar networks/protocols, permitting information exchange between them (ASHRAE/ANSI 135-( use the most current version)

Q. Hand Held Device (HHD): Manufacturer’s microprocessor based device for direct connection to a Controller.

R. IT LAN: Reference to the facility’s Information Technology network, used for normal business-related e-mail and Internet communication.

S. LAN Interface Device (LANID): Device or function used to facilitate communication and sharing of data throughout the BAS.

T. Local Area Network (LAN): General term for a network segment within the architecture. Various types and functions of LANs are defined herein.

U. Local Supervisory LAN: Ethernet-based LAN connecting Primary Controller LANs with each other and OWSs and CSSs and the LAN to which the GEMnet will be interfaced. See System Architecture herein.

V. Master-Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP): Data link protocol as defined by the BACnet standard (ASHRAE/ANSI 135).

W. UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON WAN: Internet-based network connecting multiple facilities with a central data warehouse and server, accessible via standard web-browser.

X. Open Database Connectivity (ODBC): An open standard application-programming interface (API) for accessing a database developed. ODBC compliant systems make it possible to access any data from any application, regardless of which database management system (DBMS) is handling the data.

Y. Operator Interface (OI): A device used by the operator to manage the BAS including OWSs, POTs, and HHDs.

Z. Operator Workstation (OWS): The user’s interface with the BAS system. As the BAS network devices are stand-alone, the OWS is not required for communications to occur.

AA. Point-to-Point (PTP): Serial communication as defined in the BACnet standard.

BB. Portable Operators Terminal (POT): Laptop PC used both for direct connection to a controller and for remote dial up connection.

CC. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS): A written document, created by the manufacturer of a device, which identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in the device (ASHRAE/ANSI 135).

DD. Primary Controlling LAN: High speed, peer-to-peer controller LAN connecting BCs and optionally AACs and ASCs. Refer to System Architecture herein.

EE. Router: A device that connects two or more networks at the network layer.

FF. Secondary Controlling LAN: LAN connecting AACs and ASCs, generally lower speed and less reliable than the Primary Controlling LAN. Refer to System Architecture herein.



GG. Server: A device that is a provider of services to a client. A client device makes requests of and receives responses from a server device.

HH. SQL: Standardized Query Language, a standardized means for requesting information from a database.

II. Smart Device: A control I/O device such as a sensor or actuator that can directlycommunicate with the controller network to which it is connected. This differs from an ASC inthat it typically deals only with one variable.

JJ. XML (Extensible Markup Language): A specification developed by the World Wide Web Consortium. XML is a pared-down version of SGML, designed especially for Web documents. It allows designers to create their own customized tags, enabling the definition, transmission, validation, and interpretation of data between applications and between organizations.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Use “A” to define any specific qualifications needed; otherwise leave “Reserved”. A. [Reserved].

B. Product Line Demonstrated History: The product line being proposed for the Project musthave an installed history of demonstrated satisfactory operation for a length of five (5) yearsince date of final completion in at least ten (10) installations of comparative size andcomplexity. Submittals shall document this requirement with references.

C. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in control systeminstallations for not less than 5 years. Firms with experience in DDC installation projects withpoint counts equal to this Project and systems of the same character as this Project. Ifinstaller is a Value Added Reseller (VAR) of a manufacturer’s product, installer mustdemonstrate at least five years prior experience with that manufacturer’s products.Experience starts with awarded Final Completion of previous projects. Submittals mustdocument this experience with references.

D. Installer's Experience with Proposed Product Line: Firms shall have specialized in and beexperienced with the installation of the proposed product line for not less than one year fromdate of final completion on at least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity.Submittals shall document this experience with references.

E. Installer’s Field Coordinator and Sequence Programmer Qualifications: Individual(s) shallspecialize in and be experienced with control system installation for not less than five (5)years. Proposed field coordinator shall have experience with the installation of the proposedproduct line for not less than two (2) projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shallsubmit the names of the proposed individual and at least one alternate for each duty.Submittals shall document this experience with references. Proposed individuals must showproof of the following training:

1. Product Line Training: Individuals overseeing the installation and configuration of theproposed product line must provide evidence of the most advanced training offered bythe manufacturer on that product line for installation and configuration.

2. Programming Training: Individuals involved with programming the Site-specificsequences shall provide evidence of the most advanced programming training offered bythe vendor of the programming application offered by the manufacturer.



3. Installer’s Service Qualifications: The installer must be experienced in control system operation, maintenance and service. Installer must document a minimum five (5) year history of servicing installations of similar size and complexity. Installer must also document at least a one year history of servicing the proposed product line.

F. Installer’s Response Time and Proximity:

1. Installer must maintain a fully capable service facility within a 60 mile radius of the Project Site. Service facility shall manage emergency service dispatches and maintain inventory of spare parts.

2. Emergency response times are listed below in this Section. Installer must demonstrate ability to meet response times.

G. The BAS and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 916) as an Energy Management System.

H. The BAS shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UUKL 864) for Supervised Smoke Control.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit under provisions of Division 01. Two (2) copies of the materials shall be delivered directly to UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Monitoring Services staff, in addition to the copies required by other Sections. In addition, an electronic version of the completed materials shall be provided per owner’s format. Data can be in searchable native file format where necessary. Refer to Section 25 08 00 for additional Commissioning submittal requirements.

B. Functional Intent: Throughout the Contract Documents, detailed requirements are specified, some of which indicate a means, method or configuration acceptable to meet that requirement. Contractor may submit products that utilize alternate means, methods, and configurations that meet the functional intent. However these will only be allowed with prior approval.

C. Electronic Submittals: While all requirements for hard copy submittal apply, control submittals and operation and maintenance (O&M) information shall also be provided in electronic format as follows:

1. Drawings and Diagrams: Shop Drawings shall be provided on electronic media as an AutoCAD drawing per Owner’s CAD standards. All ‘x reference’ and font files must be provided with AutoCAD files.

2. Other Submittals: All other submittals shall be provided in Adobe Portable Document Format

D. Qualifications: Manufacturer, Installer, and Key personnel qualifications as indicated for the appropriate items.

E. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device, panel, and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation and start-up instructions.



1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings electronically on AutoCAD software for each control system, including a complete drawing for each air handling unit, system, pump, device, etc. with all point descriptors, addresses and point names indicated per the University of Houston BAS Manager. Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

a. System Architecture and System Layout:

1) One-line diagram indicating schematic locations of all control units, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate network number, device ID, address, device instance, MAC address, drawing reference number, and controller type for each control unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the diagram.

2) Provide floor plans locating all control units, workstations, servers, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Include all WAN and LAN communication wiring routing, power wiring, power originating sources, and low voltage power wiring. Indicate network number, device ID, address, device instance, MAC address, drawing reference number, and controller type for each control unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the floor plans. Wiring routing conditions shall be maintained accurately throughout the construction period and the Record Drawings shall be updated to accurately reflect accurate, actual installed conditions.

b. Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices. Include written description of sequence of operation.

c. All physical points on the schematic flow diagram shall be indicated with names, descriptors, and point addresses identified as listed in the point summary table.

d. With each schematic, provide a point summary table listing building number and abbreviation, system type, equipment type, full point name, point description, Ethernet backbone network number, network number, device ID, object ID (object type, instance number). If this information is not available at the time of Shop Drawings submittals, furnish with O&M manual documentation for Owner review and approval. See Section 25 15 00 for additional requirements.

e. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.

f. Label each input and output with the appropriate range.

g. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device identification to match schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual product ordering number, manufacturer, description, size, voltage range, pressure range, temperature range, etc. as applicable.

h. With each schematic, provide valve and actuator information including size, Cv, design flow, design pressure drop, manufacturer, model number, close off rating, etc. Indicate normal positions of spring return valves and dampers.



i. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include bothladder logic type diagram for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detaileddigital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminalblock numbers identified. Provide panel termination Drawings on separate Drawings.Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly differentiate betweenportions of wiring that is existing, factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

j. Details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling shown in planor elevation indicating the installed locations.

k. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.

l. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included and theHVAC system controlled.

m. Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.

n. User Interface Graphic Screens.

o. Trends.

p. Alarms.

q. Legend and list of abbreviations.

r. Memory allocation projections.

s. Submit along with Shop Drawings but under separate cover calculated andguaranteed system response times of the most heavily loaded LAN in the system.

2. BACnet Protocol Information:

a. Submit the following:

1) BACnet object description, object ID, and device ID, for each I/O point.

2) Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, orenumerations used detailing their structure, data types, and any associated listsof enumerated values.

3) Submit PICS indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of eachcontroller.

3. Compressed Air Systems:

a. Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping,installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories indicatingdimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, andpiping and wiring connections.

b. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical power supply wiring toequipment. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiringrequired for final installation. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions that are field-installed.



c. Pneumatic piping plan and riser layouts including all main air and branch air pipingsizes, and calculated pressure losses for all pneumatic lines to all components,devices, and panels.

d. Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of the ASMEBoiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

4. Framed Control Drawings: Laminated control Drawings including system controlschematics, Sequence of Operation and panel termination Drawings, shall be provided inpanels and mounted in a suitable frame with a .125" Lexan polycarbonate cover for majorpieces of equipment, such as air handling units, chillers, boilers, etc. Drawings should beof sufficient size to be easily read. Terminal unit Drawings shall be located in the centralplant equipment panel or mechanical room panel.

5. Control Logic Documentation:

a. Submit control logic program listings (for graphical programming) and logic flowcharts illustrating (for line type programs) to document the control software of allcontrol units.

b. Control logic shall be annotated to describe how it accomplishes the sequence ofoperation. Annotations shall be sufficient to allow an operator to relate each programcomponent (block or line) to corresponding portions of the specified Sequence ofOperation.

c. Include written description of each control sequence.

d. Include control response, settings, setpoints, throttling ranges, gains, resetschedules, adjustable parameters and limits.

e. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.

f. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the controller designations and the HVACsystem controlled.

g. Include Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.

h. Submit one complete set of programming and operating manuals for all digitalcontrollers concurrently with control logic documentation. This set will count towardthe required number of Operation and Maintenance materials specified below and inDivision 01.

F. Record Documents:

1. Record copies of product data and control Shop Drawings updated to reflect the finalinstalled condition.

2. Record copies of approved control logic programming and database on paper and onCD’s. Accurately record actual setpoints and settings of controls, final sequence ofoperation, including changes to programs made after submission and approval of ShopDrawings and including changes to programs made during specified testing.

3. Record copies of approved Project specific graphic software on CDs.

4. Provide network architecture Record Drawings showing all nodes including a descriptionfield with specific controller identification, description and location information.



5. Record copies shall include individual floor plans with controller locations with all interconnecting wiring routing including space sensors, LAN wiring, power wiring, low voltage power wiring. Indicate device instance, MAC address and drawing reference number.

6. Provide record riser diagram showing the location of all controllers.

7. Maintain Project record documents throughout the Warranty Period and submit final documents at the end of the Warranty Period.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory.

2. Submit BAS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripherals.

3. Submit BAS advanced Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software.

4. Include all submittals (product data, Shop Drawings, control logic documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals, maintenance instructions and spare parts lists) in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

a. Contractor shall provide Owner with all product line technical manuals and technical bulletins, to include new and upgraded products, by the same distribution channel as to dealers or branches. This service will be provided for five (5) years as part of the Contract price, and will be offered to Owner thereafter for the same price as to a dealer or branch.

b. Manufacturer’s Certificates: For all listed and/or labeled products, provide certificate of conformance.

c. Product Warranty Certificates: Submit manufacturers product warranty certificates covering the hardware provided.

1.07 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The system provided shall incorporate hardware resources sufficient to meet the functional requirements of these Specifications. Contractor shall include all items not specifically itemized in these Specifications that are necessary to implement, maintain, and operate the system in compliance with the functional intent of these Specifications.

B. The system shall be configured as a distributed processing network(s) capable of expansion as specified below.

1. Coordinate all requirements of the BAS WAN / Primary LAN with the University of Houston IT Department and EH&S Building Automation Services Department.

2. All BAS utilization of the University of Houston IT network specified by Division 25 specifications or by the project construction documents shall be compliant with the owner’s current IT network standards. Reference and compliance with Division 27 Communication specifications. The owner’s IT department (UHIT) solely manages and governs the University of Houston IT infrastructure



3. Division 25 shall not configure, provide nor install any devices or network cables within/inside the University of Houston IT network infrastructure. Routers provided by Division 25 which utilize the University of Houston WAN or Primary LAN shall be approved by UHIT prior to connection. Refer to current UHIT telecommunications standards at http://www.uh.edu/infotech/services/computing/networks/network-infra-standards/

4. The University of Houston IT department shall grant approval to utilize the owner’s IT network and provide Ethernet IP address after all their requirements are satisfied. Upon approval an Ethernet drop will be provided with a jackplate, IP address, and computer name specified by University of Houston IT for utilization by the Division 25.

C. The system architecture shall consist of an Ethernet-based, wide area network (WAN), a single Local Area Network (LAN) or multi-leveled LANs that support BCs, AACs, ASCs, Operator Workstations (OWS), Smart Devices (SD), and Remote Communication Devices (RCDs) as applicable. The following indicates a functional description of the BAS structure.

1. University of Houston WAN: Internet-based network connecting multiple facilities with a central data warehouse and server, accessible via standard web-browser. This is an existing infrastructure and the Division 25 Contractor shall not configure any components of this WAN. Division 25 Contractors or designers working on existing BAS equipment may request reconfiguration of the University of Houston WAN, but only UH IT approved reconfigurations requests shall be executed by UH IT. Refer to Section 25 30 10 for requirements..

2. Local Supervisory LAN/Primary Controller LAN (‘Primary LAN’): The Local Supervisory/Primary Controller LAN shall be an Ethernet-based, 10/100/1000base-T Ethernet LAN connecting Local Supervisory Controllers, Primary Control LANs, BCs, and OWSs. The LAN serves as the inter-BC gateway and OWS-to-BC gateway and communications path and as the connection point for the University of Houston WAN. Contractor shall utilize a dedicated LAN for the control system. The Local Supervisory LAN shall be installed by others, in accordance with Division 27 Communication specifications, which is not governed by Division 25. The BAS network configuration shall be the following:

a. BACnet/IP as defined in the BACnet standard, and shall share a common network number for the Ethernet backbone, as defined in BACnet Standard. Point/Object naming conventions are specified in Section 25 15 00. Refer also to the current ASHRAE 135 data communication protocol;

3. Secondary Controller LAN (‘Secondary LAN’): Network used to connect AACs and ASCs. Acceptable communication protocols are BACnet over Ethernet (IEEE802.3), Master Slave/ Token Passing or polling as defined in the BACnet standard. Secondary LAN shall not directly connect to the University of Houston WAN or University of Houston Primary LAN. Division 25 shall provide and install all components of the Secondary LAN as specified in Division 25. Network speed vs. the number of controllers on the LAN shall be dictated by the response time and trending requirements and other requirements of the Specifications. The BAS Secondary LAN shall not utilize Network Data cable trays without owner approval. BAS Secondary LAN utilizing Network Data cable trays shall comply with the with Division 27 Communication specifications.

D. Dynamic Data Access: Any data throughout any level of the network shall be available to and accessible by all other devices, Controllers and OWS, whether directly connected or connected remotely.



E. Remote Data Access: The system shall support the following methods of remote access to the building data. All remote access shall be approved by University of Houston Information Security department prior to installation. Remote access authorization requires completion of a “Person of Interest” Form.

1. Browser-based access: A remote user using a standard browser will be able access all control system facilities and graphics with proper password. Owner will secure and pay for the continuous Internet connection. The following paradigms are acceptable for browser-based access:

a. Native Internet-based user interfaces (HTML, XML, etc.) that do not require a plug-in.

b. User interfaces that via a standard browser use a freely distributed and automatically downloaded and installed plug-in or ‘thick’ client that presents the user interface across the web.

F. The communication speed between the controllers, LAN interface devices, CSS, and operator interface devices shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time under any loading condition. Contractor shall submit guaranteed response times with Shop Drawings including calculations to support the guarantee. In no case shall delay times between an event, request, or command initiation and its completion be greater than those listed herein. Contractor shall modify their BAS control design as necessary to accomplish these performance requirements.

1. 5 seconds between a Level 1 (critical) alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator workstation.

2. 10 seconds between a Level 2 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator workstation.

3. 20 seconds between a Level 3-5 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator workstation.

4. 10 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to change a setpoint and the subsequent change in the controller.

5. 5 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to start/stop a device and the subsequent command to be received at the controller.

6. 10 seconds between a change of value or state of an input and it being updated on the operator interface.

7. 10 seconds between an operator selection of a graphic and it completely painting the screen and updating at least ten (10) points.

G. Control Systems Server (CSS): This computer (or computers) shall maintain the systems configuration and programming database, and shall be restricted to Owner control It shall hold the backup files of the information downloaded into the individual controllers and as such support uploading and downloading that information directly to/from the controllers. It shall also act as a control information server to non-control system based programs. It shall allow secure multiple-access to the control information. Refer to Section 25 11 09 - BAS Operator Interfaces for CSS requirements.

H. The Operator Interface shall provide for overall system supervision, graphical user interface, management report generation, alarm annunciation, and remote monitoring. Refer to Section 25 11 09 – BAS Operator Interfaces.



I. The BCs, AACs, ASCs, and SDs shall monitor, control, and provide the field interface forall points specified. Each BC, AAC, or ASC shall be capable of performing all specifiedenergy management functions, and all DDC functions, independent of other BCs, AACs, orASCs and operator interface devices as more fully specified in Section 25 14 00 - BAS FieldPanels.

J. Systems Configuration Database: The system architecture shall support maintaining thesystems configuration database on a server or workstation on the Local Supervisory LAN.BAS shall provide user tools to the Owner that allow configuring, updating, maintaining, etc.current configurations and settings whether they are initiated at the server or the end device.

1. Database Schema shall be published (via ODBC or SQL) and provided to the Owner tofacilitate easy access to the data.

2. Database shall be ODBC compliant or a data access driver shall be provided to act as anODBC or OLE DB data provider.

K. Interruptions or fault at any point on any Primary Controller LAN shall not interruptcommunications between other BAS nodes on the network. If a LAN is severed, separatednetworks shall continue to operate and communications within each network shall continueuninterrupted.

L. Anytime any controller’s database or program is changed in the field, the controller shallbe capable of automatically uploading the new data to the CSS.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver each piece of equipment and control device in original factory shipping andpackaging.. Vendor shall maintain cartons during shipping, storage and handling as requiredto prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Storeequipment and materials inside and protect from weather.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warrant all products and labor for the full manufacturer’s warranty periodor for two years (whichever is greater)] after substantial completion.

B. The Owner reserves the right to make changes to the BAS during the Warranty Period.Such changes do not constitute a waiver of warranty. Contractor shall warrant parts andinstallation work regardless of any such changes made by Owner, unless the Contractorprovides clear and convincing evidence that a specific problem is the result of such changesto the BAS. Any disagreement between Owner and Contractor on such matters shall besubject to resolution through the Contract ‘Disputes’ clause.

Engineer shall consult with Owner prior to specifying the response times. Quicker response times may be dictated by the type of systems and facility. Edit to suit the Project.

C. At no cost to the Owner, during the Warranty Period, Contractor shall providemaintenance services for software, firmware and hardware components as specified below:

1. Maintenance services shall be provided for all devices and hardware specified in theContract Documents. Service all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations.



2. Emergency Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component or failure of any control programming that would result in property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired following telephonic notification by the Owner to the Contractor. Emergency service shall be provided 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, and 365 days per year with no exceptions and at no cost to the Owner.

a. Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided within two (2) hours of the Owner's initial telephone request for service.

b. In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the Owner's Site within four (4) hours of the Owner's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.

3. Normal Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component or failure of any control programming that would not result in property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired following telephonic notification by the Owner to the Contractor.

a. Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided within eight (8) working hours (Contractor specified 40 hours per week normal working period) of the Owner's initial telephone request for service.

b. In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the Owner's Site within three (3) working days of the Owner's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.

4. At any time during the Warranty Period that Contractor is on Site for maintenance, emergency, or normal service, Contractor shall notify Owner via UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Building Management Services and the local building operating personnel. Contractor shall notify said personnel of all work anticipated being involved for the service work. In addition, no work affecting system operation shall commence until express permission is granted via email or other written method After the work is completed a work order ticket describing in detail all work performed (i.e. hardware replaced or serviced, software or firmware modifications made, etc.), hours worked, follow-up work required, etc., must be signed by an authorized building operators or Building Monitoring Services personnel.

5. Owner’s Telephonic Request for Service: Contractor shall specify a maximum of three telephone numbers for Owner to call in the event of a need for service. At least one of the lines shall be attended at any given time at all times. One of the three contacted technicians shall respond to every call within 15 minutes.

6. Technical Support: Contractor shall provide technical support by telephone throughout the Warranty Period.

7. Preventive maintenance shall be provided throughout the Warranty Period in accordance with the hardware component manufacturer's requirements.

8. In the last month of the Warranty Period, all System software and controller firmware, software, drivers, etc. will be upgraded to the latest release (version) in effect at the end of the Warranty Period.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. The BAS and digital control and communications components installed as work of this Contract shall be an integrated distributed processing system of the following manufacturer or communication protocol. No other products will be considered as substitutions.

B. Accepted BAS manufacturers include:

1. Lab systems: Phoenix

2. Building Automation Systems: Tridium, and Honeywell (Alerton)

2.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without imperfections or blemishes, and shall not be damaged in any way. Used equipment shall not be used in any way for the permanent installation except where Drawings or Specifications specifically allow existing materials to remain in place.

2.04 UNIFORMITY

A. To the extent practical, all equipment of the same type serving the same function shall be identical and from the same manufacturer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

C. Fasteners requiring explosive powder (shooting) or pneumatic-driven actuation will not be acceptable under any circumstances.

D. Refer to additional requirements in other Sections of this Specification.

Digital control stations should specifically be shown on the Drawings. Engineer should select appropriate wall/floor locations that minimize wire and tubing runs, and coordinate these locations with other disciplines. Engineer shall provide a three foot access door swing clearance at station location If the Project is a controls renovation only, locate spare breakers in a power panel where the BAS Provider can obtain 120V power and indicate on the Drawings.



3.03 DIGITAL CONTROL STATIONS, CONTROLLER QUANTITY AND LOCATION

Engineer shall designate locations for control stations and specifically reserve wall/floor space and indicate it on the Drawings and coordinate with other disciplines. Engineer shall provide a three foot access door swing clearance at station location. .

A. Individual Digital Control Stations (DCS) are referenced to indicate allocation of points to each DCS and DCS location. Digital control stations shall consist of one or multiple controllers to meet requirements of this Specification.

B. Where a DCS is referenced, Contractor shall provide at least one (1) controller, and additional controllers as required, in sufficient quantity to meet the requirements of this Specification. Restrictions in applying controllers are specified in Section 25 14 00 - BAS Field Panels. Contractor shall extend power to the DCS from an acceptable power panel. If the BAS provider wishes to further distribute panels to other locations, Contractor is responsible for extending power to that location also. Furthermore, Contractor is responsible for ensuring adequate locations for the panels that do not interfere with other requirements of the Project and maintain adequate clearance for maintenance access.

C. Contractor shall locate DCS’s as referenced in the contract documents. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide enough controllers to ensure a completely functioning system, according to the point list and sequence of operations.

Engineer shall consult with Owner prior to specifying the DCS and Controller requirements. Controller requirements shall be dictated by the type of systems and facility. Edit to suit the Project.

D. Contractor shall provide a minimum of the following:

1. One DCS (including at least one controller) in each chilled water/hot water plant mechanical room

2. One DCS (including at least one controller) for each air handler located in applicable mechanical room

3. One DCS (including at least one controller) for each critical fan system

4. One DCS (including at least one controller) for each pumping system

5. One DCS (including at least one controller) for each steam pressure reducing station

6. One controller for each piece of terminal equipment unit located at the terminal equipment.

3.04 SURGE PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall furnish and install any power supply surge protection, filters, etc. as necessary for proper operation and protection of all BCs, AAC/ASCS operator interfaces, printers, routers, gateways and other hardware and interface devices. All equipment shall be capable of handling voltage variations 10 percent above or below measured nominal value, with no effect on hardware, software, communications, and data storage.

3.05 CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLY

It is preferable to have the Division 26 Contractor supply power to DCS locations and provide the appropriate level of power for all control system components as located by the Engineer. For



instance, it is good practice to supply emergency power (and sometimes uninterruptible power when available) at critical controllers, control system servers, routers, workstations etc. This Section, however, applies mainly to retrofits with no Division 26 Contractor.

A. BAS Provider shall extend all power source wiring required for operation of all equipment and devices provided under Division 25 and the Drawings.

The following item will have to be customized for each system and Project. The consideration is where to provide power for controllers. For distributed controllers that are associated with one unit, it is convenient to power them along with the system so the controller can take action based on the presence of power. However on large centralized panels, it may be best to put these on the most reliable source of power that serves the equipment being controlled and then provide for individual monitoring of the various system power sources by the controller. The object is to make a robust system that does not interpret power failures as device failure and therefore in some instances have to take down the unit for manual acknowledged reset. This can compromise reliability.

B. General requirements for obtaining power include the following:

1. In the case where additional power is required, obtain power from a source that feeds the equipment being controlled such that both the control component and the equipment are powered from the same panel. Where equipment is powered from a 460V source, obtain power from the electrically most proximate 120v source fed from a common origin.

2. Where control equipment is located inside a new equipment enclosure, coordinate with the equipment manufacturer and feed the control with the same source as the equipment. If the equipment’s control transformer is large enough and is the correct voltage to supply the controls, it may be used. If the equipment’s control transformer is not large enough or of the correct voltage to supply the controls, provide separate transformer

3. Where a controller controls multiple systems on varying levels of power reliability (normal, emergency, and/or interruptible), the controller shall be powered by the highest level of reliability served. Furthermore, the controller in that condition shall monitor each power type served to determine so logic can assess whether a failure is due to a power loss and respond appropriately. A three-phase monitor into a digital input shall suffice as power monitoring.

The following item will have to be customized for each system and Project. The consideration is where to provide UPS’s for controllers. Engineer shall consult with Owner prior to specifying the UPS requirements. UPS requirements shall be dictated by the type of systems and facility. Edit to suit the Project.

4. Provide an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system battery backup for each controller or DCS, as shown on the Drawings or specified except terminal equipment controllers. UPS shall protect against blackouts, brownouts, surges and noise.

a. UPS shall include LAN port and modem line surge protection.

b. UPS shall be sized for a 7-minute full load runtime, 23-minute 1/2 load runtime, with a typical runtime of up to 60 minutes. Transfer time shall be 2-4 milliseconds.

c. UPS shall provide a 480-joule suppression rating and current suppression protection for 36,000 amps and provide 90 percent recharge capability in 2-4 hours. Suppression response time shall be instantaneous. UPS low voltage switching shall occur when supply voltage is less than 94 volts.



d. Provide a Maintenance Bypass Switch that allows input voltage to bypass the UPS and directly power the connected equipment if an abnormal condition prevents the UPS from supporting the load, or if the UPS is required to be taken out of service. Provide all software, cables, peripherals etc. for a complete system.

5. Standalone Functionality: Refer to Section 25 14 00.

The Engineer shall carefully coordinate the training requirements with the needs of Owner’s facilities staff. Expansions of existing systems obviously require less training than new systems. The following generally outlines an on-Site training session. The more advanced training may be better provided off Site on a case-by-case basis. Edit to suit Project. 3.06 BAS START-UP, COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Section 25 08 00.

END OF SECTION 25 00 00

University of Houston Project Name

AE Project Number: BAS General - Retrofit 25 00 10 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 00 10 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS (BAS) GENERAL - RETROFIT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications, Electronic Safety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may be reciprocally applicable to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. This Section applies to situations where controls are being replaced on existingequipment but not where core equipment is being replaced.

2. Description of Work

3. Quality Assurance.

4. System Architecture.

5. Distributed Processing Units/Quantity and Location.

6. Demolition and Reuse of Existing Materials and Equipment.

7. Sequence of Work.

B. Where conversion from pneumatic is required, furnish and install a direct digital control and building automation system (BAS). The new BAS shall utilize electronic sensing, microprocessor-based digital control, and electronic actuation of dampers and valves (except where noted otherwise) to perform control sequences and functions specified. The BAS for this Project will generally consist of monitoring and control of systems described herein. Reference shall also be made to control Drawings, Sequence of Operation, and points lists.

C. The HVAC systems being controlled are [describe the type of mechanical systems included in the Project]. This Section defines the manner and method by which these controls function.


A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project.

C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:

draft



1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

2. ASHRAE 135: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation andControl Networks. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-ConditioningEngineers, Inc. and all current addenda and annexes.

3. Electronics Industries Alliance:

a. EIA-709.1-A-99: Control Network Protocol Specification.

b. EIA-709.3-99: Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel Specification.

c. EIA-232: Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.

d. EIA-458: Standard Optical Fiber Material Classes and Preferred Sizes.

e. EIA-485: Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and Receivers foruse in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems.

f. EIA-472: General and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Cable.

g. EIA-475: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Connectors and allSectional Specifications.

h. EIA-573: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Field Portable Polishing Devicefor Preparation Optical Fiber and all Sectional Specifications.

i. EIA-590: Standard for Physical Location and Protection of Below-Ground FiberOptic Cable Plant and all Sectional Specifications.

4. NEMA Compliance:

a. NEMA 250: Enclosure for Electrical Equipment.

b. NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial Controls.

5. NFPA Compliance:

a. NFPA 90A: "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and VentilatingSystems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.

b. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (NEC).

6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. IEEE 142: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and CommercialPower Systems.

b. IEEE 802.3: CSMA/CD (Ethernet – Based) LAN.

c. IEEE 802.4: Token Bus Working Group (ARCNET – Based) LAN.

d. IEEE 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control inElectric Power Systems.



1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

USE “A” TO DEFINE ANY SPECIFIC QUALIFICATIONS NEEDED; OTHERWISE LEAVE “RESERVED”.

A. [Reserved].

B. Niagara 4 (that drives an HTML 5 driver) Product Line Demonstrated History: The productline being proposed for the Project must have an installed history of demonstratedsatisfactory operation for a length of one (1) year since date of final completion in at least ten(10) installations of comparative size and complexity. Documents with references shall besubmitted verifying this requirement has been met at Owner’s request.

C. BAS Installers Field Coordinator and Sequence Programmer Qualifications: Individual(s)shall be certified and specialize in and be experienced with control system installation for notless than five (5) years. Proposed field coordinator shall have experience with the installationof the proposed product line for not less than two (2) projects of similar size and complexity.Installer shall submit the names of the proposed individual and at least one alternate for eachduty at Owner’s request. Proposed individuals must show proof of the following training:

1. Product Line Training: Individuals overseeing the installation and configuration of theproposed product line must provide evidence of the most advanced training offered bythe manufacturer on that product line for installation and configuration.

2. Programming Training: Individuals involved with programming the Site-specificsequences shall provide evidence of the most advanced programming training offered bythe vendor of the programming application offered by the manufacturer.

D. The BAS and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 916) as anEnergy Management System.

E. The BAS shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UUKL 864) for Supervised SmokeControl.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit documents under provisions of Division 01. Two (2) copies of the materialsshall be delivered directly to UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Management Services staff, inaddition to the copies required by other Sections. In addition, an electronic version of thecompleted materials shall be provided to the FPC Archivist on CD, DVD or thumbdrive.Refer to Section 25 08 10 for additional Commissioning submittal requirements.

B. Electronic Submittals: While all requirements for hard copy submittal apply, controlsubmittals and operation and maintenance (O&M) information shall also be provided inelectronic format as follows:

1. Drawings and Diagrams: Shop Drawings shall be provided on electronic media as anAutoCAD drawing per Owner’s CAD standards. All ‘x reference’ and font files must beprovided with AutoCAD files.

2. Other Submittals: All other submittals shall be provided in Adobe Portable DocumentFormat.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device, panel,and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electricalcharacteristics, and material finishes. Include installation and start-up instructions.



D. Record Documents:

1. BAS Vendor shall submit separately and directly to Owner a pricing breakdown of all cost associated to Project for review. This is to include but not be limited to material quantity, description, unit list price, multiplier, cost, extended cost, material costs adjustment less Owner’s discount price, outside material price totaled and itemized, itemized subcontract price associated to Project, and total Project support price.

a. BAS Vendor’s labor hours quantities shall be itemized by mechanical labor, electrical labor, and design and management labor. Hour quantities shall be itemized by journeyman rate, technician rate and design/management rate with quantity of hours listed separately.

b. All estimated overtime shall be disclosed prior to overtime work. Profit for Project shall be as described in the project agreement. Total Project price shall not exceed the sum of the listed itemized costs.

c. Provide an accurate spreadsheet breakdown of physical point counts of all analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs, digital outputs, building controllers and application specific controllers [insert link]. The total point count for the project shall be itemized in a logical manner to allow the owner to confirm point count accuracy. Below is an example.

Project Physical Point Count

Draw

ing

M-0

06

Draw

ing

M-0

07

Draw

ing

M-0

08

Draw

ing

M-0

10

Draw

ing

M-0

14

Draw

ing

M-0

15

Physical Digital Input(s) Physical Digital Output(s) Physical Analog Input(s) Physical Analog Output(s) Building Controller(s)

Application Specific Controller(s) TOTALS

d. All subcontracts greater than $5K shall be competitively priced by a minimum of

three subcontractors. Owner shall review and make recommendation regarding the use of subcontractors. Both subcontract proposals shall be fully disclosed.

e. This subcontractor pricing summary, including any attachments, is intended only for the Owner and contains confidential and/or privileged information. Any unauthorized review; use, disclosure or distribution is prohibited.

2. Qualifications: Manufacturer, installer, and key personnel qualifications as indicated for the appropriate item above.



3. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings electronically on AutoCAD software for each control system, including a complete drawing for each air handling unit, system, pump, device, etc. with all point descriptors, addresses and point names indicated. Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

a. System Architecture and System Layout:

1) One-line diagram indicating schematic locations of all control units, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate network number, device ID, device instance, MAC address, drawing reference number, and controller type for each control unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the diagram. All control units shall map back into BMS main server (supervisor).

2) Provide floor plans locating all control units, workstations, servers, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Include all WAN and LAN communication wiring routing, power wiring, power originating sources, and low voltage power wiring. Indicate network number, device ID, device instance, MAC address, drawing reference number, and controller type for each control unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the floor plans. Wiring routing conditions shall be maintained accurately throughout the construction period and the Record Drawings shall be updated to accurately reflect accurate, actual installed conditions.

b. Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices. Include written description of sequence of operation.

c. All physical points on the schematic flow diagram shall be indicated with names, descriptors, and point addresses identified as listed in the point summary table.

d. With each schematic, provide a point summary table listing building number and abbreviation, system type, equipment type, full point name, point description, Ethernet backbone network number, network number, device ID, object ID (object type, instance number). If this information is not available at the time of Shop Drawings submittals, furnish with O&M manual documentation for Owner review and approval. See Section 25 15 10 for additional requirements.

e. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.

f. Label each input and output with the appropriate range.

g. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device identification to match schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual product ordering number, manufacturer, description, size, voltage range, pressure range, temperature range, etc. as applicable.

h. With each schematic, provide (using spreadsheet provided by BMS) valve and actuator information including size, Cv, design flow, design pressure drop, manufacturer, model number, close off rating, etc. Indicate normal positions of spring return valves and dampers.



i. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include bothladder logic type diagram for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detaileddigital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers andterminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination Drawings onseparate Drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearlydifferentiate between portions of wiring that are existing, factory-installed andportions to be field-installed.

j. Details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling shown inplan or elevation indicating the installed locations.

k. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.

l. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included and theHVAC system controlled.

m. Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.

n. Legend and list of abbreviations.

o. Record copies of product data, as built control Shop Drawings and final sequenceof operation updated to reflect the final installed condition.

p. Provide network architecture Record Drawings showing all nodes including adescription field with specific controller identification, description and locationinformation.

q. Provide record riser diagram showing the location of all controllers. Indicatedevice instance, MAC address and drawing reference number.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data (provide electronically in Owner’s format)

1. Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device,control unit, and accessory.

2. Submit BAS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for allworkstation hardware and software and workstation peripherals.

3. Submit BAS advanced Programming Manuals for each controller type and for allworkstation software.

4. Manufacturer’s Certificates: For all listed and/or labeled products, provide certificate ofconformance.

5. Product Warranty Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s product warranty certificatescovering the hardware provided.



1.06 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The communication speed between the controllers, LAN interface devices, CSS, andoperator interface devices shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time under anyloading condition. Contractor shall submit guaranteed response times with Shop Drawingsincluding calculations to support the guarantee. In no case shall delay times between anevent, request, or command initiation and its completion be greater than those listed herein.Contractor shall modify their BAS control design as necessary to accomplish theseperformance requirements. Generally requirements do not apply when a remote connectionmust be established via modem:

1. 5 seconds between a Level 1 (critical) alarm occurrence and enunciation at operatorworkstation.

2. 10 seconds between a Level 2 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operatorworkstation.

3. 20 seconds between a Level 3-5 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operatorworkstation.

4. 10 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to change a setpoint and the subsequent change in the controller.

5. 5 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to start/stop adevice and the subsequent command to be received at the controller.

6. 10 seconds between a change of value or state of an input and it being updated on theoperator interface.

7. 10 seconds between an operator selection of a graphic and it completely painting thescreen and updating at least ten (10) points.

B. Interruptions or fault at any point on any Primary Controller LAN shall not interruptcommunications between other BAS nodes on the network. If a LAN is severed, two (2)separate networks shall be formed and communications within each network shall continueuninterrupted.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide equipment and control devices in original factory-shipping cartons. Maintain cartonsduring shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and toeliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside andprotect from weather.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warranty all products and labor for a period of [One (1) year minimum] afterSubstantial Completion.



B. The Owner reserves the right to make changes to the BAS during the Warranty Period. Such changes do not constitute a waiver of warranty. Contractor shall warrant parts and installation work regardless of any such changes made by Owner, unless the Contractor provides clear and convincing evidence that a specific problem is the result of such changes to the BAS. Any disagreement between Owner and Contractor on such matters shall be subject to resolution through the Contract ‘Disputes’ clause.

1. At any time during the Warranty Period that Contractor is on the Project Site for maintenance, emergency, or normal service, Contractor shall notify Owner via UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Monitoring Services and the local building operating personnel.

2. Contractor shall notify said personnel of all work anticipated being involved for the service work. In addition, no work affecting system operation shall commence until written permission is granted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. The BAS and digital control and communications components installed as Work of this Contract shall be an integrated distributed processing system of the following manufacturer or communication protocol. No other products will be considered as substitutions.

1. NIAGARA 4 (THAT DRIVES AN HTML 5 DRIVER): Provide control products and systems that completely integrate and operate from the existing system currently in operation at the institution. All access, programming, alarming, and system configuration shall be utilized from the existing system software and database without any third party programs or gateways.

2. Substitutions: None


A. Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without imperfections or blemishes, and shall not be damaged in any way. Used equipment shall not be used in any way for the permanent installation except where Drawings or Specifications specifically allow existing materials to remain in place.

2.04 UNIFORMITY

A. To the extent practical, all equipment of the same type serving the same function shall be identical and from the same manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION



C. Fasteners requiring explosive powder (shooting) or pneumatic-driven actuation will not be acceptable under any circumstances.

D. Refer to additional requirements in other Sections of this Specification.

3.02 SURGE PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall furnish and install any power supply surge protection, filters, etc. as necessary for proper operation and protection of all BCs, AAC/ASCS operator interfaces, printers, routers, gateways and other hardware and interface devices. All equipment shall be capable of handling voltage variations 10 percent above or below measured nominal value, with no affect on hardware, software, communications, and data storage.

3.03 CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLY

A. BAS Provider shall extend all power source wiring required for operation of all equipment and devices provided under Division 25 and the Drawings if not specified under Division 26.

B. General requirements for obtaining power include the following:

1. All control power for a given stand alone controller and all associated controls for this stand alone controller shall originate from the same circuit.

2. All mechanical equipment which is supplied with emergency power shall have the DDC controller supplied with emergency power.

3. Provide an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) as indicated on the Drawings or as necessary. UPS shall protect against blackouts, brownouts, surges and noise.

a. UPS shall include LAN port and modem line surge protection.

b. UPS shall be sized for a 7-minute full load runtime, 23-minute 1/2 load runtime, with a typical runtime of up to 60 minutes. Transfer time shall be 2-4 milliseconds.

c. UPS shall provide a 480-joule suppression rating and current suppression protection for 36,000 amps and provide 90 percent recharge capability in 2-4 hours. Suppression response time shall be instantaneous. UPS low voltage switching shall occur when supply voltage is less than 94 volts.

d. Provide a Maintenance Bypass Switch that allows input voltage to bypass the UPS and directly power the connected equipment if an abnormal condition prevents the UPS from supporting the load, or if the UPS is required to be taken out of service.

e. Provide all software, cables, peripherals etc. for a complete system.

UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON PROJECT NAME

AE Project Number: BAS Commissioning 25 08 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 08 00 – BAS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing

C. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications,Electronic Safety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to thisSection, and this Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may bereciprocally applicable to this Section..

1.02 SUMMARY


1. BAS and equipment testing and Start-up.

2. Validation of proper and thorough installation of BAS and equipment.

3. Functional testing of control systems.

4. Documentation of tests, procedures, and installations.

5. Coordination of BAS training.

6. Documentation of BAS Operation and Maintenance materials.

B. This Section defines responsibilities of the Contractor to commission the BAS n situationswhere controls are being replaced on existing equipment but not where core equipment isbeing replaced.

C. The term “Owner” shall include a representative from UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON BuildingAutomation Services but is not limited to represent the Owner exclusively. MEP Designconsultant may also be authorized to act as Owner’s Designated Representative ODR).Coordinate all activities to include all of the Owner’s representatives.

D. Commissioning is the process of ensuring that all building systems are installed and performinteractively according to the design intent, the systems are efficient and cost effective andmeet the Owner’s operational needs, the installation is adequately documented, and that theOperators are adequately trained. It serves as a tool to minimize post-occupancy operationalproblems. It establishes testing and communication protocols in an effort to advance thebuilding systems from installation to full dynamic operation and optimization.

E. The Contractor shall direct, coordinate, and oversee the Commissioning process and witnessfunctional performance testing.



F. The Owner’s TAB Firm may write the Owner approved control sequence verification sheetsfor functional performance tests and develop forms using the BAS Provider’s point log to testeach point back to the graphical interface. The BAS Provider shall furnish the Contractorwith an estimated time to complete this task, which Contractor will incorporate in the ProjectSchedule. In the event Owner’s TAB Firm is not under contract for the Project, theContractor shall write the Owner approved sequence verification sheets for functionalperformance tests.


A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identifiedby a specific edition date.


C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements andstandards addressed within references.

1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Completely install and thoroughly inspect, startup, preliminarily test, adjust, balance, anddocument all systems and equipment.

B. Assist Owner and/or TAB firm in verification and functional performance testing. This willgenerally include the following:

1. Attend Commissioning progress and coordination meetings.

2. Prepare and submit required draft forms and systems information.

3. Establish trend logs of system operation as specified herein.

4. Demonstrate system operation.

5. Manipulate systems and equipment to facilitate testing.

6. Provide instrumentation necessary for verification and performance testing.

7. Manipulate control systems to facilitate verification and performance testing.

8. Train Owner as specified in this Section.

Engineer shall specify the amount of software optimization hours appropriate for the size and complexity of the project; Edit accordingly. C. Provide a BAS Technician to work at the direction of Owner for software optimization

assistance for a maximum of [40] hours. Refer to Part Three of this Section for a descriptionof the software optimization.

D. Compensation for Retesting: Contractor shall compensate Owner for Site time necessitatedby incompleteness of systems or equipment at time of functional performance testing. Alltesting failures, which require on-Site time for retesting, will be considered actual damages tothe Owner. Owner shall charge Contractor $100 for each repeat site visit due to testingfailure. Reimbursement to all parties under Contract with the Owner who are affected by theretesting shall be included in the Contract modificaton.



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The following list outlines the general sequence of events for submittals and commissioning:

1. Submit product data and Shop Drawings, and receive approval.

2. Submit BAS logic documentation, and receive approval.

3. Submit background graphic screens, and receive approval.

4. Submit Start-Up Checklists and manufacturer’s start-up procedures for all equipmentprovided by the Contractor.

5. Install BAS.

6. Submit BAS Start-Up Test Agenda and Schedule for review.

7. Receive BAS Startup Test Agenda and Schedule approval.

8. Submit calibration certifications for verification equipment.

9. Submit Training Plan.

10. Simulate sequencing and debug program off-line to the extent practical.

11. Place systems under BAS control where applicable during a scheduled outage. EHLSpersonnel shall be present at scheduled Research outages.

12. Perform BAS Startup during a scheduled outage.

13. Prepare and initiate trend log data storage and format trend graphs.

14. Submit completed BAS Start-Up Reports and initial draft of the Operating andMaintenance (O&M) Manuals.

15. Receive BAS Startup Report approval and approval to schedule Demonstrations andCommissioning.

16. Demonstrate systems to Owner.

17. Submit Trend Logs in electronic format specified.

18. Receive demonstration approval and approval to schedule Acceptance Period, perparagraph 3.07.

19. Train Owner on BAS operation and maintenance.

20. Substantial Completion.

21. Begin Acceptance Phase.

22. Two-week Operational Test.

23. Perform Functional Performance Testing including point to point verification to graphicalinterface.

24. Receive Acceptance Period approval, which is Functional Completion for the BAS.



25. Train Owner on final sequences and modes of operation.

26. Install framed control Drawings.

27. Provide Level 1 (view only) password access to the Owner.

28. Revise and re-submit Record Drawings and O&M Manuals.

29. Manager of Building Automation Services sign-off required.

30. Provide Admin level access to Owner.

31. Final Acceptance.

32. Begin Warranty Phase.

33. Schedule and begin Opposite Season acceptance period.

34. Receive Opposite Season acceptance period approval.

35. Submit Record Drawings and O&M Manuals.

36. Update framed control Drawings.

37. Complete Owner (AHJ) Training.

38. End-of-Warranty date/period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state andlocal requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrumentation required to verify readings and to test the system and equipmentperformance shall be provided by Contractor and made available to Owner. Generally, notesting equipment will be required beyond that required to perform Contractor’s Work underthese Contract Documents. All equipment used for testing and calibration shall be NIST/NBStraceable and calibrated within the preceding 6-month period. Certificates of calibration shallbe submitted.

2.03 TAB AND COMMISSIONING PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL

A. For new Projects, Contractor shall provide portable operators terminal or hand held device tofacilitate Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) and calibration. This software or deviceshall support all functions and allow querying and editing of all parameters required for propercalibration and Start-up.

B. Connections shall be provided local to the device being calibrated. For instance, for VAVterminal units, connection of the operator’s terminal shall be either at the sensor or at theterminal unit. Otherwise a wireless system shall be provided to facilitate this localfunctionality.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.


3.02 BAS START-UP TESTING, ADJUSTING, CALIBRATION

A. Work and/or systems installed under this Division shall be fully functioning prior toDemonstration and Acceptance Phase. Contractor shall start, test, adjust, and calibrate allwork and/or systems under this Contract, as described below:

1. Inspect the installation of all devices. Review the manufacturer’s installation instructionsand validate that the device is installed in accordance with them.

2. Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages, and verify that all circuits are free fromfaults.

3. Verify integrity/safety of all electrical connections. [For the following control settings,initially use the control setting that was used by existing control system, unless otherwiseindicated. For AHUs that use a throttled outside air damper position when minimumoutside air is required, contractor shall mark existing minimum outside air damperposition to allow replication by new controls.]

4. Before any testing, adjusting, or balancing work commences, vendor must submit agraphics screens package to BMS for approval.

5. Coordinate with Owner’s TAB Firm to obtain control settings that are determined frombalancing procedures. Record the following control settings as obtained from Owner’sTAB Firm, and note any TAB deficiencies in the BAS Start-Up Report:

a. Optimum duct static pressure setpoints for VAV air handling units.

b. Minimum outside air damper settings for air handling units.

c. Optimum differential pressure setpoints for variable speed pumping systems.

d. Calibration parameters for flow control devices such as VAV terminal units and flowmeasuring stations.

1) Contractor shall provide hand-held device as a minimum to the TAB Firm tofacilitate calibration. Connection for any given device shall be local to it (i.e. atthe VAV terminal unit or at the thermostat). Hand-held device or portableoperator’s terminal shall allow querying and editing of parameters required forproper calibration and start-up.

6. Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing and actuating devices. Calibrateeach instrumentation device by making a comparison between the BAS display and thereading at the device, using an instrument traceable to the National Bureau of Standards,which shall be at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated (e.g., if fielddevice is +/-0.5 percent accurate, test equipment shall be +/-0.25 percent accurate oversame range). Record the measured value and displayed value for each device in theBAS Start-up Report.



7. Check and set zero and span adjustments for all transducers and transmitters.

8. For dampers and valves:

a. Check for adequate installation including free travel throughout range and adequateseal.

b. Where loops are sequenced, check for proper control without overlap.

9. For actuators:

a. Check to insure that device seals tightly when the appropriate signal is applied to theoperator.

b. Check for appropriate fail position, and that the stroke and range is as required.

c. For pneumatic operators, adjust the operator spring compression as required toachieve close-off. If positioner or volume booster is installed on the operator,calibrate per manufacturer’s procedure to achieve spring range indicated. Checksplit-range positioners to verify proper operation. Record settings for each device inthe BAS Pre-Commissioning Report.

d. For sequenced electronic actuators, calibrate per manufacturer’s instructions torequired ranges.

10. Check each digital control point by making a comparison between the control commandat the CU and the status of the controlled device. Check each digital input point bymaking a comparison of the state of the sensing device and the Operator Interfacedisplay. Record the results for each device in the BAS Start-Up Report.

11. For outputs to reset other manufacturer’s devices (for example, VSDs) and for feedbackfrom them, calibrate ranges to establish proper parameters. Coordinate withrepresentative of the respective manufacturer and obtain their approval of the installation.

12. Verify proper sequences by using the approved checklists to record results and submitwith BAS Start-Up Report. Verify proper sequence and operation of all specifiedfunctions.

13. Verify that all safety devices trip at appropriate conditions. Adjust setpoints accordingly.

Engineer shall provide the tolerances for the type and criticality of the area or zone being served by the equipment. Engineer may have to specify two or more sets of tolerances for a specific Project. Edit accordingly.

14. Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset orovershoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control loop inthe BAS Start-up Report. Except from a startup, maximum allowable variance from setpoint for controlled variables under normal load fluctuations shall be as follows. Within 3minutes of any upset (for which the system has the capability to respond) in the controlloop, tolerances shall be maintained (exceptions noted):

a. Duct air temperature: [±1 degrees F].

b. Space Temperature: [±1 degrees F within 30 minutes].

c. Chilled Water: [±1 degrees F].



d. Hot water temperature: [±3 degrees F].

e. Duct pressure: [± 0.25 inches wg].

f. Water pressure: [±1 psid].

g. Duct or space Humidity: [±5 percent within 30 minutes].

h. Air flow control: [±5] percent of setpoint velocity.

i. Space Pressurization (on active control systems): [±0.05 inches wg] with no door orwindow movements.

15. For interface and DDC control panels:

a. Ensure devices are properly installed with adequate clearance for maintenance andwith clear labels in accordance with the Record Drawings.

b. Ensure that terminations are safe, secure and labeled in accordance with the RecordDrawings.

c. Check power supplies for proper voltage ranges and loading.

d. Ensure that wiring and tubing are run in a neat and workman-like manner, eitherbound or enclosed in trough.

e. Check for adequate signal strength on communication networks.

f. Check for standalone performance of controllers by disconnecting the controller fromthe LAN. Verify the event is annunciated at Operator Interfaces. Verify that thecontrolling LAN reconfigures as specified in the event of a LAN disconnection.

g. Ensure that all outputs and devices fail to their proper positions/states.

h. Ensure that buffered and/or volatile information is held through power outage.

i. With all system and communications operating normally, sample and recordupdate/annunciation times for critical alarms fed from the panel to the OperatorInterface.

j. Check for proper grounding of all DDC panels and devices.

16. Low voltage and High voltage wiring must not be housed in the same conduit. BASwiring and fire alarm wiring must not be housed in the same conduit.For OperatorInterfaces:

a. Verify that all elements on the graphics are functional and are properly bound tophysical devices and/or virtual points, and that hot links or page jumps are functionaland logical.

b. Output all specified BAS reports for review and approval.

c. Verify that the alarm printing and logging is functional and per requirements.

d. Verify that trends are archiving to disk and provide a sample to the Owner for review.Analog trends are not acceptable



e. Verify that paging/dial-out alarm annunciation is functional and issues email notification. IP address will be provided by UH BMS.

f. Verify the functionality of remote Operator Interfaces and that a robust connection can be established consistently.

g. Verify that required third party software applications required with the bid are installed and are functional.

h. Start-up and check out control air compressors, air drying, and filtering systems in accordance with the appropriate Section and with manufacturer’s instructions.

i. Verify proper interface with fire alarm system.

B. Submit Start-Up Test Report: Report shall be completed, submitted, and approved prior to Substantial Completion.

3.03 SENSOR CHECKOUT AND CALIBRATION

A. General Checkout: Verify that all sensor locations are appropriate and are away from causes of erratic operation. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, make sure they are reading within 0.2 degrees F of each other for temperature and within a tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading of each other for pressure. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter.

B. Calibration: Calibrate all sensors using one of the following procedures:

1. Sensors Without Transmitters - Standard Application: Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor at various points across the range. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gauge or BAS) is within the tolerances specified for the sensor. If not, adjust offset and range, or replace sensor. Where sensors are subject to wide variations in the sensed variable, calibrate sensor within the highest and lowest 20 percentage of the expected range.

2. Sensors With Transmitters - Standard Application: Disconnect sensor. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and BAS control panel. Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired temperature. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until the ammeter reads 4 mA. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the OI. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform to tolerances. Reconnect sensor. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gauge or BAS) is within the tolerances specified. If not, replace sensor and repeat. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator. NOTE: when a sensor is disconnected, it shall not display old data (no “frozen in time” data).

C. Sensor Tolerance: Sensors shall be within the tolerances specified for the device. Refer to Section 25 11 00.



3.04 COIL VALVE LEAK CHECK

A. Verify proper close-off of the valves. Ensure the valve seats properly seat by simulating the maximum anticipated pressure difference across the circuit. Demonstrate to the Owner the verification of zero flow by measuring the coil differential pressure. If there is pressure differential, close the isolation valves to the coil to ensure the conditions change. If they do, this validates the valve is not closing. Remedy the condition by adjusting the stroke and range, increasing the actuator size/torque, replacing the seat, or replacing the valve as applicable.

3.05 VALVE STROKE SETUP AND CHECK

A. For all valve and actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the Operator Interface readout.

B. Set pumps to normal operating mode. Command valve closed: verify that valve is closed, and adjust output zero signal as required. Command valve open: verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required. Command the valve to various few intermediate positions. If actual valve position doesn’t reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics).

3.06 BAS DEMONSTRATION

A. All BAS Demonstration shall take place on the main Control Systems Server and UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON WAN. Schedule to add system to main Control Systems Server and UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON WAN with Owner at least two (2) weeks in advance to the demonstration. At the time of request, provide all documentation that the following criteria are met:

1. Updated BAS submittals in electronic and hard copy to Owner including the updated riser diagram for the system.

2. Reports on verification of Network Layout Verification including but not limited to Building Controller locations, cable routes with length of cable between controllers and any trunk extenders or trunk isolators.

3. Reports on verification of electrical characteristics of BAS network, communications and electrical integrity of Building Controllers.

4. Reports on verification of traffic on BAS Network including but not limited to COVs between Building Controllers, point commands by the operator, point commands by program across the network, alarm reporting on the network, any unresolved points in the system, integrity of the ports on any Building Controller isolator/extender and results of Building Controller tests running at selected baud rate.

5. Demonstrate to Owner the updates of databases without errors or faults between the temporary Control Systems Server and Building Controllers. If there is no temporary server, demonstrate to Owner after system is added to main Control Systems Server.

6. Reports on verification of system log files, interruption of log files of system traffic and overall acceptable operation of the system where a temporary Control Systems Server is utilized.



B. Demonstrate the operation of the BAS hardware, software, and all related components andsystems to the satisfaction of the Owner. Schedule the demonstration with the Owner seven(7) calendar days in advance. Demonstration shall not be scheduled until all hardware andsoftware submittals, and the Start-Up Test Report are approved. If the Work fails to conformto the Contract Documents, resulting in scheduling of additional Site visits by the Owner forre-demonstration, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for costs of subsequent Site visits (notless than $100 per visit).

C. The Contractor shall supply all personnel and equipment for the demonstration, including, butnot limited to, instruments, ladders, etc. Contractor-supplied personnel must be competentwith and knowledgeable of all project-specific hardware, software, and HVAC systems.Either qualified or certified technician acting as the company’s SME are required to facilitatethe operations of the system’s performance. All training documentation and submittals shallbe maintained at the Project Site.

D. Demonstration shall typically involve small representative samples of systems/equipmentrandomly selected by the Owner.

E. The system shall be demonstrated following the same procedures used in the Start-Up Testby using the approved Commissioning Checklists. Demonstration shall include, but notnecessarily be limited to, the following:

1. Demonstrate that required software is installed on BAS workstations. Demonstrate thatgraphic screens, alarms, trends, and reports are installed as submitted and approved.

2. Demonstrate that points specified and shown can be interrogated and/or commanded (asapplicable) from all workstations, as specified.

3. Demonstrate that remote dial-up communication abilities are in accordance with theseSpecifications.

4. Demonstrate correct calibration of input/output devices using the same methodsspecified for the Start-Up Tests. A maximum of 10 percent of I/O points shall be selectedat random by the Owner for demonstration. Upon failure of any device to meet thespecified end-to-end accuracy, an additional 10 percent of I/O points shall be selected atrandom by Owner for demonstration. This process shall be repeated until 100 percent ofrandomly selected I/O points have been demonstrated to meet specified end-to-endaccuracy.

5. Demonstrate that all DDC and other software programs exist at respective field panels.The Direct Digital Control (DDC) programming and point database shall be as submittedand approved.

6. Demonstrate that all DDC programs accomplish the specified sequence of operation.

7. Demonstrate that the panels and DDC network of panels automatically recover frompower failures within five (5) minutes after power is restored.

8. Demonstrate that the stand-alone operation of panels meets the requirements of theseSpecifications. Demonstrate that the panels' response to LAN communication failuresmeets the requirements of these Specifications.

9. Identify access to equipment selected by the Owner. Demonstrate that access issufficient to perform required maintenance.



10. Demonstrate that required trend graphs and trend logs are set up per the requirements.Provide a sample of the data archive. Indicate the file names and locations.

F. BAS Demonstration shall be completed and approved prior to Substantial Completion.

G. Any tests successfully completed during the demonstration will be recorded as passed for thefunctional performance testing and will not have to be retested.

3.07 BAS ACCEPTANCE PERIOD

A. After approval of the BAS Demonstration and prior to Contract Close Out Acceptance Phaseshall commence. Acceptance Period shall not be scheduled until all HVAC systems are inoperation and have been accepted, all required cleaning and lubrication has been BMS.

B. Operational Test: At the beginning of the Acceptance Phase, the system shall operateproperly for two (2) weeks without malfunction, without alarm caused by control action ordevice failure, and with smooth and stable control of systems and equipment in conformancewith these Specifications. At the end of the two weeks, Contractor shall forward the trendlogs to the Owner for review. Owner shall determine if the system is ready for functionalperformance testing and document any problems requiring Contractor’s attention.

1. If the systems are not ready for functional performance testing, Contractor shall correctproblems and provide notification to the Owner that all problems have been corrected.The Acceptance Period shall be restarted at a mutually scheduled time for an additionalone-week period.

2. This process shall be repeated until Owner issues notice that the BAS is ready forfunctional performance testing.

C. During the Acceptance Period, the Contractor shall maintain a hard copy log of all alarmsgenerated by the BAS. For each alarm received, Contractor shall diagnose the cause of thealarm, and shall list on the log for each alarm, the diagnosed cause of the alarm, and thecorrective action taken. If in the Contractor’s opinion, the cause of the alarm is not theresponsibility of the Contractor, Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner.

3.08 TREND LOGS

A. Contractor shall configure and analyze all trends required under Section 25 15 00.

3.09 TREND GRAPHS

A. Trend graphs as specified in Section 25 15 00 shall generally be used during the AcceptancePhase to facilitate and document testing. Prepare controller and workstation software todisplay graphical format trends during the Acceptance Period. Trend graphs shalldemonstrate compliance with Contract Documents.

B. Each graph shall be clearly labeled with HVAC subsystem title, date, and times.



3.10 SOFTWARE OPTIMIZATION ASSISTANCE

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a BAS Technician as specified above at theProject Site to be at the disposal of the Owner. The purpose of this requirement is to makechanges, enhancements and additions to control unit and/or workstation software that havebeen identified by the Owner during the construction and commissioning of the Project andthat are beyond the specified Contract Document requirements. The cost for this serviceshall be included with the bid. Requests for assistance shall be for contiguous or non-contiguous 8-hour days, unless otherwise mutually agreed upon by Contractor and Owner.The Owner shall notify Contractor two (2) days in advance of each day of requestedassistance. Refer to Part One of this Section for additional requirements.

B. The BAS Technician provided shall be thoroughly trained in the programming and operationof the controller and workstation software. If the BAS Technician provided cannot performevery software task requested by the Owner in a timely fashion, Contractor shall provideadditional qualified personnel at the Project Site as requested by the Owner, to meet the totalspecified requirement on-Site. Coordinate training requirements with UNIVERSITY OFHOUSTON Monitoring Services Department.

3.11 BAS OPERATOR TRAINING AND O&M MANUALS

A. Provide up to four (4) complete sets of the approved Operations and Maintenance (O&M)Manuals (hard copy and one electronic copy) to be used for training.

B. Contractor shall submit a Training Plan for the scope of training for which BAS Provider isresponsible. Training Plan shall be forwarded to the Contractor who will compile, organize,format, and forward to the Engineer for review.

1. Coordinate requirements of Training with the UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON MonitoringServices Department.

C. On-Site Training: Provide services of BAS Provider’s qualified technical personnel for (5) 8-hour days to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of BAS. Instructionshall be in classroom setting at the Project Site for appropriate portions of the training.Training may be in non-contiguous days throughout the warranty period at the request of theOwner. The Owner shall notify Contractor seven (7) calendar days in advance of each day ofrequested training. The Contractor’s designated certified trainer proficient in system beinginstalled shall meet with the Engineer and Owner for the purpose of discussing and fine-tuning the training agenda prior to the first training session. Training shall be recorded inreplayable electronic format. Training agenda shall generally be as follows:

1. Basic Operator Workstation (OWS) Training – For all potential users of the OWS:

a. Brief walk-through of building, including identification of all controlled equipment andcondensed demonstration of controller portable and built-in operator interface devicedisplay capabilities.

b. Brief overview of the various parts of the O&M Manuals, including hardware andsoftware programming and operating publications, catalog data, controls installationDrawings, and DDC programming documentation.

c. Demonstration of workstation login/logout procedures, password setup, andexception reporting.



d. Demonstration of workstation menu penetration and broad overview of the variousworkstation features.

e. Overview of systems installed.

f. Present all Site-specific point naming conventions and points lists, open protocolinformation, configuration databases, back-up sequences, upload/downloadprocedures, and other information as necessary to maintain the integrity of the BAS.

g. Overview of alarm features.

h. Overview of trend features.

i. Overview of workstation reports.

2. BAS Hardware Training – For Maintenance and Control Technicians:

a. Review of installed components and how to install/replace, maintain, commission,and diagnose them.

3. BAS Technician Training:

a. Introduction to controller programming and overview of the programming applicationinterface.

b. General review of sequence of operation and control logic for the Project Site,including standalone and fail-safe modes of operation.

c. Uploading/Downloading and backing up programs.

d. Network administration.

e. Review of setpoint optimization and fine-tuning concepts.

Coordinate requirements of Training with the UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Monitoring Services Department to determine if Off-Site Training is required for the Project. Edit accordingly. D. Off-Site Advanced Training:

1. Advanced Training shall be provided at any time during the Warranty Period forindividuals in Owner’s employ and shall be provided at the manufacturer’s off-Sitetraining facility containing installations of the specified system. Contractor shall paytraining registration, materials, and miscellaneous fees. The Owner shall pay for allexpenses for travel (transportation, meals, lodging, etc.

a. Advanced training shall include the standard, advanced training offering on allControl Programming Applications for the system installed.

b. Advanced training shall include the standard, advanced training offering onAdvanced Installation, Configuration, Maintenance, and Network Administration.

3.12 WARRANTY PHASE BAS OPPOSITE SEASON TRENDING AND TESTING

A. Trending: Throughout the Warranty Phase, trend logs shall be maintained. Contractor shallforward archive trend logs to the Owner for review upon Owner request. Owner will reviewthese and notify Contractor of any warranty work required.



B. Opposite Season Testing: Within twelve (12) months of Substantial Completion, Contractorshall schedule and conduct with Owner, Opposite Season functional performance testing.BAS Provider shall participate in this testing and remedy any deficiencies identified.



AE Project Number: BAS Commissioning - Retrofit 25 08 10 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 08 10 – BAS COMMISSIONING - RETROFIT

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Specification Section 23 05 93

C. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications, ElectronicSafety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, andthis Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may be reciprocallyapplicable to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. BAS and equipment testing and Start-up.

2. Validation of proper and thorough installation of BAS and equipment.

3. Functional testing of control systems.

4. Documentation of tests, procedures, and installations.

5. Coordination of BAS training.

6. Documentation of BAS Operation and Maintenance materials.

B. This Section defines responsibilities of the Contractor to commission the BAS in situationswhere controls are being replaced on existing equipment but not where core equipment isbeing replaced.

C. The term “Owner” shall include a representative from UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON BuildingAutomation Services but is not limited to represent the Owner exclusively. MEP Designconsultant may also be authorized to act as Owner’s Designated Representative ODR).Coordinate all activities to include all of the Owner’s representatives.

D. Commissioning is the process of ensuring that all building systems are installed and performinteractively according to the design intent, the systems are efficient and cost effective andmeet the Owner’s operational needs, the installation is adequately documented, and that theOperators are adequately trained. It serves as a tool to minimize post-occupancy operationalproblems. It establishes testing and communication protocols in an effort to advance thebuilding systems from installation to full dynamic operation and optimization.

E. The Contractor shall direct, coordinate, and oversee the Commissioning process and witnessfunctional performance tests.



F. The Owner’s TAB Firm may write the Owner approved control sequence verification sheets for functional performance tests and develop forms using the BAS Provider’s point log to test each point back to the graphical interface. The BAS Provider shall furnish the Contractor with an estimated time to complete this task, which Contractor will incorporate in the Project Schedule. In the event Owner’s TAB Firm is not under contract for the Project, the Contractor shall write the Owner approved sequence verification sheets for functional performance tests.




C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within all references.

1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Completely install and thoroughly inspect, startup, preliminarily test, adjust, balance, and document all systems and equipment.

B. Assist Owner and/or TAB firm in verification and functional performance testing. This will generally include the following:

1. Attend Commissioning progress and coordination meetings.

2. Prepare and submit required draft forms and systems information.

3. Establish trend logs of system operation as specified herein.

4. Demonstrate system operation.

5. Manipulate systems and equipment to facilitate testing.

6. Provide instrumentation necessary for verification and performance testing.

7. Manipulate control systems to facilitate verification and performance testing.

8. Train Owner as specified in this Section.

C. Compensation for Retesting: Contractor shall compensate Owner for Site time necessitated by incompleteness of systems or equipment at time of functional performance testing. All testing failures, which require on-Site time for retesting, will be considered actual damages to the Owner. Owner shall charge Contractor $100 for each repeat site visit due to testing failure. Reimbursement to all parties under Contract with the Owner who are affected by the retesting shall be included in the Contract modification.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The following list outlines the general sequence of events for submittals and commissioning:

1. Submit product data and Shop Drawings, and receive approval.

2. Submit BAS logic documentation, and receive approval.



3. Submit background graphic screens, and receive approval.

4. Submit Start-Up Checklists and manufacturer’s start-up procedures for all equipment provided by the Contractor.

5. Install BAS.

6. Submit BAS Start-Up Test Agenda and Schedule for review.

7. Receive BAS Startup Test Agend and Schedule approval.

8. Submit Training Plan.

9. Simulate sequencing and debug program off-line to the extent practical.

10. Place systems under BAS control where applicable during a scheduled outage.

11. Perform BAS Startup during a scheduled outage.

12. Prepare and initiate trend log data storage and format trend graphs.

13. Submit completed BAS Start-Up Reports and initial draft of the Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals.

14. Receive BAS Startup Report approval and approval to schedule Demonstrations and Commissioning.

15. Demonstrate systems to Owner.

16. Submit Trend Logs in format specified.

17. Receive demonstration approval and approval to schedule an Acceptance Period per paragraph 3.07.

18. Train Owner on BAS operation and maintenance.

19. Substantial Completion.

20. Begin Acceptance Phase.

21. Two-week Operational Test.

22. Perform Functional Performance Testing including point to point verification to graphical interface.

23. Receive Acceptance Period approval, which is Functional Completion for the BAS.

24. Train Owner on final sequences and modes of operation.

25. Install framed control Drawings.

26. Provide Level 1 (view only) password access to the Owner.

27. Revise and re-submit Record Drawings and O&M Manuals.

28. Manager of Building Management Services sign-off required.

29. Provide Admin level access to Owner.



30. Final Acceptance.

31. Begin Warranty Phase.

32. Schedule and begin Opposite Season acceptance period as scheduled.

33. Receive Opposite Season acceptance period approval.

34. Submit Record Drawings and O&M Manuals.

35. Update framed control Drawings.

36. Complete Owner (AHJ) Training.

37. End-of-Warranty date/period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


2.02 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrumentation required to verify readings and to test the system and equipmentperformance shall be provided by Contractor and made available to Owner. Generally, notesting equipment will be required beyond that required to perform Contractor’s Work underthese Contract Documents. All equipment used for testing and calibration shall be NIST/NBStraceable and calibrated within the preceding 6-month period. Certificates of calibration shallbe submitted.

2.03 TAB AND COMMISSIONING PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL

A. Contractor shall provide portable operators terminal or hand held device to facilitate Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) and calibration. This software or device shall support allfunctions and allow querying and editing of all parameters required for proper calibration andStart-up.

B. Connections shall be provided local to the device being calibrated. For instance, for terminalunits, connection of the operator’s terminal shall be either at the sensor or at the terminalunit. Otherwise a wireless system shall be provided to facilitate this local functionality.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION





3.02 BAS START-UP TESTING, ADJUSTING, CALIBRATION

A. Work and/or systems installed under this Division shall be fully functioning prior toDemonstration and Acceptance Phase. Contractor shall start, test, adjust, and calibrate allwork and/or systems under this Contract, as described below:

1. Inspect the installation of all devices. Review the manufacturer’s installation instructionsand validate that the device is installed in accordance with them.

2. Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages, and verify that all circuits are free fromfaults.

3. Verify integrity/safety of all electrical connections.

4. Before any testing, adjusting, or balancing work commences, vendor must submit agraphics screens package to BMS for approval.

5. Coordinate with Owner’s TAB Firm to obtain control settings that are determined frombalancing procedures. Record the following control settings as obtained from Owner’sTAB Firm, and note any TAB deficiencies in the BAS Start-Up Report:

a. Optimum duct static pressure setpoints for VAV air handling units.

b. Minimum outside air damper settings for air handling units.

c. Optimum differential pressure setpoints for variable speed pumping systems.

d. Calibration parameters for flow control devices such as VAV terminal units and flowmeasuring stations.

1) Contractor shall provide hand-held device as a minimum to the TAB Firm tofacilitate calibration. Connection for any given device shall be local to it (i.e. atthe VAV terminal unit or at the thermostat). Hand-held device or portableoperator’s terminal shall allow querying and editing of parameters required forproper calibration and start-up.

6. Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing and actuating devices. Calibrateeach instrumentation device by making a comparison between the BAS display and thereading at the device, using an instrument traceable to the National Bureau of Standards,which shall be at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated (e.g., if fielddevice is +/-0.5 percent accurate, test equipment shall be +/-0.25 percent accurate oversame range). Record the measured value and displayed value for each device in theBAS Start-up Report.

7. Check and set zero and span adjustments for all transducers and transmitters.

8. For dampers and valves:

a. Check for adequate installation including free travel throughout range and adequateseal.

b. Where loops are sequenced, check for proper control without overlap.

9. For actuators:



a. Check to insure that device seals tightly when the appropriate signal is applied to theoperator.

b. Check for appropriate fail position, and that the stroke and range is as required.

c. For existing pneumatic operators, adjust the operator spring compression as requiredto achieve close-off. If positioner or volume booster is installed on the operator,calibrate per manufacturer’s procedure to achieve spring range indicated. Checksplit-range positioners to verify proper operation. Record settings for each device inthe BAS Pre-Commissioning Report.

d. For sequenced electronic actuators, calibrate per manufacturer’s instructions torequired ranges.

10. Check each digital control point by making a comparison between the control commandat the CU and the status of the controlled device. Check each digital input point bymaking a comparison of the state of the sensing device and the Operator Interfacedisplay. Record the results for each device in the BAS Start-Up Report.

11. For outputs to reset other manufacturer’s devices (for example, VSDs) and for feedbackfrom them, calibrate ranges to establish proper parameters. Coordinate withrepresentative of the respective manufacturer and obtain their approval of the installation.

12. Verify proper sequences by using the approved checklists to record results and submitwith BAS Start-Up Report. Verify proper sequence and operation of all specifiedfunctions.

13. Verify that all safety devices trip at appropriate conditions. Adjust setpoints accordingly.

Engineer shall provide the tolerances for the type and criticality of the area or zone being served by the equipment. Engineer may have to specify two or more sets of tolerances for a specific Project. Edit accordingly.

14. Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset orovershoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control loop inthe BAS Start-up Report. Except from a startup, maximum allowable variance from setpoint for controlled variables under normal load fluctuations shall be as follows. Within 3minutes of any upset (for which the system has the capability to respond) in the controlloop, tolerances shall be maintained (exceptions noted):

a. Duct air temperature: [±1 degrees F].

b. Space Temperature: [±1 degrees F within 30 minutes].

c. Chilled Water: [±1 degrees F].

d. Hot water temperature: [±3 degrees F].

e. Duct pressure: [± 0.25 inches wg].

f. Water pressure: [±1 psid].

g. Duct or space Humidity: [±5 percent within 30 minutes].

h. Air flow control: [±5] percent of setpoint velocity.



i. Space Pressurization (on active control systems): [±0.05 inches wg] with no door orwindow movements.

15. For interface and DDC control panels:

a. Ensure devices are properly installed with adequate clearance for maintenance andwith clear labels in accordance with the Record Drawings.

b. Ensure that terminations are safe, secure and labeled in accordance with the RecordDrawings.

c. Check power supplies for proper voltage ranges and loading.

d. Ensure that wiring and tubing are run in a neat and workman-like manner, eitherbound or enclosed in trough.

e. Check for adequate signal strength on communication networks.

f. Check for standalone performance of controllers by disconnecting the controller fromthe LAN. Verify the event is annunciated at Operator Interfaces. Verify that thecontrolling LAN reconfigures as specified in the event of a LAN disconnection.

g. Ensure that all outputs and devices fail to their proper positions/states.

h. Ensure that buffered and/or volatile information is held through power outage.

i. With all system and communications operating normally, sample and recordupdate/annunciation times for critical alarms fed from the panel to the OperatorInterface.

j. Check for proper grounding of all DDC panels and devices.

k. Low voltage and High voltage wiring must not be housed in the same conduit. BASwiring and fire alarm wiring must not be housed in the same conduit.

16. For Operator Interfaces:

a. Verify that all elements on the graphics are functional and are properly bound tophysical devices and/or virtual points, and that hot links or page jumps are functionaland logical.

b. Output all specified BAS reports for review and approval.

c. Verify that the alarm printing and logging is functional and per requirements.

d. Verify that trends are archiving to disk and provide a sample to the Owner for review.Analog trends are not acceptable.

e. Verify that paging/dial-out alarm annunciation is functional and issues emailnotification. IP address will be provided by UH BMS.

f. Start-up and check out control air compressors, air drying, and filtering systems inaccordance with the appropriate section and with manufacturer’s instructions.

g. Verify proper interface with fire alarm system.



B. Submit Start-Up Test Report: Report shall be completed, submitted, and approved prior toSubstantial Completion.

3.03 SENSOR CHECKOUT AND CALIBRATION

A. General Checkout: Verify that all sensor locations are appropriate and are away from causesof erratic operation. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end.For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, make surethey are reading within 0.2 degrees F of each other for temperature and within a toleranceequal to 2 percent of the reading of each other for pressure. Tolerances for criticalapplications may be tighter.

B. Calibration: Calibrate all sensors using one of the following procedures:

1. Sensors without Transmitters - Standard Application: Make a reading with a calibratedtest instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor at various points across the range.Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gauge or BAS) is within thetolerances specified for the sensor. If not, adjust offset and range, or replace sensor.Where sensors are subject to wide variations in the sensed variable, calibrate sensorwithin the highest and lowest 20 percentage of the expected range.

2. Sensors with Transmitters - Standard Application: Disconnect sensor. Connect a signalgenerator in place of sensor. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and BAScontrol panel. Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimumdesired temperature. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until the ammeter reads 4mA. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span ormaximum and verify at the OI. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessaryto conform to tolerances. Reconnect sensor. Make a reading with a calibrated testinstrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via thepermanent thermostat, gauge or BAS) is within the tolerances specified. If not, replacesensor and repeat. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitablesignal generator. NOTE: when a sensor is disconnected, it shall not display old data (no“frozen in time” data).

C. Sensor Tolerance: Sensors shall be within the tolerances specified for the device. Refer toSection 25 11 10.

3.04 COIL VALVE LEAK CHECK

A. Verify proper close-off of the valves. Ensure the valve seats properly seat by simulating themaximum anticipated pressure difference across the circuit. Demonstrate to the Owner theverification of zero flow by measuring the coil differential pressure. If there is pressuredifferential, close the isolation valves to the coil to ensure the conditions change. If they do,this validates the valve is not closing. Remedy the condition by adjusting the stroke andrange, increasing the actuator size/torque, replacing the seat, or replacing the valve asapplicable.

3.05 VALVE STROKE SETUP AND CHECK

A. For all valve and actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the OperatorInterface readout.



B. Set pumps to normal operating mode. Command valve closed, verify that valve is closed,and adjust output zero signal as required. Command valve open, verify position is full openand adjust output signal as required. Command the valve to a few various intermediatepositions. If actual valve position doesn’t reasonably correspond, replace actuator or addpilot positioner (for pneumatics).

3.06 BAS DEMONSTRATION

A. All BAS Demonstrations shall take place on the main Control Systems Server andUNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON WAN. At least two (2) weeks in advance to the demonstration,schedule with Owner to add system to main Control Systems Server and UNIVERSITY OFHOUSTON WAN . At the time of request, provide all documentation that the followingcriterions are met:

1. Updated BAS submittals in electronic and hard copy to Owner including the updated riserdiagram for the system.

2. Reports on verification of Network Layout Verification including but not limited to BuildingController locations, cable routes with length of cable between controllers and any trunkextenders or trunk isolators.

3. Reports on verification of electrical characteristics of BAS network, communications andelectrical integrity of Building Controllers.

4. Reports on verification of traffic on BAS Network including but not limited to COVsbetween Building Controllers, point commands by the operator, point commands byprogram across the network, alarm reporting on the network, any unresolved points inthe system, integrity of the ports on any Building Controller isolator/extender and resultsof Building Controller tests running at selected baud rate.

5. Demonstrate to Owner the updates of databases without errors or faults between thetemporary Control Systems Server and Building Controllers. If there is no temporaryserver, demonstrate to Owner after system is added to main Control Systems Server.

6. Reports on verification of system log files, interruption of log files of system traffic andoverall acceptable operation of the system where a temporary Control Systems Server isutilized.

B. Demonstrate the operation of the BAS hardware, software, and all related components andsystems to the satisfaction of the Owner. Schedule the demonstration with the Owner seven(7) calendar days in advance. Demonstration shall not be scheduled until all hardware andsoftware submittals, and the Start-Up Test Report are approved. If the Work fails to conformto the Contract Documents, resulting inscheduling of additional Site visits by the Owner forre-demonstration, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for costs of subsequent Site visits (notless than $100 per visit).

C. The Contractor shall supply all personnel and equipment for the demonstration, including, butnot limited to, instruments, ladders, etc. Contractor-supplied personnel must be competentwith and knowledgeable of all project-specific hardware, software, and the HVAC systems.Either qualified or certified technician acting as the company’s SME are required to facilitatethe operations of the system’s performance. All training documentation and submittals shallbe maintained at the Project Site.Demonstration shall typically involve small representativesamples of systems/equipment randomly selected by the Owner.



D. The system shall be demonstrated following the same procedures used in the Start-Up Test by using the approved Commissioning Checklists. Demonstration shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:

1. Demonstrate that required software is installed on BAS workstations. Demonstrate that graphic screens, alarms, trends, and reports are installed as submitted and approved.

2. Demonstrate that points specified and shown can be interrogated and/or commanded (as applicable) from all workstations, as specified.

3. Demonstrate that remote dial-up communication abilities are in accordance with these Specifications.

4. Demonstrate correct calibration of input/output devices using the same methods specified for the Start-Up Tests. A maximum of 10 percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by the Owner for demonstration. Upon failure of any device to meet the specified end-to-end accuracy, an additional 10 percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by Owner for demonstration. This process shall be repeated until 100 percent of randomly selected I/O points have been demonstrated to meet specified end-to-end accuracy.

5. Demonstrate that all DDC and other software programs exist at respective field panels. The Direct Digital Control (DDC) programming and point database shall be as submitted and approved.

6. Demonstrate that all DDC programs accomplish the specified sequence of operation.

7. Demonstrate that the panels and DDC network of panels automatically recover from power failures within five (5) minutes after power is restored.

8. Demonstrate that the stand-alone operation of panels meets the requirements of these Specifications. Demonstrate that the panels' response to LAN communication failures meets the requirements of these Specifications.

9. Identify access to equipment selected by the Owner. Demonstrate that access is sufficient to perform required maintenance.

10. Demonstrate that required trend graphs and trend logs are set up per the requirements. Provide a sample of the data archive. Indicate the file names and locations.

E. BAS Demonstration shall be completed and approved prior to Substantial Completion.

F. Any tests successfully completed during the demonstration will be recorded as passed for the functional performance testing and will not have to be retested.

3.07 BAS ACCEPTANCE PERIOD

A. After approval of the BAS Demonstration and prior to Contract Close Out Acceptance Phase shall commence. Acceptance Period shall not be scheduled until all HVAC systems are in operation and have been accepted, all required cleaning and lubrication has been



B. Operational Test: At the beginning of the Acceptance Phase, the system shall operateproperly for two (2) weeks without malfunction, without alarm caused by control action ordevice failure, and with smooth and stable control of systems and equipment in conformancewith these Specifications. At the end of the two weeks, Contractor shall forward the trendlogs to the Owner for review. Owner shall determine if the system is ready for functionalperformance testing and document any problems requiring Contractor’s attention.

1. If the systems are not ready for functional performance testing, Contractor shall correctproblems and provide notification to the Owner that all problems have been corrected.The Acceptance Period shall be restarted at a mutually scheduled time for an additionalone-week period.

2. This process shall be repeated until Owner issues notice that the BAS is ready forfunctional performance testing.

C. During the Acceptance Period, the Contractor shall maintain a hard copy log of all alarmsgenerated by the BAS. For each alarm received, Contractor shall diagnose the cause of thealarm, and shall list on the log for each alarm, the diagnosed cause of the alarm, and thecorrective action taken. If in the Contractor’s opinion, the cause of the alarm is not theresponsibility of the Contractor, Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner.

3.08 BAS OPERATOR TRAINING AND O&M MANUALS

A. Provide up to four (4) complete sets of the approved Operations and Maintenance (O&M)Manuals (hard copy and one electronic copy) to be used for training.

B. Contractor shall submit a Training Plan for the scope of training for which BAS Provider isresponsible. Training Plan shall be forwarded to the Contractor who will compile, organize,format, and forward to the Engineer for review.

1. Coordinate requirements of Training with the UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON MonitoringServices Department.

C. On-Site Training: On-Site Training: Provide services of BAS Provider’s qualified technicalpersonnel for (5) 8-hour days to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance ofBAS. Instruction shall be in classroom setting at the Project Site for appropriate portions ofthe training. Training may be in non-contiguous days throughout the warranty period at therequest of the Owner. The Owner shall notify Contractor seven (7) calendar days in advanceof each day of requested training. The Contractor’s designated certified trainer proficient insystem being installed shall meet with the Engineer and Owner for the purpose of discussingand fine-tuning the training agenda prior to the first training session. Training shall berecorded in replayable electronic format. Training agenda shall generally be as follows::

1. Basic Operator Workstation (OWS) Training – For all potential users of the OWS:

a. Brief walk-through of building, including identification of all controlled equipment andcondensed demonstration of controller portable and built-in operator interface devicedisplay capabilities.

b. Brief overview of the various parts of the O&M Manuals, including hardware andsoftware programming and operating publications, catalog data, controls installationDrawings, and DDC programming documentation.

c. Demonstration of workstation login/logout procedures, password setup, andexception reporting.



d. Demonstration of workstation menu penetration and broad overview of the variousworkstation features.

e. Overview of systems installed.

f. Present all Site-specific point naming conventions and points lists, open protocolinformation, configuration databases, back-up sequences, upload/downloadprocedures, and other information as necessary to maintain the integrity of the BAS.

g. Overview of alarm features.

h. Overview of trend features.

i. Overview of workstation reports.

2. BAS Hardware Training – For Maintenance and Control Technicians:

a. Review of installed components and how to install/replace, maintain, commission,and diagnose them.

3. BAS Technician Training:

a. Introduction to controller programming and overview of the programming applicationinterface.

b. General review of sequence of operation and control logic for the Project Site,including standalone and fail-safe modes of operation.

c. Uploading/downloading and backing up programs.

d. Network administration.

e. Review of setpoint optimization and fine-tuning concepts.

Coordinate requirements of Training with the UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Monitoring Services Department to determine if Off-Site Training is required for the Project. Edit accordingly.

D. Off-Site Advanced Training:

1. Advanced Training shall be provided at any time during the Warranty Period forindividuals in Owner’s employ and shall be provided at the manufacturer’s off-Sitetraining facility containing installations of the specified system. Contractor shall paytraining registration, materials, and miscellaneous fees. The Owner shall pay for allexpenses for travel (transportation, meals, lodging, etc.

a. Advanced training shall include the standard, advanced training offering on allControl Programming Applications for the system installed.

b. Advanced training shall include the standard, advanced training offering onAdvanced Installation, Configuration, Maintenance, and Network Administration.

c.



3.09 WARRANTY PHASE BAS OPPOSITE SEASON TRENDING AND TESTING

A. Trending: Throughout the Warranty Phase, trend logs shall be maintained. Contractor shallforward archive trend logs to the Owner for review upon Owner request. Owner will reviewthese and notify Contractor of any warranty work required.

B. Opposite Season Testing: Within twelve (12) months of Substantial Completion, Contractorshall schedule and conduct with Owner, Opposite Season functional performance testing.BAS Provider shall participate in this testing and remedy any deficiencies identified.



AE Project Number: Laboratory Airflow Controls 25 0910 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 0910 - LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. The Conditions of the Contract and applicable requirements of Division 1, "GeneralRequirements", and this Section govern the work of this Division.

B. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications, ElectronicSafety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section,and this Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may be reciprocallyapplicable to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. System Description: Provide a Laboratory Airflow Control System (LACS) to control theairflow into and out of laboratory rooms. The exhaust flow rate of a laboratory fume hoodshall be precisely controlled to maintain a constant average face velocity into the fumehood. The laboratory control system shall vary the amount of makeup/supply air into theroom to operate the rooms at the lowest possible airflow rates necessary to maintaintemperature control, achieve minimum ventilation rates, and maintain laboratorypressurization in relation to adjacent spaces (positive or negative). The laboratory airflowcontrol system shall be capable of operating as a stand-alone system and as a systemintegrated with the existing Campus Building Automation System (BAS).

B. Control Protocol: Each room in the suite shall be operated as a constant volumeoccupied/unoccupied mode system with room pressurization via supply/exhaust offset asshown on the drawings. Unoccupied mode shall reduce the room supply air volume by50% while maintaining pressure control offsets. The unoccupied mode shall beimplemented based on time program inputs through the BAS system. The system designshall allow for future conversion to VAV operation with a supply air minimum in the futurewithout any hardware changes.

C. Airflow Device Actuation: Airflow device actuation shall be DDC modulated electricactuation. Electrical power shall be supplied from the building 120 volt power supply.

D. Airflow Device: Airflow device is to be a VENTURI AIR Valve, blade dampers type controlare NOT ACCEPTABLE. Venturi valves shall be installed per ASHRA 90.1 to allowmaintenance and serviceability.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer: Laboratory airflow control shall be manufactured and installed by a certifiedLaboratory air flow vendor lab system controls and their local representative. All Valvesshall be VENTURI without the use of flow measurement for accuracy, speed of response,and reliability of accurate air flow. Blade Damper style control IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. AnyValves using airflow sensors, of ANY kind, are REQUIRED to have straight duct runs asrequired per ASHRAE Fundamentals, “Measuring Flow in Ducts”, 7.5 Duct diametersdownstream and 3 Duct diameters upstream, to help ensure no turbulence in air flowreadings.

B. REQUIRED Certifications for Quality Assurance Purposes:1. Provide manufacturers and independent test lab certification of test results, signed by

an authorized officer of the company. The laboratory airflow system provider shall bean entity that designs, develops, manufacturers, and sells products and services to



control the environment and airflow of critical spaces using a Quality Management System registered to ISO 9001.

2. Provide manufacturer’s OSHPD (Office of State Wide Health and Planning and Development) compliance and testing for all valves adherence to seismic requirements to guarantee the integrity and durability of the product under severe conditions.

3. Provide calibration instruments AND the air valves being tested accreditation documentation for N.V.L.A.P. (National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program) administered by N.I.S.T. using ISO/IEC 17025. This accreditation is a third-party evaluation, and with unscheduled inspections to insure the N.V.L.A.P. Accredited status. “NIST Traceable” alone is NOT ACCEPTABLE as it only references the calibration instruments being used but has No N.I.S.T. claims for the air flow devices themselves.

C. Preparation: Laboratory airflow control products to be clean and free of all foreign matter prior to shipping. Units and associated equipment such as controls, shall be packaged in a manner to prevent dust and other foreign matter from entering the unit, controls, and similar items during shipment. All external controls, operators, and sensors shall be covered by rigid metal shields during shipment and storage.

D. Performance Verification: The laboratory airflow control system supplier shall demonstrate a typical laboratory space within 150 miles that includes multiple fume hoods, a general exhaust, and a supply airflow control device for the purpose of verifying the laboratory airflow control system’s ability to meet the performance requirements indicated in this specification. If a visit is required, all travel and lodging costs to witness the performance verification shall be the responsibility of the laboratory airflow control system supplier.

E. Preventive Maintenance: The laboratory airflow control system supplier shall provide at no additional cost to the owner during and after the warranty period, five years of preventive maintenance on all airflow sensors (e.g., pitot tube, flow cross, orifice ring, air bar, hot wire, vortex shedder, side wall sensors, etc.), and flow transducers provided under this section. Airflow sensors shall be removed, inspected, and cleaned QUARTERLY during the five year period to prevent inaccuracies due to long term buildup from corrosion, lab tissues, wet or sticky particles, or other materials that foul the sensor. If impractical to remove the airflow sensors, the laboratory airflow control system supplier shall include in the proposal the cost of supplying and installing duct access doors, one for each sensor. The transducer shall be checked and recalibrated annually to insure long-term accuracy. Note that auto-zero recalibration of transducers is NOT ACCEPTABLE as a substitute for annual recalibration.

F. Warranty Period: Warranty shall commence upon the date of shipment and extend for a period of 24 months whereupon any defects in materials or laboratory airflow control system performance shall be repaired by the supplier at no cost to the owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. All submittals under this section must be approved in writing by the UH ODR or UH AHJ as part of the formal submittal approval process. Shop drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. The laboratory airflow control system supplier shall provide a detailed proposal describing all elements of the laboratory control system. A schematic layout shall be provided, showing relations of these elements and a description of how they interact.

2. Technical specification data sheets shall be provided for all proposed system components and devices.

3. Cut sheets on each all laboratory airflow controls, clearly marked to show sizes, configuration, construction, unique features, controls, clearances, accessories, performance data, sound data, operating sequence and other pertinent information.



4. Air valve curves or charts which clearly show air valve performance, including air flowsensor calibration curves.

5. Performance characteristics for each terminal unit.a. All proposed airflow control devices shall include discharge, exhaust, and

radiated sound power level performance obtained from testing in accordance withARI Standard 880.

b. Wiring and control diagrams.c. Copies of factory-certified sound, leakage and performance test results from

actual tests of units of the same model and construction to those which will beprovided for the project.

d. Written report of the test results including noise criteria (NC) in sound power astested in reverberant room with terminal unit operating at the scheduled airflow.When reporting NC levels, no credits or reduction shall in any way be consideredfor room, plenum, ceiling, and similar item effects.

e. Certified dimensioned drawings showing the locations of all openings, supportpoints, connections, sizes for same, overall dimensions of all boxes and anyother pertinent information that may affect the installation of the boxes.

6. Submit the following certified performance data for each size and type of terminal unitto be used on the project:a. Maximum and minimum cfm ratings at 0.35" discharge static pressure.b. Pressure drop through each primary air damper at 25%, 50% and 100% of

design cfm.c. Pressure drop through terminal unit and heating coil at full plenum air mode for

fan powered terminal units and full heating and full cooling modes as applicablefor single and double duct terminal units.

d. Radiated and discharge sound power data for each size terminal unit at 0.5",1.0", and 1.5" primary duct static pressure, 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%primary cold air and design discharge cfm (constant fan powered terminal unitsonly) and static pressure.

e. Temperature mixing data for each size dual duct terminal unit at maximum andminimum discharge cfm for the unit size with 25%, 50% and 75% primary air.

7. Product warranties and guarantees.

8. OSHPD Accreditation Certificates

9. N.V.L.A.P. air flow station Accreditation Certificates.

10. Additional information as required in Section 25 00 00.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver laboratory airflow control systems in bulk containers or factory-fabricated water-resistant packaging.

B. Handle laboratory airflow control systems carefully to avoid damage to components,enclosures, and finish.

C. Store laboratory airflow control systems in a clean, dry space and protect from weather untildelivery to the site or to the designated contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER:

A. A certified Laboratory Airflow Control System (LACS) V- is the basis of design. Any othermanufacturer can bid but is REQUIRED to meet the requirements of this specification to



adhere to the strict performance, certifications, and quality assurances listed within this document. Approval to bid does NOT relieve the LACS from complying with the minimum requirements or intent of this specification. Only those systems specifically named in this specification shall be considered for approval. The LACS shall provide a compliance schedule, which shall include the section, paragraph and subparagraph of these specifications, and a direct statement to indicate compliance or noncompliance. For all areas of noncompliance, the LACS Vendor shall describe what specific alternative approaches has been taken and document the impact this will have on the sizing, sequence, maintenance, or energy costs of the building.

B. No Other Substitutions

C. The final acceptance of a LACS for any project within the University system will rest solely with the OWNER’s decision and is REQUIRED to have OWNER’S review and acceptance, which will be based upon BEST overall value, taking into account total life cycle costs, energy usage, low maintenance, accuracy, and overall safety for the end users and their staff. As stated, an approval to BID does not relieve the LACS Vendor from complying with the specification requirements.

2.2 AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Each individual area shall have a dedicated LACS. Each dedicated LACS shall support a minimum of twenty (20) network controlled airflow devices. Each area shall have direct integration from a RMI (room integrator) or RMC (room controller) using NIAGARA based operating system, with a COMPLETE web-based tool set including FULL configuration capabilities, verification, and test and balance. Using a 3rd party set of tools not fully integrated into the laboratory room controller RMI/RMC is NOT ACCEPTABLE.

B. The LACS shall employ individual average face velocity controllers that directly measure the area of the fume hood sash opening and proportionally control the hood’s exhaust airflow to maintain a constant face velocity over a minimum range of 20% to 100% of sash travel. The corresponding minimum hood exhaust flow turndown ratio shall be 5 to 1.

C. The hood exhaust airflow control device shall respond to the fume hood sash opening by achieving 90% of its commanded value within one second of the sash reaching 90% of its final position (with no more than 5% overshoot/ undershoot) of required airflow. Rate of sash movement shall be between 1.0 to 1.5 feet per second.

D. The LACS shall maintain specific airflow (±5% of signal within one second of a change in duct static pressure) regardless of the magnitude of the pressure change airflow change or quantity of airflow control devices on the manifold (within 0.6" to 3.0" wk.)

E. The LACS shall use volumetric offset control to maintain room pressurization. The system shall maintain proper room pressurization polarity (negative or positive) regardless of any change in room/system conditions such as the raising and lowering of any or all fume hood sashes or rapid changes in duct static pressure. Systems using differential pressure measurement or velocity measurement to control room pressurization are unacceptable.

F. The LACS shall maintain specific airflow (±5% of signal) with a minimum 16 to 1 turndown to insure accurate pressurization at low airflow and guarantee the maximum system diversity and energy efficiency.

2.3 AIRFLOW CONTROL SOUND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Unless otherwise specified, the airflow control device shall not exceed the sound power levels in Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3.

B. If the airflow control device cannot meet the sound power level specification, a properly sized silencer or sound attenuator must be used. All silencers must be of a packless design



(constructed of at least 18 gauge 316L stainless steel when used with fume hood exhaust) with a maximum pressure drop at the device’s maximum rated flow rate not to exceed 0.20 inches of water.

C. All proposed airflow control devices shall include discharge, exhaust and radiated soundpower level performance.

D. All submittals for proposed airflow control devices shall have documented testing for soundpower levels that include discharge, exhaust and radiated sound power level performance,and provided as part of the submittal. This must be INCLUDED in the all submittals andpre-approved before any system is accepted.

Project Name LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROLS Project No. ##### 23 0910-6 Engineer Project No. #### REV Issue - Month Day, Year


Table 1. Exhaust Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level

EXHAUST SOUND POWER LEVEL IN DB (RE: 10-12 WATTS)

Octave Band Number 2 3 4 5 6 7

Center Frequency in Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz

1000-50 cfm Device 800 cfm @ 0.6" wc 63 55 52 54 50 49 200 cfm @ 0.6" wc 46 42 38 37 32 25 800 cfm @ 3.0" wc 73 70 64 66 65 60 200 cfm @ 3.0" wc 51 52 51 50 52 51



Table 2. Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Discharge)

Discharge Sound Power Level in dB (re: 10-12 watts)

Octave Band Number 2 3 4 5 6 7 Center Frequency in Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz






Table 3. Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Radiated)

Radiated Sound Power Level in dB (re: 10-12 watts)

Octave Band Number 2 3 4 5 6 7 Center Frequency in Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz




2.4 MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide LACSs using standard materials and components designed andconstructed as recommended by the system manufacturer and as required for a completeinstallation in compliance with these Specifications.

B. Control Calibration:

1. Each airflow control device shall be factory calibrated to the job specific airflow asdetailed on the plans and specifications. Each factory calibrated control/measuringdevice shall be electronically calibrated/characterized at the factory. Calibrationshall be included in the product cost or related labor hours. No device shall beinstalled without verification or certification of accuracy or airflow measurementcalibration.

C. ALL air valves will be factory calibrated using N.V.L.A.P. (National Voluntary LaboratoryAccreditation Program) administered by N.I.S.T. using ISO/IEC 17025. This accreditationis a third-party evaluation, and with unscheduled inspections to insure the N.V.L.A.P.Accredited status. “NIST Traceable” alone is NOT ACCEPTABLE as it only references thecalibration instruments being used but has No N.I.S.T. claims for the air flow devicesthemselves.

D. A final field verification of accuracy and control stability shall be made by the balancingcontractor where so directed by the Owner. Accuracy and performance shall beguaranteed as specified irrespective of field conditions and device inlet conditions.

E. Each airflow control valve shall be individually marked with valve specific factory calibrationdata by the equipment supplier. As a minimum, data shall include valve tag number, serialor unit number, model number, valve characterization information or field test results, andquality control inspection numbers.

F. A final calibration list (electronic data format) of all settings and test results, in MS Excelformat, shall be provided to the Owner.



2.5 AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICES – GENERAL:

A. The airflow control device shall be a venturi valve equal to the A certified Laboratory air flowvendor Controls Accel II Valves installed using A certified Laboratory air flow vendorControls drawband clamps.

B. The airflow control device shall be a venturi valve with an option for 100% shut-offcapabilities. The valve assembly manufacturer’s Quality Management System shall beregistered to ISO 9001:2000.

C. The manufacturer shall provide comprehensive leakage charts generated from ASME N510pressure decay testing. Standard shut-off devices shall be tested up to and including 5”WC Static pressure. Low-leakage shut-off devices shall be tested up to and including30”WC Static pressure and have leakage rates that meet or exceed Table 4 shown below.

D. The airflow control device shall be pressure independent over its specified differential staticpressure operating range. An integral pressure independent assembly shall respond andmaintain specific airflow within one second of a change in duct static pressure irrespectiveof the magnitude of pressure and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on amanifolded system.

E. The airflow control device shall maintain accuracy within ±5% of signal over an airflowturndown range as shown in the table below, and stated by the venturi’s originalmanufacturer’s sizing chart in the “Ideal Selection Range” without exceeding 2200 FPMvelocity through any airflow device and have no deviation or loss of accuracy through theentire range of the flow device.

F. The airflow control device shall be provided with documentation and certification forMinimum “Controllability Differential Static Pressure”, or Static Pressure Drop under FULLCONTROL, not just wide open. The standard ASHRAE 130 test is NOT ACCEPTABLE, asthis does not detail Minimum OPERATIONAL static pressure drop and only showsMaximum capable air flow in the wide open position, which DOES NOT take into accountVelocity Pressure required for controllability.

Table 4. Static Pressure Leakage rate Thresholds

PRESSURE DROP RANGE

AIRFLOW TURNDOWN VALVE TYPE

0.6- 3.0 in w.c. Devices up to 1,000 CFM (472 l/s) 20 to 1 Standard Devices up to 1,500 CFM (708 l/s) 16 to 1 Standard

Devices up to 2,500 CFM (1,180 l/s) 12 to 1 Standard Devices up to 850 CFM (401 l/s) 17 to 1 Shutoff

Devices up to 1,300 CFM (614 l/s) 14 to 1 Shutoff 0.3- 3.0 in w.c. Devices up to 550 CFM (260 l/s) 11 to 1 Standard

Devices up to 1,050 CFM (496 l/s) 11 to 1 Standard

G. No minimum entrance or exit duct diameters shall be required to ensure accuracy and/orpressure independence. Those systems with Flow sensors must provide 7.5 DuctDiameters downstream and 3 Duct Diameters of straight duct runs per ASHRAEFundamentals “Measuring Flow in Ducts” to avoid turbulence that significantly impactsaccurate flow measurement.

H. Airflow device shall maintain FULL pressure independence during a loss of power, to avoidpressurization loss or disruption. Electronic pressure independent devices are NOTallowed unless the device is backed up with a separately provided UPS and uses a N+1controller to insure pressure independence during a power fail condition.

I. The airflow control device shall be constructed of one of the following four types:



1. Class A - The airflow control device for non-corrosive airstreams such as supply andgeneral exhaust shall be constructed of 16-gauge aluminum. The device's shaft andshaft support brackets shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The pivot arm and internalmounting link shall be made of aluminum. The pressure independent springs shall be aspring-grade stainless steel. All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made of a Teflon, orpolyester, or PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) composite.a. Sound attenuating devices if required, used in conjunction with general exhaust or

supply airflow control devices shall be constructed using 24 gauge galvanizedsteel or other suitable material used in standard duct construction. No soundabsorptive materials of any kind shall be used.

2. Class B - The airflow control device for corrosive airstreams such as fume hoods shallhave a baked-on corrosion resistant phenolic coating. The device's shaft shall be madeof 316 stainless steel with a Teflon coating. The shaft support brackets shall be made of316 stainless steel. The pivot arm and internal mounting link shall be made of 316 or303 stainless steel. The pressure independent springs shall be a spring-grade stainlesssteel. The internal nuts, bolts and rivets shall be stainless steel. All shaft bearingsurfaces shall be made of a Teflon or PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) composite.

3. Class C - The airflow control device for highly corrosive airstreams shall be constructedas defined in Paragraph D.2 and, in addition, shall have no exposed aluminum orstainless steel components. Shaft support brackets, pivot arm, internal mounting link,and pressure independent springs shall have a baked on corrosion resistant phenoliccoating in addition to the materials defined in paragraph D.2. The internal nuts, bolts,and rivets shall be titanium or phenolic coated stainless steel. Only devices clearlydefined as “High Corrosion Resistant” on project drawings will require this construction.

4. Class D - The airflow control device for extremely highly corrosive airstreams shall beconstructed with PVDF coatings, shall have no exposed aluminum or stainless steelcomponents. Shaft support brackets, pivot arm, internal mounting link, and pressureindependent springs shall have a PVDF corrosion resistant coating in addition to thematerials defined in paragraph D.2. The internal nuts, bolts, and rivets shall be titaniumor PVDF coated stainless steel. Only devices clearly defined as “Extreme HighCorrosion Resistant” on project drawings will require this construction.

J. For corrosive applications 304 Stainless steel materials are NOT ACCEPTABLE.K. For two-position or VAV operation, an electric actuator shall be factory mounted to the

valve. Loss of control power shall cause normally open valves to fail to maximum position,and normally closed valves to fail to minimum position. Electric actuators that fail in lastposition are NOT ACCEPTABLE when used in fume hood and make-up air controlapplications. Constant volume valves do not require actuators.

L. The controller for the airflow control devices shall be microprocessor based and operateusing a peer-to-peer control architecture. The room-level airflow control devices shallfunction as a stand-alone network.

M. The room-level control network shall utilize a LonTalk communication peer to peer protocolwith at least 78k Baud rate.

N. There shall be no reliance on external or building-level control devices to perform room-level control functions. Each laboratory control system shall have the capability ofperforming; Fume hood control, Pressurization control, Temperature control, Humiditycontrol, and implement Occupancy and Emergency mode control schemes.

O. The LACSs shall have the option of digital integration with the BMS.P. Certification: Requirements to ensure Quality Assurance for Critical Airflow Devices

1. Each airflow control device shall be factory calibrated to the job specific airflows asdetailed on the plans and specifications using N.V.L.A.P. NIST regulated traceable



air stations and instrumentation having a combined accuracy of at least ±1% of signal over the entire range of measurement. Electronic airflow control devices shall be further calibrated and their accuracy verified to ±5% of signal at a minimum of forty-eight different airflows across the full operating range of the device.

2. All airflow control devices shall be individually marked with device specific, factorycalibration data. At a minimum, it should include: tag number, serial number,model number, eight point characterization information (for electronic devices), andquality control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by themanufacturer for use with as-built documentation.

3. ALL air valves will be factory calibrated using N.V.L.A.P. (National VoluntaryLaboratory Accreditation Program) administered by N.I.S.T. using ISO/IEC 17025.This accreditation is a third-party evaluation, and with unscheduled inspections toinsure the N.V.L.A.P. Accredited status. “NIST Traceable” alone is NOTACCEPTABLE as it only references the calibration instruments being used but hasNo N.I.S.T. claims for the air flow devices themselves.

4. Provide manufacturers and independent test lab certification of test results, signedby an authorized officer of the company. The LACS provider shall be an entity thatdesigns, develops, manufacturers, and sells products and service to control theenvironment and airflow of critical spaces using a Quality Management Systemregistered to ISO: 9001.

5. Provide manufacturer’s OSHPD (Office of State Wide Health and Planning andDevelopment) compliance and testing for all valves adherence to seismicrequirements to guarantee the integrity and durability of the product under severeconditions.

Q. 100% Shut-off Air Valves –1. 100% Shut-off confirmation is available through a local digital output or an

integrated point. The 100% shut-off confirmation is required by positive positionverification. Airflow readings for 100% shut off conditions are NOT ACCEPTABLEdue to inaccurate measurement at no flow conditions.

2. Standard Flow Rates for Medium Pressure Applications only (0.6”W.C.)8” Valve – 100% Verified Shut Off - 35 – 600 CFM 10” Valve – 100% Verified Shut Off - 50 – 850 CFM Dual 10” Valve – 100% Verified Shut Off - 100 – 1700 CFM 12” Valve – 100% Verified Shut Off - 90 – 1300 CFM Dual 12” Valve – 100% Verified Shut Off - 180 – 2600 CFM

3. 100% Shut-off sequence can be initiated through an universal input or remotely viathe local area network from the BMS or a certified LACS Vendor VIEW Touch.

4. The shutoff airflow control device shall have shutoff and casing leakage of no morethan:

Table 5 TITLE STATIC PRESSURE ACROSS

VALVE IN SHUTOFF AIRFLOW SHUTOFF

LEAKAGE CASING LEAKAGE

5.0 in w.c. Shutoff devices up to 850 CFM (472 l/s)

6 CFM 0.12 CFM/ ft²

Shutoff devices up to 1,300 CFM (708 l/s)

6 CFM 0.12 CFM/ ft²

Low leakage shutoff devices up to 850

0.005 CFM 0.010 CFM/ ft²



CFM (472 l/s) Low leakage shutoff

devices up to 1,300 CFM (708 l/s)

0.010 CFM 0.010 CFM/ ft²

2.6 FUME HOOD CONSTANT/VARIABLE VOLUME CONTROLLER

A. Constant volume fume hood controllers if required for constant volume applications shall beidentical to the variable volume controller specified herein except that the controls are set tomaintain a constant airflow with minimum flow equal to maximum air flow. Constant volumecontrollers may be changed to variable volume controllers using only the local controller orthe central workstation.

2.7 FUME HOOD DISPLAY

A. The display screen shall be a A certified Laboratory air flow vendor Controls Sentry 3.2color LCD resistive touch screen (240 x 320 RGB)

B. The Fume hood display screen shall support input configurations for fume hood operationalparameters done at the touch panel and at a minimum include1. Sash Dimensions2. Hood ID3. Hood Certification Reminder4. Hood Occupancy Status5. Stopwatch Timer6. Message display

C. The enclosure shall be made from material that is resistant to chemical that are typicallyused in the lab for wipe down and general cleaning agents.

D. The unit’s exposed surfaces shall be chemically resistant to vaporized hydrogen peroxide(VHP), formaldehyde, chloride dioxide, Perchloric acid, sodium, hypochlorite 3-6% bleach,and quaternary ammonium 7% in 1:128 tap water (ammonia).

E. Two mechanical membrane buttons shall be provided at the front panel of the display toenable users to quickly activate emergency mode and mute without having to removeprotective gloves.

F. Flush mount and recess mount optionsG. Timer feature shall be provided to enable users to set specific time to time the durations of

experiments and provide visual and audible alarms when the set time is expired.H. The fume hood display shall have the ability to receive a signal from other devices such as

a Through-The-Wall (TTW) sensor. The TTW shall NOT control but provide additionallymonitoring and alert capabilities.

I. Power shall be 24VAC +/- 15% at 10VA, 50/60 Hz.J. Configuration

1. Configuration shall be performed from the touch display, user interface keypad and/ormanufacturer’s software tools

2. The device shall display Fume Hood performance data based on control logicsembedded inside the valve controller.

K. Information Display1. This device shall have the ability to show when the fume hood face velocity is within

the normal operating range, energy saving mode, hood certification, hood ID, and



hood occupancy status. The device shall be configurable to display one of the following measurement units; cubic feet per minute (CFM), meters cubed per hour (m3/h), liters per second (l/s), feet per minute (FPM), or meters per second (m/s).

2. This device shall have the ability to display system errors caused by airflow or sash travel malfunctions.

3. This device shall have the ability to show when the hood is due for recertification and shall provide a visual notification at the LCD that that the hood is past certification.

L. Emergency (Purge) Exhaust 1. This device shall have a mechanical membrane button on the lower portion that when

pressed will initiate an emergency (purge) exhaust mode in the associated fume hood valve

2. Button shall be mechanical so that users with rubber, nitrile, vinyl, latex, or other gloves can operated the emergency exhaust button.

3. The emergency (purge) exhaust mode, when initiated, will send the associated fume hood exhaust valve to either the maximum flow of the valve, or other predetermined flow.

M. Alarms 1. This device shall have the ability to show alarms on the main screen using visual

and audible alerts 2. The main screen background color shall change to flashing red with text stating the

type of alarm. 3. In the alarm state, the annunciator shall remain active until the event that triggered

the alarm is removed or fixed. 4. The device shall have the ability to show DIVERSITY alarm for design strategies

employing diversity. a. Diversity alarms shall be generated by the LACS or by the BMS. b. Audible alert for the diversity alarm will be generated at the monitor.

5. The device shall have customizable audible alarm levels and customizable mute durations.

6. Users shall have the ability to change the audible alerts to; Low, Medium, or High 7. The device shall have Alarm Muting options, which silences the audible alarm for

an adjustable time period when the mute button is pushed. If another alarm is generated during the mute period, the new alarm shall override the mute delay, and the alarm shall sound again.

N. Energy Conservation (This section shall be reviewed by EHLS prior to design documentation)

1. The device shall have the ability to enable Fume Hood Hibernation Mode a. When activated the exhaust flow through the fume hood goes to the minimum

allowed by the exhaust valve (or Shut-off where available) when the sash is fully closed and not chemicals are present in the hood.

b. The mode shall be initiated by a sequence including entering menu and a password on the touch display, an external momentary switch input or network command via the BMS.

c. When activated, the LCD Display shall show “Hood in Hibernation” and the exhaust valve shall move to its minimum position or shut-off position if available.

d. Safety shall be built into the decommission option, whereby opening the fume hood sash shall automatically return the fume hood exhaust to an in-use



operating volume as determined by the sash sensor. Fume hood hibernation shall be a point that can be integrated to the BMS or BAS system.

2. The device shall provide night time energy waste alarming to generate a visual andaudible alarm to notify when the fume hood sash is open beyond its minimum flowposition and the lights in the room are off.a. When activated, the LCD display shall show “Energy Waste Close Sash” and

the audible alarm shall sound until the sash is closed.b. The light levels at which the alarm is both initiated and cancelled shall be

configurable.3. At Owner’s option only, the device shall provide sash energy waste alarming, which

generates a visual and audible alarm to notify when the fume hood sash is openbeyond a configurable set position and no one is in front of the fume hood.a. When activated, the LCD display shall show “Energy Waste Close Sash” and

the audible alarm shall sound until the sash is closed.O. Security

1. At Owner’s option only end users shall have the ability to enable a PIN pass codeto prevent unauthorized changes to sash heights, air flow settings and othereditable parameters.

P. Compliance1. The unit shall be certified as meeting regulatory compliance with CE, CUL, and

RoHS.2. The unit shall be suitable for use with non-solvent wipe down and is designed

to meet IP44 test standards.3. The device shall comply with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:4. This device shall not cause harmful interference.5. This device shall accept any interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.Q. The laboratory control system manufacturer shall supply a fume hood control system to

directly measure the area of the fume hood sash opening. The measured sash area shallproportionally control the hood’s exhaust airflow in a variable volume mode to maintain aconstant face velocity. Hood airflow shall be varied to maintain a constant face velocityover no less than a 5 to 1 change in the sash open area (change in sash position).

R. Fume hood control system shall respond to and maintain the face velocity set point toinsure fume hood containment. Response time shall be less than one second with no morethan a 5% of set point overshoot and undershoot when the sash is raised or closed. Sashraise time for this test shall be one second with a 5 to 1 change in sash area.

S. An approved horizontal and/or vertical sash sensor shall be provided by the lab systemsupplier as an integral part of the lab air volume control system (single sourceresponsibility) to measure the height of each vertically and/or horizontally moving fumehood sash. The sash sensor shall be an approved method of sash position sensing thathas a proven application history. Through wall pressure sensors for a means of CONTROLare NOT ACCEPTABLE.

T. A fume hood monitor shall be provided to receive the sash opening signals from the verticaland/or horizontal sash sensors. The monitor shall compute the total open sash area andoutput an exhaust airflow control signal to the appropriate volume control device (valve) tomaintain a constant face velocity.

U. The fume hood monitor shall modulate the airflow in response to the sash opening signalsfrom the vertical sash sensors between closed and 18” open or the stop set point. Above



the stop set point, the exhaust valve shall maintain a constant airflow and allow the face velocity to reduce proportionately to the face opening.

V. Fume hood monitor shall contain a visual and audible alarm to indicate a low face velocity. Muting of the alarm shall only silence the audible portion, while the visual alarm shall be maintained until the low flow condition has returned to normal. Alarm shall be triggered by:

W. A push button switch shall be provided to mute the audible alarms. The mute mode is automatically reset when the alarm condition ceases.

X. In labs without fume hoods, a lab emergency push button (equipment and control option) may be installed at the exit to the lab. Switch shall activate all exhaust and supply valves causing the exhaust and supply system to flush the lab and sound an audible alarm to signal lab emergency condition.

2.8 INDIVIDUAL ROOM AIRFLOW CONTROL UNITS:

A. Provide a room airflow control or control panel for each room to control the airflow balance of that room. The room RMI / RMC Niagara platform shall be panel mounted in the location shown on the drawings to provide ease of maintenance. Provide RMI / RMC room control units as required for local Web-access configuration per controlled room.

B. The output from the room’s temperature sensor, in response to the space temperature, will cause the dual duct dampers to modulate independent of the room volume control if Dual Duct mixing is used. For reheat control, the reheat control valve will be modulated to provide thermal adjustments as temperature changes.

C. The control signal for the make-up/supply air flow control valve shall be generated by the required offset and the difference between the supply air flow and the total general exhaust or auxiliary and hood exhaust valve air signals. The controls shall cause the supply to modulate with the exhaust total to maintain a stable room pressurization differential (offset). The controls shall maintain a stable offset airflow to prevent the room from changing pressure relationships during variable airflow and during hood sash movement. The individual room controls shall sense the room temperature and the mixing damper position. Air flow shall be increased only when the mixing dampers are at their limit with all flow through the hot deck or the cold deck. If reheat is used, the room controls will increase the air flow only when the Reheat command is a minimum position.

E. The Lab Airflow Controller shall increase flow at the general exhaust valve or auxiliary exhaust valve under conditions where additional exhaust is required to maintain the room’s airflow balance and temperature. The general exhaust valve command shall equal the difference between the supply volume requirement for temperature control and the hood’s make-up air volume. Control of the general exhaust valve directly by the thermostat, with the supply volume equal to the sum of the general and hood exhaust volumes less offset is not allowed.

F. The Lab Airflow Controller shall sum the hood exhaust and general exhaust volume signals and output a linear scaled control signal representing the total exhaust volume.

G. The Lab Airflow Controller shall be electronic or a DDC microprocessor-based digital controller. The controllers shall control and communicate digitally via a high speed Peer to Peer digital network. A polling sub-LAN network requiring a primary controller to provide communication and distribution of information between the secondary lab controllers is NOT ACCEPTABLE. The inputs shall accept signals proportional to general, auxiliary, fume hood, exhaust, and space supply flows. The output signals shall control supply valves andgeneral exhaust/return air valves, with signals proportional to the desired supply or exhaust volumes.

H. Integral field adjustable controls shall be provided for all required calibration and scaling adjustments. Where direct airflow measurement is used for this control, each sensor



utilized must have the capacity of being field validated with individual zero and span calibrations. Autozero routines that use or modulate the damper position are NOT ACCEPTABLE. Autozero routines shall limit controls for less than one second and shall be prohibited during sash movement.

I. The Lab Airflow Controllers shall maintain a variable negative or positive offset asscheduled on the lab airflow schedule between the sum of the room’s total exhaust and themake-up/supply air volumes. This offset represents the volume of air that will enter or exitthe room from the corridor or adjacent rooms.

J. A power supply for the control panel mounted unit, shall be included to power the LACSfrom one dedicated 120 VAC line connection per interface panel.

2.9 EXHAUST AND SUPPLY AIRFLOW DEVICE CONTROLLER:

A. The airflow control device shall be a microprocessor-based design and, shall use closedloop control to linearly regulate airflow based on a digital control signal. The device shallgenerate a digital feedback signal that represents its airflow.

B. The airflow control device shall store its control algorithms in non-volatile, re-writablememory. The device shall be able to stand-alone or to be networked with other room leveldigital airflow control devices using an industry standard protocol.

C. Room-level control functions shall be embedded in and carried out by the airflow devicecontroller using distributed control architecture. Critical control functions shall beimplemented locally, no room-level controller shall be required.

D. The airflow control device shall use industry standard 24 Vac power.E. The airflow control device shall have provisions to connect a notebook PC commissioning

tool and every node on the network shall be accessible from any point in the system.F. The airflow control device shall have built-integral Input/Output connections address fume

hood control, temperature control, humidity control occupancy control, emergency controland non-network sensors switches and control devices. At a minimum the airflow controllershall have:

G. Three (3) Universal Inputs, capable of accepting 0 to 10Vdc, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 65k ohms, orType 2 or Type 3 10k ohm @ 25 degree C thermistor temperature sensors.

H. One (1) Digital Input capable of accepting a dry contact or logic level signal input.I. Two (2) Analog Outputs capable of developing either a 0 to 10Vdc, or 4 to 20mA linear

control signal.J. One (1) Form C (SPDT) relay output capable of driving up to 1A @ 24Vac/Vdc.K. The airflow control device shall meet FCC Part 15 Subpart J Class A, and be UL916 listed.

2.10 SUPPLY AND EXHAUST TERMINAL UNITS/AIRFLOW DEVICES GENERAL:

A. General Performance: Devices using mechanical CFM limiters will not be accepted, norshall it be necessary to change control components to make airflow rate changes orchange from constant volume operation to variable volume operation. Where used, electricactuator motors, electronic controllers, and electronic or DDC controls shall be furnished,mounted and adjusted by the laboratory airflow controls manufacturer to assure theirproper placement within the units. The manufacturer shall be responsible for theconstruction of the terminal unit, the installation of internal control components, allworkmanship and materials of the entire assembly of unit and controls and shall beresponsible for the performance of the controls.

B. Control Performance:



1. Project lab air controls shall be designed to operate initially as a variable volume occupied/unoccupied room.

2. Supply unit assemblies shall modulate cold and hot air to maintain space temperature. An independent volume controller downstream of the dual duct assembly shall provide volume control as specified hereinafter.

3. General exhaust valves shall respond to the hood exhaust valve flow to maintain the room airflow offset when the hood sash is moved or repositioned. The auxiliary valve or room exhaust valve shall also modulate (in a VAV mode) to maintain the air flow as low as possible within the temperature and air change or air flow limits set for “occupied” and “unoccupied” conditions.

4. The supply air volume controller shall modulate to provide a stable, constant, room offset (exhaust less supply CFM).

C. Electric Control Operators, Sensors and Related Materials: 1. Field pneumatic control air connections, if required, shall consist of air connections

to the riser and all distribution within and to the room, if required, for electric operators, sensors and related components. All control logic shall be electronic. The dual duct box manufacturer shall install all airflow monitoring tubing between the heating and cooling sides of the assembly required for operation. A calibration chart and piping diagram shall be submitted for approval. A copy of the approved wiring diagram shall be attached to the side of the unit near the cold duct valve.

2. To provide for a safe airflow in the event of power failure, the units are to be arranged so that supply airflow control dampers fail closed (normal position).

3. All electrical work and products shall meet Division 26 requirements.

2.11 TWO-POSITION EXHAUST AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICES:

A. The airflow control device shall maintain a N.V.L.A.P. factory calibrated fixed maximum and minimum flow setpoint based on a switched electronic signal. Two-position devices requiring feedback shall generate a 0 to 10 volt feedback signal that is linearly proportional to its airflow. All Two-Position devices shall either be networks, or hard-wired into the room-level network so as to be considered under pressurization control.

2.12 CONSTANT VOLUME AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICES:

A. The airflow control device shall maintain a constant airflow setpoint. It shall be factory N.V.L.A.P. calibrated and set for the desired airflow. It shall also be capable of field adjustment for future changes in desired airflow.

B. LACS Vendors not employing constant volume venturi airflow control valves shall provide electrical wiring as required for their devices.

2.13 VARIABLE VOLUME AIRFLOW CONTROL VALVES:

A. Constant volume exhaust controllers shall be identical to the variable volume controller specified herein except that the controls are set to maintain a constant airflow with minimum flow equal to maximum airflow. Constant volume controllers may be changed to variable volume controllers using only the local controller or the central workstation.

B. All airflow control valves shall provide smooth accurate fast response to the control signals. Valve shall be constructed such that the control valve and damper insure a minimum static pressure loss. Valve shall provide accurate control at low flow values.

C. Valve shall be pressure independent over a 0.6” to 3.0” WC drop across the valve. Integral pressure independent assembly shall respond and maintain specific airflow within two seconds of a change in duct static pressure.



D. Valve airflow measurement shall use the flow measurement and control valve described inthe dual duct device above with the following criteria or:1. General exhaust air valves shall use the multi port flow measurement device

described above for the dual duct device or the orifice plate described below. Themulti port flow measurement device shall maintain accuracy over a minimum turndown ratio of 5:1 when designed for a maximum flow pressure drop of 0.6” WG.

2. The general exhaust air valve shall be suitable for use as a Hood exhaust air valveor as an general/auxiliary exhaust valve with a design flow of 75% of it’s initialselection air flow and a 5:1 turndown from the reduced air volume.

3. Hood exhaust valve bodies and assemblies shall use a calibrated orifice plate flowstation designed for the airflow velocities scheduled or recommended for eachapplication when selected for a design flow pressure drop of 0.6” WG. The orificeshall maintain accuracy over a minimum turn down ratio of 5:1.

E. Airflow accuracy shall be a maximum of ±5% of reading (not full scale) regardless of inlet orexit duct configuration over an airflow turndown range of not less than 5 to 1 with an initialdesign pressure differential of 0.60” static pressure drop across the measure/controldevice. No entrance or exit duct diameters (other than size transitions) shall be required toensure speed of response, accuracy, or pressure independence. Where straight duct or asize transition is required, the manufacturer shall provide integral to the equipmentsupplied, straightening vanes and duct sections to accommodate the entrance/exitrequirements and ensure performance.

F. Valve shall be constructed of one of the following two types:1. General exhaust air valve bodies shall be constructed of 16 gauge aluminum or 18

gauge galvanized steel. All bearing surfaces shall be long life teflon or tefloninfused. The valve’s shaft, pivot arm, shaft support brackets, and internal mountinghardware shall be made of 316L Stainless Steel. Supply air valve may be integralto the dual duct assembly.

2. Hood cabinet exhaust valve bodies and assemblies shall have two baked-on coatsof corrosion resistant phenolic coating (Heresite P403) or shall be constructedentirely of 316L Stainless Steel. The valve components located in the air streamshall be 316L Stainless Steel. The pivot arm, shaft support brackets, and internalmounting hardware shall be made of 316L Stainless Steel. General 300 SeriesStainless Steel materials are unacceptable.

G. Actuation1. For laboratory area electrically actuated VAV operation, a CE high speed certified

electronic actuator shall be factory mounted to the valve. Loss of main power shallcause the valve to position itself in an appropriate failsafe state. Options for thesefailsafe states include: normally open-maximum position, normally closed-minimumposition and last position. This position shall be maintained constantly withoutexternal influence, regardless of external conditions on the valve (within productspecifications). When fail in last position is used, pressure independent airflowcontrol is to be maintained during power fail with no loss of control.

2. For office area electrically actuated VAV operation, a CE certified electronicactuator shall be factory mounted to the valve. Loss of main power shall cause thevalve to position itself in an appropriate failsafe state. Options for these failsafestates include: normally open-maximum position, normally closed-minimumposition and last position. This position shall be maintained constantly withoutexternal influence, regardless of external conditions on the valve (within productspecifications).

3. Constant volume valves do not require actuators.



2.14 WEB-BASED SUPERVISOR DASHBOARD

A. Summary – The LACS shall have a complete Web-Based system “Supervisor” product, to provide web access, monitoring, trends, and alarming as a supplement to the Building Automation system as a product offering for a complete system solution.

B. The LACS Supervisor software application shall be provided bythe LACS Manufacturer (3rd Party Application Software is NOT ACCEPTABLE). This Supervisor package will be a web server for visualizing and controlling laboratory airflow control equipment via web browsers. User-friendly dashboards served by the Supervisor provide device feedback, historical trend data, alarms, system health, scheduling, and control functions. The Supervisor also supports centralized trend logging and historical data pushes through a SQL driver to a database on a different computer from the one where its software resides.

C. To visualize lab control devices, the Supervisor must be used in conjunction with laboratory airflow control server or Room Manager. The Supervisor can also pull in any third party information (including Facility Air Monitoring Systems) that is on the BACnet network in a building. Data is displayed on the dashboard using graphics representing laboratory airflow control room applications and a wide range of customizable templates (gadgets). The Supervisor also supports multiple users - each user can customize the base graphics as well as build their own My Dashboards.

D. Pre-built Gadgets should include the following as a minimal offering; 1. Alarm Gadget 2. Chart Gadget 3. Hood Flow Usage Gadget 4. Zone ACH Gadget 5. Zone ACH Status Gadget 6. All Gadgets provide “Smart” capabilities of mining data based upon their location

within the database navigation tree. E. Features

1. View real-time and historical environmental data. Ready to use without the need to integrate to the building automation system.

2. Consolidated building view down to device level status. Ability to see the status of the buildings health, energy usage and safety and quickly drill down to the device level to troubleshoot alarms.

3. Customizable based on user. Customize the dashboards to present only the information of interest. The safety officer can see different dashboards than the facilities personnel to ensure only information critical to their role is presented.

4. Third party devices. Must support viewing information from devices such as building utility meters and room air quality sensors (Facility Air Monitoring System) that may not have a user interface.

5. Track energy usage down to device level. Real impact on energy reduction, monitor and reduce energy usage at the lab level. Dashboards monitor real-time energy usage and allow you to compare against historical usage and benchmarks.

6. Air Changes per Hour optimization. Reduce energy usage while maintain a safe environment through the visualization and control of the air flow vent rate based on air quality and occupancy of the space.

7. Consolidate building submeters with lab energy usage. Ability to integrate BACnet capable submeters into the dashboards for a consolidated energy profile.

8. Actively monitor fume hood safety. Actively monitor the face velocity at each hood through the dashboards and quickly respond to alarms when any issue arises.



9. Front end for air quality sensors. View sensor data in dashboards for aconsolidated view of all environmental data without going through the buildingautomation system.

10. Compliance reporting. Consolidated all environment data from laboratory airflowcontrol system and other room devices into the Supervisor for a single resource todevelop safety and compliance reports.

11. Enterprise-level information exchange using an SQL database andHTTP/HTML/XML text formats.

12. Security and password protection using standard Java authentication andencryption.

13. Optional security via an external LDAP connection.14. Exports archived trend and alarm data to SQL.

F. Installation1. The Supervisor software will be installed on an Owner provided server supplied

computer that has an operating system as defined.2. Processor - Intel i7, 3.5Ghz or higher.3. Operating System4. Microsoft Windows 7 Professional, 64-bit.5. Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise, 64-bit.6. Web Broswers7. Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 or later.8. Google Chrome 24 or later.9. Mozilla Firefox 18 or later.

10. Apple Safari 5 or later.11. Memory - 16 GB minimum.12. Hard Drive - 1 TB minimum.13. Display - Video card and monitor capable of displaying 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution

or greater; minimum 1 GB on board RAM.14. Minimum 27" LED monitor.15. Network Support

a. Ethernet adapter (10/100/1000 Mb with RF-45 connector).b. Ethernet driver support for BACnet I/P.

16. Network Connectiona. Full-time high-speed ISP connection recommended for remote site access (i.e.

T1, ADSL, cable modem).b. When integrated with a laboratory airflow control system Server or Room

Manager, the Supervisor is connected to the Ethernet, pulling data from theLaboratory space via BACnet IP or Ethernet from the laboratory airflow controlsystem servers.

c. Integration into the buildings facility air monitoring system. Include their fullpoints and serve up on the dashboards complete with the laboratory airflowcontrol system.

2.15 ROOM LEVEL INTEGRATION

A. Valves shall be provided with room Level Integration device. Room Level Integration deviceshall be a standalone piece of hardware with embedded Power PC platform (@400MHz or



greater), operating on QNX Real-time Operating system and will be used for commissioning and configuration of Venturi valves and ancillary components such as Fume Hood Displays, and Input Output (I/O) modules when connected to a certified Laboratory air flow vendor Controls Workbench, Room Manager, or Supervisor.

B. After the Room Level Interface is commissioned it shall provide a web based user interface for device, network, and platform diagnostics as well as a Test and Balance web application for zone balance and airflow validation. Room Level interface will also provide a means of integrating on an open BACnet network via IP, Ethernet, or MS/TP to be field selectable at time of commissioning.

C. Room Level Integration device shall operate with the following platform and Operating system:

1. Platform a. Power PC 405EX 400MHz or greater processor b. MB SDRAM & 128 MB or greater Flash Memory c. Data Recovery Services with SRAM d. Real-time clock

2. Operating System a. QNX RTOS b. Oracle Hotspot JAVA VM c. Niagara AX 3.7.106 or later d. Niagara 4.0 Ready

D. Room Level Integration device shall support a combination of the following network connection ports and communication protocols as standard or orderable options:

1. 2 Ethernet Ports (RJ-45 Connectors) – 10/100 Mbps 2. RS-232 Port (9 pin D-shell connector) 3. RS-485 on board port (3 Screw Connector on base board) 4. Dual port RS-485 expansion adapters 5. LON adapters 78 Kbps FTT 10 6. BAS protocol: BACnet over Ethernet, or BACnet over IP, or BACnet over MS/TP

a. BAS Implementation: Conformance Class 3 BIBBS-BBC (BACnet Building Controller)

b. BAS data transfer rates (points per second): Read requests – 50 sustained, 100 peak; Write commands – 30 maximum

c. Room network: ANSI 709.1 LonTalk protocol E. Each LON FTT-10A adapter on the Room Level interface shall support up to 20 A certified

Laboratory air flow vendor Controls Digital High Speed controllers with Digital Sentry Fume hood monitors (when needed for fume hood operation), or 20 A certified Laboratory air flow vendor Controls tracking pair digital standard speed controllers (total of 40 LON FTT-10A devices combined when two LON FTT-10A channels are installed).

F. Room Integrator device shall have option to be field upgraded to a Room Controller to support pluggable local Input/Output (I/O) modules with the following options:

1. 16-Point Module a. 8 Universal Inputs (Type 3 Thermistors, 0 - 1000 ohms, 0 - b. volts, 0 - 20 mA with external resistor) c. Relay Outputs (Form A contacts, 24 VAC @ 0.5 amp rated) d. Analog Outputs (0 - 10 VDC)



2. 34-Point Modulea. 16 Universal Inputs (Type 3 Thermistors, 0 - 1000 ohms, 0 -b. volts, 0 - 20 mA with external resistor)c. 10 Relay Outputs (Form A contacts, 24 VAC @ 0.5 amp rated)d. Analog Outputs (0 - 10 VDC)

G. If the room level integration device drops off the network or loses power, it shall not causethe zone balance, temperature control, or fume hood devices to lose control. The roomlevel valve devices should operate independently of the room level integration device.

H. Room Level Integrator shall be able to Integrate to BAS through BACnet/IP,BACnet/Ethernet through on board communication adapters and shall be fieldconfigurable/upgradable.

I. Points List1. Valve Level (Per Valve)

a. Flow Setpoint – Read Onlyb. Flow Feedback – Read Onlyc. Jam Alarm – Read Onlyd. Flow Alarm – Read Only

2. Temperature Control (Per Zone)e. Space Temperature – Read Onlyf. Discharge Air Temperature (if applicable) – Read Onlyg. Occ/Unocc Cooling Temperature Setpoints – Read/Writeh. Occ/Unocc Heating Temperature Setpoints - Read/Writei. Effective Temperature Setpoint – Read Onlyj. Heating Demand – Read Onlyk. Cooling Demand – Read Only

3. Zone Balance Control (Per Zone)a. Room Offset Setpoint – Read Onlyb. Room Offset – Read Onlyc. Occupied Min Ventilation Setpoint (if applicable) – Read/Writed. Unoccupied Min Ventilation Setpoint (if applicable) – Read/Writee. Total Supply Flow – Read Onlyf. Total Exhaust Flow – Read Onlyg. Total Hood Flow – Read Onlyh. Diversity Alarm (if applicable) – Read Only)

4. Fume Hood Control (Per Fume Hood)a. Flow Setpoint – Read Onlyb. Flow Feedback – Read Onlyc. Jam Alarm – Read Onlyd. Flow Alarm – Read Onlye. Face Velocity – Read Onlyf. Sash Position – Read Onlyg. Fume Hood Emergency Purge Alarm – Read Onlyh. User Status (If applicable) – Read Onlyi. Broken Sash Cable Alarm –Read Only

J. LACS critical environment integration shall support distributed network architecture fromroom level BACnet MS/TP segment or LON FTT-10 bus to a dedicated BACnet MS/TPsegment, building BACnet/Ethernet, or BACnet/IP building backbone using single or



multiple IP addresses. Backbone communication protocol must be field selectable/upgradable.

K. Room Integrator / Room Controller Configuration Tools 1. All configuration tools required for FULL system programming, configuration, and

startup will be available at the room level using NO SPECIAL Software. All tools will be Web-Based and password available using standard Ethernet Browsers. 3rd-party or Manufacturer required software requirements are NOT ACCEPTABLE.

2.16 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MONITORS–

Differential Room Pressure is to be monitored by a certified Laboratory air flow vendor Air Pressure Monitor (APM).

A. The room pressure controller (Controllers) shall be capable of measuring the differential pressure between two individual spaces at all locations shown on the prints. Each room shall have its own controller capable of stand-alone operation. Each monitor is capable of both visual and audible alarms. Each monitor will use direct pressure measurement utilizing industrial quality differential pressure transducer technology. Implied pressure measurement systems utilizing thermal (hot wire or thermal mass) air velocity measurement are NOT ACCEPTABLE)

B. Provide pressure-to-current transmitters with the following minimum specifications: 1. Color, touch-screen display 2. Resistant to spray washdown (IP-54 rated) 3. Multi-function input signal of 0-10VAC, 0-5VAC or 4-20 mA 4. Standard accuracy RSS of at least +/-0.5% full scale (non-linearity, hysteresis and

non-repeatability) 5. Optional high accuracy RSS of at least +/-0.25% full scale (non-linearity, hysteresis

and non-repeatability) 6. Integral zero and span adjustment 7. Temperature effect on zero/span shift ±0.03 % FS/°F 8. Pressure ranges, selected by engineer shall be up to (-1.0" to +1.0") 9. Temperature Range: 32 to 120 deg. F 10. Programmable visual alarm and adjustable audible alarm 11. Alarm contact output, SPDT, contact rating of 2.0A @ 30VAC/VAC, 0.6A @

125VAC C. Acceptable Products

1. A certified Laboratory air flow vendor Controls model APM200 2. Sensors are required as indicated on the drawings

D. The sensor shall continuously monitor and or control bi-directional room pressurization

using direct pressure sensing referenced to the adjacent space. Wall / ceiling mounted assembly fittings and stainless steel cover plate for the isolation room shall be provided with the controller as a complete unit.

2.17 USER INTERFACE TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAYS

A certified Laboratory air flow vendor VIEW Touch Screen Monitor is to be BACnet MSTP based networked user interface used to display data, edit setpoint variables, create alarms, and unique messages for notification. The following are requirements for the user interface;



A. 7” capacitive touch screenB. Easy to navigate “tile based” displayC. Compatible with A certified Laboratory air flow vendor controls RMI/RMC controllers and

other BACnet/MSTP devicesD. Template based tile setup pagesE. Multiple faceplate color/finish optionsF. Light or Dark user interface themesG. Read and Read/Write accessH. Pin ProtectionI. Resistant to Spray down (IP-54)J. Alarms configurable for tile or point – by – pointK. Up to 48 points that can be displayed (24 at a time)L. Alarm capable as High, Low, Change of State, or MultistateM. Easily upgradable for future implementation to existing installationsN. Android based Operating System

2.18 CONTROL FUNCTIONS

A. General: The airflow control devices shall utilize a peer-to-peer, distributed controlarchitecture to perform room-level control functions. Master/Slave control schemes shallnot be acceptable. Control functions shall at a minimum include, pressurization,temperature, humidity control and respond to occupancy and emergency controlcommands.

B. Pressurization Control:1. The laboratory control system shall control supply and auxiliary exhaust airflow

devices in order to maintain a volumetric offset (either positive or negative). Offsetshall be maintained regardless of any change in flow or static pressure. This offsetshall be field adjustable and represents the volume of air, which will enter (or exit)the room from the corridor or adjacent spaces.

2. The pressurization control algorithm shall sum the flow values of all Supply andExhaust airflow devices and command appropriate controlled devices to new setpoints to maintain the desired offset. The offset shall be adjustable.

C. Up to three (3) non-networked devices providing a linear analog flow signal.D. Any number of Constant Volume devices where the total of supply devices and the total of

exhaust devices may be factored into the pressurization control algorithm.E. Volumetric offset shall be the only acceptable means of controlling room pressurization.

Systems that rely on differential pressure as a means of control shall providedocumentation to demonstrate that space pressurization can be maintained if fume hoodsashes are changed at the same time a door to the space is opened.

F. The Pressurization control algorithm shall support the ability to regulate the distribution oftotal supply flow across multiple supply airflow control devices in order to optimize airdistribution in the space.

G. Temperature Control:1. The laboratory control system shall regulate the space temperature through a

combination of volumetric thermal override and control of reheat coils and/orauxiliary temperature control devices. The laboratory control system shall supportup to four separate temperature zones for each pressurization zone. Each zoneshall have provisions for monitoring up to five (5) temperature inputs andcalculating a straight-line average to be used for control purposes. Separate



cooling and heating set points shall be writable from the BMS, with the option of a local offset adjustment.

2. Temperature control shall be implemented through the use of independent primary cooling and heating control functions, as well as an auxiliary temperature control function, which may be used for either supplemental cooling or heating. Cooling shall be provided as a function of thermal override of conditioned air with both supply and exhaust airflow devices responding simultaneously so as to maintain the desired offset. Heating shall be provided through modulating control of a properly sized reheat coil.

3. The laboratory control system shall also provide the built-in capability for being configured for Hot Deck/Cold Deck temperature control.

4. The auxiliary temperature control function shall offer the option of either heating or cooling mode and to operate as either a stand-alone temperature control loop, or staged to supplement the corresponding primary temperature control loop.

H. Humidity Control: The Laboratory control system shall have an embedded humidity control function, which allows the monitoring and control of the relative humidity level in the pressurized zone. Using peer-to-peer control, the airflow devices shall have the ability to monitor the relative humidity level of the space and, based on a BMS writable set point, develop a control signal to drive one or the other humidification or dehumidification control circuits. The humidity control loop(s) shall share a common set point, with a configurable deadband adjustment to prevent the humidification and dehumidification control functions to operate at the same time.

I. Occupancy Control: At Owner’s option only, the laboratory control system shall have the ability to change the minimum ventilation and/or temperature control set points, based on the occupied state, in order to reduce energy consumption when the space is not occupied. The occupancy state may be set by either the BMS, as a scheduled event, or through the use of a local occupancy sensor or switch. The laboratory control system shall support a local occupancy override button that allows a user to override the occupancy mode and set the space to occupied, for a predetermined interval. The override interval shall be configurable for 1 to 1,440 minutes. The local occupancy sensor/switch, or bypass button shall be given priority over a BMS command.

J. Usage based control® equipment (FUME HOOD ZONE PRESENSE SENSORS) 1. A sash sensor shall be provided to measure the height of each vertically moving

fume hood sash. 2. A sash sensor shall be provided to measure the horizontal sash openings, Systems

that do not have horizontal sash measurement capabilities are NOT ACCEPTABLE.

3. At Owner’s option only (requires EHLS authorization), A certified LACS Vendor Zone Presence Sensor (ZPS) Shall be provided, if required, to determine an operator’s presence in front of a Fume Hood by detecting the presence and/or motion of an operator, and to command the LACS from an in-use operating face velocity (e.g. 100 fpm) to a standby face velocity (e.g.60 fpm) and vice versa. a. The sensor shall define an adjustable detection zone, through software that

SHOWS the actual detection zone, and is adjustable for individual fume hood characteristics. Standard Motion sensors with no ability to set the actual detection zone ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. If the sensor does not detect presence and/or motion of an operator within 30 to 3,000 seconds (adjustable), it shall command the system to a user-adjustable standby face velocity. When the sensor detects the presence and/or motion of an operator within the detection zone, it shall command the system to the Standard face velocity within 1.0 second to avoid loss of containment.



b. The sensor shall sense an inanimate object when placed in the detectionzone and remain in the standard mode of operation for 30 to 3,000seconds, after which it will return to a standby mode. Operators shall enterand leave the zone with the unit adjusting automatically between in-useand standby modes. If an inanimate object is moved or taken out of thezone, the unit will adapt automatically.

c. The sensor shall have an USER adjustable detection zone, seen visually inthe startup software capable of covering a fume hood up to eight feet wideand 6 to 12 feet above the floor surface. Any sensor that does not haveACTUAL VISUAL setup to crop detection zone ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.

d. The sensor shall be configurable for varying levels of lighting intensity andmotion sensitivity.

e. Standard Wide Area Motion sensors ARE NOT ACCEPTABLEf. Motion Sensors that rely solely on Doppler shift radar or similar technology

for motion detection are NOT ACCEPTABLE.g. The sensor shall utilize a combination of Pixel Recognition and IRED

technologies for Low light conditions.

K. Emergency Mode Control1. The laboratory control system shall provide a means of overriding temperature and

pressurization control in response to a command indicating an emergency conditionexists, and airflow control devices are to be driven to a specific flow set point. Thesystem shall support up to four emergency control modes. The emergency controlmodes may be initiated either by a local contact input or BMS command.

2. Once an emergency mode is invoked, pressurization and temperature control areoverridden for the period that the mode is active. Emergency modes shall have apriority scheme allowing a more critical mode to override a previously set condition.

L. Local Alarm Control: The laboratory control system shall provide the means of summingselective alarm activity at the room-level network and generating a local alarm signal. Thelocal alarm signal may be directed to any available output, as well as to the BMS. Thealarm mask may be configured differently for each room-level system.

M. Fume Hood Control: Airflow devices intended to control the face velocity of a fume hood,shall have the ability to interface directly with the Fume Hood Monitoring device. Theairflow control device shall:1. Accept command inputs to regulate the flow accordingly and make this command

value available to the BMS.2. Accept a Sash Position signal and make this value available to the BMS.3. Provide a flow feedback signal to the Fume Hood Monitor, which may be used for

calculating face velocity, or to confirm the airflow device has achieved the properflow rate and make this value available to the BMS.

4. Provide alarm signals to the Fume Hood Monitor in the event the airflow device isunable to achieve the proper flow rate, or there is a loss of static pressureindicating improper fan operation, or that there is a loss of power to the airflowcontrol device, in order to provide a local alarm indication.

5. The fume hood airflow control device shall respond to changes insash position within 1 second, in order to provide a constant 100feet per minute face velocity when the fume hood is in use.

6. The laboratory control system shall be segregated into individualsub nets to isolate network communications to insure room-levelcontrol functions and BMS communications may be carried outreliably. Each laboratory space, or pressurization zone shall be its



own sub net. Laboratory RMI / RMC Niagara Operating System Room controllers shall be used to provide this isolation.

7. The LACS shall support at least 20-networked devices in each pressurized zone.

8. All points shall be available through the interface to the building management system (BMS) for trending, archiving, graphics, alarm notification, and status reports. LACS performance (speed, stability, and accuracy) shall be unaffected by the quantity of points being monitored, processed, or controlled.

9. Refer to the BMS specification for the required input/output summary for the necessary points to be monitored and/or controlled.

NOT ACCEPTABLE

2.19 INTERFACE TO BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. The LACS network shall digitally interfacing with the (BCAS) using a certified Laboratory air flow vendor Controls Macro server or Room manager software interface. The required software interface drivers shall be developed and housed in a Server, which is a dedicated interface device furnished by the LACS supplier or facility provided Server partition that resides on the Facility Wide Intranet.

B. Any or all room-level points shall be available to the BMS for monitoring or trending. The Server / room manager software shall maintain a cache of all points to be monitored by the BMS. The room-level airflow control devices shall update this cache continually.

C. The building-level network shall be a high-speed BACnet over IP (100 mbps) communications protocol. The building-level network shall support up to one hundred (100) sub nets, or pressurization zones, or six thousand (6,000) data points.

D. A commercially available interface card shall be provided with the server or utilize standard Ethernet communication in order to connect to the building-level network.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSORS:

A. General: A certified Laboratory air flow vendor Controls standard room temperature sensors (with LCD readout if required by notes on the plans) and humidity sensors (If required by notes on the plans) shall be provided to provide control inputs to the laboratory control system.

3.2 ROOM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ALARM PANELS::

A. General: A CERTIFIED LABORATORY AIR FLOW VENDOR APM room monitor shall be provided as shown on the drawings to provide individual room pressure differential monitoring and alarms. Room alarm panels shall also be connected to alarm when a system failure condition which affects the room is detected by the laboratory control system.

3.3 CONTROL WIRING:

A. General: All wiring required for a complete and operational laboratory control system shall be provided by under this Section.

B. All line voltage control wiring and all low voltage control wiring and the main data communications loop shall be installed in conduit.



C. Minimum requirements for control wiring shall be as follows:1. Control wiring for digital functions shall be No. 18 AWG copper minimum, with 600

volt insulation. Multi-conductor wire shall have an outer jacket of polyvinyl chloride(PVC) or UL listed plenum rated jacket.

2. Control wiring for analog functions shall be No. 18 AWG copper minimum, with 600volt insulation, twisted and shielded, 2-, 3- or 4-wire to match analog functionhardware. Multi-conductor wire shall have an outer jacket of PVC or UL listedplenum rated jacket.

3. Sensor wiring shall be No. 18 AWG copper minimum, twisted and shielded, 2-, 3-or 4-wire to match analog function hardware. Multi-conductor wire shall have anouter jacket of PVC or UL listed plenum rated jacket.

4. Class 2 low energy conductor sizes specified for digital and analog functions shalltake precedence over any requirements for Class2 low energy remote control andsignal circuit conductors specified elsewhere, unless a larger conductor size isrequired by the NEC.

5. Line and low voltage control wiring shall not be installed in the same conduit andcontrol wiring shall not be installed in the same conduit with power wiring.

6. All conduit in shall be run in a neat manner and shall be perpendicular and parallelto building lines. Coordinate conduit routing with field conditions so as not tointerfere with code clearances, maintenance access and walkways.

7. Permanently mark terminal blocks for identification. Protect all circuits to avoidinterruption of service due to short-circuiting or other conditions. Line-protect allwiring that comes from external sources to the site from lightning and staticelectricity.

8. Label or code each field wire at each end. Permanently label or code each point ofall field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Color-coded cablewith cable diagrams may be used to accomplish cable identification.

9. Refer to applicable Division 26 Sections for additional requirements for conduit andwiring materials and installation. All conduit and wiring shall be installed inaccordance with all requirements of applicable codes.

3.4 INSTALLATION:

A. The laboratory controls contractor-BAC controls (LACS) shall install the sash sensors,interface boxes, presence and motion sensor, and fume hood monitor on the fume hood.Reel-type sash sensors and their stainless steel cables shall be hidden from view. Bar-typesash sensors shall be affixed to the individual sash panels. Sash interface boxes withinterface cards shall be mounted in an accessible location.

B. The LACS shall install all room controllers in an accessible location in or around thedesignated laboratory room.

C. The LACS shall install an appropriately sized and fused 24 Vac transformer suitable forNEC Class II wiring.

D. All cable shall be furnished and installed by the LACS Vendor. The LACS Vendor shallterminate and connect all cables as required.

E. The mechanical contractor shall install all airflow control devices in the ductwork and shallconnect all airflow control valve linkages.

F. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install all reheat coils and all requiredtransitions.

G. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install insulation as required.



H. Each pressurization zone shall have either a dedicated, single-phase primary circuit or a secondary circuit disconnect.

I. All 120VAC and power requirements are to be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.

3.5 INSTALLATION PRACTICES:

A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, roughing-in drawings and details on the Drawings. All components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as shown or specified.

B. Terminal Unit Locations: Locate each unit accurately in the position indicated in relation to other work. Position unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, including clearance for cabinet removal.

C. Terminal Unit Supports: Minimum support requirements for terminal units shall be as follows. Terminal units weighing less than 150 pounds shall be supported by four 16 gauge, one inch (1") wide sheet metal straps with ends turned under bottom of unit at corners and secured by two maximum 3/4" long by 1/4" diameter sheet metal screw per strap. The other strap end shall be attached to the structure by 1/4" diameter threaded bolt into the concrete insert or into drilled-hole threaded concrete expansion anchor. Boxes over 150 pounds in weight shall be supported the same as described above except 1/4" diameter sheet metal screws shall be located with one screw on the side of the unit and one screw on the bottom of the unit. Seal all screw penetrations into the terminal unit air stream.

D. Terminal Unit Leveling: Level terminal units to the tolerances recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Electrical Wiring: Power (120 V, 60 Hz) will be provided at the control panel locations shown on the drawings. Electrical distribution from those locations shall be the responsibility of this equipment supplier/installer.

F. Raceways: All line and low voltage power and control wiring shall be installed in a raceway or conduit.

G. Mechanical Work: The installation contractor for the overall lab air distribution systems will receive and install the air flow control equipment (general exhaust air valves, dual duct terminal units and hood exhaust valves). All control installation, calibration, equipment installation review and related electrical system installation shall be by this equipment supplier/installer.

H. Installation: All automation materials shall be applied and installed per the manufacturers' recommendations.

I. Pressure Sensors/Transducers: Pressure sensors/transducers (all types) installed in this system shall be installed by this equipment contractor. All pressure sensors shall have taps for calibration. Pressure sensors/transducers shall be verified by calibration. This equipment contractor shall calibrate differential pressure sensors/ transducers. All devices shall be as submitted for and approved during final tests by TAB Contractor.

J. Hood Sash Position Sensors: Sensor type and mounting by this equipment supplier, on existing hoods, shall be properly suited for those existing hood applications to provide reliable operation.

K. Electrical Wiring: Refer to the applicable Section of Division 26 for electrical wiring incidental to the temperature control system regardless of where shown on the Drawings.



L. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of thelaboratory control system, as herein specified, shall be provided by the Laboratory ControlSystem Contractor (LACS) unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings underDivision 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions ofDivision 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in thissection.

M. All laboratory control system wiring materials and installation methods shall comply withBCAS manufacturer recommendations.

N. Provide firestopping for all penetrations used by dedicated laboratory control systemconduits and raceways. All other project firestopping to be by other trade.

O. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls, shall be in conduit or enclosedraceway.

3.6 SYSTEM START-UP AND COMMISSIONING:

A. General: System start-up shall be provided by a LOCAL factory-authorized representativeof the LACS vendor. Start-up shall include calibrating the fume hood monitor and anycombination sash sensing equipment as required. Start-up shall also provide electronicverification of airflow (fume hood exhaust, supply, make-up, general exhaust, or return),system programming and integration to BMS (when applicable). Reliance upon FACTORYStartup is NOT ACCEPTABLE

B. Adjustment: After completion of the installation, adjust control valves and similar equipmentprovided as work of this Section. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trainedpersonnel in the direct employ of the manufacturer of the primary temperature controlsystem.

C. Fully commission all aspects of the Laboratory Control System work.

D. The TAB Consultant shall be responsible for final verification and reporting of all airflows.

E. Acceptance Check Sheet:

3.7 SYSTEMTRAINING:

A. The LACS Vendor shall furnish a minimum of eight hours of owner training by factorytrained and certified personnel. The training will provide an overview of the job specificairflow control components, verification of initial fume hood monitor calibration, generalprocedures for verifying airflows of air valves, and general troubleshooting procedures.

B. Refer to Section 23 0100 for additional training requirements.

C. Operation and Maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and componentlists shall be provided for each training attendee. Refer to Section 23 0100 for additionalrequirements.

END OF SECTION 25 0910


AE Project Number: BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, 25 11 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 11 00 – BAS BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications, ElectronicSafety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, andthis Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may be reciprocallyapplicable to this Section. Building automation system requirements may be specified, but notlimited to, the following Sections when applicable:

1. Packaged engine generator system.

2. Fuel oil piping system.

3. Hot water boilers.

4. Computer room air conditioning units.

5. Automatic transfer switch.

6. Utility Metering (public utility and smart meters

7. Variable Speed Drives

8. Occupancy, Lighting Controls

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Wiring.

B. Control Valves and Actuators.

C. Control Dampers and Actuators.

D. Control Panels.

E. Sensors.

F. Electric Control Components (Switches, EP Valves, Thermostats, Relays, etc.).

G. Transducers.

H. Current Switches.

I. Nameplates.

J. Testing Equipment.



K. Refer to Section 25 00 00 for general requirements.

L. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems; not Work of this Section.

M. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements of Division 26 Sections.

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.

2. Interlock wiring between electrically interlocked devices, sensors, and between a hand or auto position of motor starters as indicated for all mechanical and controls.

3. Wiring associated with annunciator and alarm panels (remote alarm panels) and connections to their associated field devices.

4. All other necessary wiring for fully complete and functional control system as specified.





1.04 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Control Valves furnished under this Section shall be installed under the applicable piping Section under the direction of the BAS Provider who will be fully responsible for the proper operation of the valve.

B. Control Dampers furnished under this Section shall be installed under the applicable air distribution or air handling equipment Section under the direction of the BAS Provider who will be fully responsible for the proper operation of the damper.

C. Water Pressure Taps, Thermal Wells, Flow Switches, Flow Meters, etc. that will have wet surfaces, shall be installed under the applicable piping Section under the direction of the BAS Provider who will be fully responsible for the proper installation and application.

D. Controlled Equipment Power Wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 26. Where control involves 120 volt (V) control devices controlling 120V equipment, Division 26 Contractor shall extend power wiring to the equipment. BAS Provider shall extend it from the equipment to the control device.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and localrequirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Provide electronic, pneumatic, and electric control products in sizes and capacities indicated,consisting of valves, dampers, controllers, sensors, and other components as required forcomplete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materialsand components as published in their product information; designed and constructed asrecommended by manufacturer, and as required for application indicated.


[EDIT THE FOLLOWING TO SUIT THE PROJECT. ENGINEER SHALL ASSESS THE COST EFFECTIVENESS OF PNEUMATICALLY DRIVEN ACTUATORS. ENGINEER SHALL ALSO ASSESS THE CONDITION, RELIABILITY, AND CAPACITY OF EXISTING CONTROL AIR SUPPLIES WHERE APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT. ]

A. Control Air Supply: Contractor may reuse existing control air in buildings where pneumaticcontrols will be replaced. Contractor shall install air dryers and air filters so that all controllersand new pneumatic devices receive a clean and dry air supply.

1. The control air filters shall remove oil and solid particles from the compressed air.Provide a prefilter and a final filter.

2. The prefilter shall be rated for 100 percent removal of all solids 1 micron and larger, 100percent removal of liquid water, and 70 percent removal of oil aerosols with 2000 ppmmaximum inlet liquid loading.

3. The final filter shall be rated for 100 percent removal of liquid water and solids larger than0.03 micron; 99.999 percent removal of oil aerosols with 100 ppm maximum inlet liquidloading.

4. Filters shall include replaceable filter element, differential pressure gauge, and automaticliquid drain trap. Filters shall be selected for a maximum pressure drop of 2 psig atcompressor capacity. Filter bodies shall be rated for 225 psig or greater operatingpressure. Transparent acrylic tube housings shall be protected by a perforated steelsafety shield.

5. Filters shall be Hankison, DelTech, Wilkerson, or Arrow Pneumatics. Substitutions shallbe allowed per Division 01. Furnish one (1) spare filter element per filter. [THE

FOLLOWING IS A COSTLY REQUIREMENT THAT WILL SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE INSTALLATION COST. ENGINEER SHALL USE CAUTION IN SPECIFYING THIS REQUIREMENT AND SHALL CONSULT WITH OWNER PRIOR TO SPECIFYING THIS REQUIREMENT.]

6. Provide a PRV, oil filter and air filter combination assembly at each end use pneumaticdevice so that all pneumatic devices receive a clean and dry air supply.

a. The control air filters shall remove oil and solid particles from the compressed air.



b. Particulate filters shall be rated for 100 percent removal of all solids 5 micron and larger, 100 percent removal of liquid water, and removal of oil aerosols 0.01 microns and larger. Filters shall include replaceable filter element and automatic piston drain.

c. Filters shall be selected for a maximum pressure drop of 5 psig at device capacity. Filter bodies shall be rated for 150 psig or greater operating pressure. Provide ¼-inch ports. Provide relief valve set at 30 psig.

d. Filter/PRV’s selection based on Wilkerson, Model Combination C08. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 01.

[EDIT THE FOLLOWING TO SUIT THE PROJECT. ENGINEER SHALL CONSULT WITH OWNER PRIOR TO SPECIFYING THE DRYERS. ]

7. For systems where no pneumatic tubing is subject to temperatures below 40 degrees F and without refrigerated dryers, provide an air-cooled refrigerated dryer with flow capacity at 100 degrees F, 100 psig saturated entering air, and 40 degrees F leaving dewpoint equal to or exceeding air compressor capacity.

a. Refrigerated dryer shall be a single package unit with all necessary piping, refrigerant, controls, wiring and accessories.

b. Dryer shall include refrigeration system, on/off switch, inlet air pressure gauge, and water separator with automatic drain. Refrigerant shall be R-134a. System shall be labeled by CSA or UL.

c. Manufacturer shall be Hankison, Wilkerson, DelTech, Ingersol-Rand Tide/Aire, McKee or Arrow Pneumatics.

8. For systems with outdoor pneumatic components or components otherwise exposed to ambient conditions, provide a desiccant-type heatless self-regenerative air dryer for piping providing air supply to these components.

a. Dryer capacity shall exceed connected load, plus a 30 percent allowance for expansion with inlet conditions of 100 degrees F, saturated air at 100 psig, and outlet conditions of minus 40 degrees F dewpoint.

b. Dryer maximum air pressure drop at rated flow shall not exceed 5 psig. Required air flow for regeneration shall not exceed 20 percent of dryer output capacity.

c. Dryer shall include two desiccant towers, piping, changeover valves, exhaust silencers, controls and wiring.

d. Desiccant towers shall be designed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, and shall be ASME stamped for 125 psig working pressure, and fitted with suitable relief valves if tower physical size places tower within the scope of the Code where stamp is required.

e. Desiccant dryers shall be as manufactured by Hankison, Deltech, Arrow Pneumatics, Ingersol-Rand or Zurn.

9. Main Air Piping (between the compressors and the field control panels): Hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B 88, Type L.



10. Branch Air Piping (to include main air between field control panels and field devices:Seamless copper tubing, Type K or L, ASTM B 88; with cast-bronze solder joint fittings,ANSI B1.18; or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings, ANSI B16.22; except brasscompression-type fittings at connections to equipment. Solder shall be 95/5 tin antimony,or other suitable lead free composition solder.

11. Branch Air Piping Termination And Tubing Within Control Panels: Virgin polyethylenenon-metallic tubing type FR, ASTM D 2737. Use compression or push-on brass fittings.

B. Instrument Pipe and Tube:

1. Hydronic and Instruments:

a. Connection To Main Piping: Provide ½ inch minimum size threadolet, ½ inch x 2inch brass nipple, and ½ inch ball valve for connection to welded steel piping.Provide tee fitting for other types of piping.

b. Remote Instruments: Adapt from ball valve to specified tubing and extend toremote instruments. Provide a union or otherwise removable fitting at ball valve sothat connection to main can be cleaned with straight rod. Where manifolds withtest ports are not provided for instrument, provide tees with ¼ inch FPT branchwith plug for use as test port. Adapt from tubing size to instrument connection.

c. Line Mounted Instruments: Extend rigid piping from ball valve to instrument. Donot use close or running thread nipples. Adapt from ball valve outlet to instrumentconnection size. Provide a plugged tee if pipe makes 90 degree bend at outlet ofvalve to allow cleaning of connection to main with straight rod without removinginstrument.

d. Instrument Tubing: Seamless copper tubing, Type K or L, ASTM B 88; with cast-bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI B1.18; or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings,ANSI B16.22; or brass compression-type fittings. Solder shall be 95/5 tinantimony, or other suitable lead free composition solder. Tubing outside diametersize shall be not less than the larger of ¼ inch or the instrument connection size.

e. Rigid Piping for Line Mounted Instruments: Schedule 40 threaded brass, withthreaded brass fittings.

2. Low Pressure Air Instrument Sensing Lines

a. Connections: Use suitable bulkhead type fitting and static sensing tip for staticpressure connections. Adapt tubing to instrument connection.

b. Tubing: Virgin polyethylene non-metallic tubing type FR, ASTM D 2737, withflame-retardant harness for multiple tubing. Use compression or push-on brassfittings.

C. Secondary LAN Communication Wiring and BAS low voltage wiring/cables: All wiring shall bein accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26.Wiring/cables shall be provided in a customized color jacketing material. Color coding shall begreen or orange. Material and labeling hall be as specified in section 27 05 53(IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS). http://www.uh.edu/facilities-planning-construction/vendor-resources/owners-design-criteria/master-specs/jan-2017/division27Jan2017updated.pdf#page=35

http://www.uh.edu/facilities-planning-construction/vendor-resources/owners-design-criteria/master-specs/jan-2017/division27Jan2017updated.pdf#page=35





1. Contractor shall supply all communication wiring between Building Controllers, Routers, Gateways, AAC’s, ASC’s and local and remote peripherals outside the UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON IT infrastructure. (e.g., operator workstations, printers, and modems).

2. Local Supervisory LAN: For any portions of this network required under this Section of the Specification, Contractor shall comply with Division 27 Communication specifications. Network shall be run with no splices and separate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts.

3. Secondary Controller LANs: Communication wiring shall be individually 100 percent shielded pairs per manufacturer’s recommendations for distances installed, with overall PVC cover, Class 2, plenum-rated run with no splices and separate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts. Shield shall be terminated and wiring shall be grounded as recommended by building controller manufacturer.

a. Wet / Damp Locations – Wiring in underground raceways or raceways which are subject to moderate degrees of moisture shall be listed for installation in wet locations. Direct burial wiring without a raceway is prohibited.

4. BAS low voltage wiring/cables: All cables shall have legible printed sleeve identification labels at each device and the panel termination.

a. Labels shall be Brady PermaSleeve TM, part number - "BPSPT-187-175-WT” or owner approved equivalent.

b. Each label shall be identified with the entire BAS point name utilized in the BAS database and the point address.

D. Signal Wiring: Contractor shall run all signal wiring in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26.

1. Signal wiring to all field devices, including, but not limited to, all sensors, transducers, transmitters, switches, etc. shall be twisted, 100 percent shielded pair, minimum 18-gage wire, with PVC cover. Signal wiring shall be run with no splices and separate from any wiring above thirty (30) volts.


2. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at controller end only unless otherwise recommended by the controller manufacturer.

E. Low Voltage Analog Output Wiring: Contractor shall run all low voltage control wiring in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26.

1. Low voltage control wiring shall be minimum 18-gage, twisted pair, 100 percent shielded, with PVC cover, Class 2 plenum-rated. Low voltage control wiring shall be run with no splices and shall be separated from any wiring above thirty (30) volts.




F. Control Panels: Provide control panels with suitable brackets for wall mounting, unless notedotherwise, for each control system. Locate panel adjacent to systems served. Mount center ofcontrol panels [60 inches – confirm with Owner] above finished floor or roof [ Refer to Figures Aand B at end of section].

1. Interior: Fabricate panels of 16-gage furniture-grade steel, totally enclosed on four sides,with removable perforated backplane, hinged door and keyed lock, with manufacturer'sstandard shop-painted finish and color. Panel / enclosure shall be sized to provideadequate mounting space for all components plus a minimum of 25% spare backplanecapacity. All components shall have a minimum of 2 inch clearance from the four sides ofthe panel unless factory wired and designed otherwise. No flush-mounted panels.

2. Exterior: 16-gage 304 or 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosure. Panel shall havehinged door, keyed lock, and integral, thermostatically controlled heater. Provide hingeddeadfront inside panel when flush-mounted control and/or indicating devices are includedin panel. Fiberglass or aluminum, as applicable, to be used when gases that are beingused in the panel area are corrosive to stainless steel.

3. Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices.

4. Control panel shall be completely factory wired and piped, and all electrical connectionsmade to a terminal strip. Wire nuts are not acceptable in exposed area of panel. High andlow voltage cables shall be isolated from each other.

5. All gauges and control components shall be identified by means of nameplates or Ownerapproved equivalent.

6. All control tubing and wiring shall be run neatly and orderly in open slot wiring duct withcover. (Electrical wireway shall be located underneath panel to run wire, allowing wiringto enter from below.)

7. Provide a 6 inch x 6 inch minimum wireway (metal wiring/tubing) trough across the entirewidth of the panel mounted to the bottom of the panel with close nipples of sufficient sizefor additional 50 percent wiring and tubing capacity. Wireways shall not be less than 24inches in length. Control panel wiring shall be installed and distributed in the wireway tominimize routing of wiring and tubing within the control panel. Wireway construction tobe the same as the associated control panel.

8. Complete wiring and tubing termination drawings shall be mounted in, and a second setmounted adjacent to, each panel in a frame with Lexan cover of sufficient size to beeasily readable.

2.03 STANDARD SERVICE CONTROL VALVES

A. Control valve sizing and selection is the initial responsibility of the Engineer and not left to theBAS Provider. Engineer shall provide a valve schedule that lists the requirements of the valvesfor Cv (flow on the coils), close off, temperature etc. This shall be a result of analyzing thevalves performance across the range of control. Engineer shall consult with Owner prior tospecifying control valves.

B. General:

1. Provide factory fabricated control valves of type, body material and pressure classindicated.



2. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined by manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximum pressure and temperature in piping system.

3. Provide valve size in accordance with scheduled or specified maximum pressure drop across control valve.

4. Control valves shall be equipped with heavy-duty actuators, and with proper close-off rating for each individual application.

5. Minimum close-off rating shall be as scheduled and adequate for each application, and shall generally be considered at dead head rating of the pump.

[THE FOLLOWING VALVES ARE FOR USE IN A STANDARD INSTALLATION.]

C. Plug-Type Globe Pattern for Water Service:

1. Valve Sizing: Where not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents, modulating valves shall be sized for maximum full flow pressure drop between 50 percent and 100 percent of the branch circuit it is controlling unless scheduled otherwise. Two-position valves shall be same size as connecting piping.

[EDIT/DELETE THE FOLLOWING TO SUIT THE SYSTEMS APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT.]

2. Single Seated (Two-way) Valves: Valves shall have equal-percentage characteristic for typical heat exchanger service and linear characteristic for building loop connections to campus systems unless otherwise scheduled on the drawings. Valves shall have cage-type trim, providing seating and guiding surfaces for plug on ‘top-and-bottom’ guided plugs.

3. Double Seated (Three-way) Valves: Valves shall have linear characteristic. Valves shall be balanced-plug type, with cage-type trim providing seating and guiding surfaces on ‘top-and-bottom’ guided plugs.

4. Temperature Rating: 25 degrees F minimum, 250 degrees F maximum.

5. Body: Bronze, screwed, 250 psi maximum working pressure for ½ inch to 2 inch; Cast iron, flanged, 125 psi maximum working pressure for 2-1/2 inches and larger.

6. Valve Trim: Bronze; Stem: Polished stainless steel.

7. Packing: Spring Loaded Teflon or Synthetic Elastomer U-cups, self-adjusting.

8. Plug: Brass, bronze or stainless steel, Seat: Brass.

9. Disc: Replaceable composition or stainless steel filled PTFE.

10. Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -10 to 150 degrees F (-12.2 to 66 degrees C).

11. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers are as follows:

a. Blimo

b. Honeywell

D. Plug-Type Globe Pattern for Steam Service:



1. Valve Sizing: Where valve size is not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents,size modulating valves for applications of 15 psig or less for 80 percent of inlet gaugepressure unless scheduled otherwise. Modulating valves for applications of greater than15 psig shall be sized for 42 percent of inlet absolute pressure unless scheduledotherwise. Two-position valves shall be same size as connecting piping.

2. Characteristics: Modified equal-percentage characteristics. Cage-type trim, providingseating and guiding surfaces for plug on "top and bottom" guided plugs.

a. Working Temperature: 250 degrees F minimum for saturated steam applications of15 psig or less; 366 degrees F minimum for saturated steam applications ofgreater than 15 psig up to 150 psig.

3. Body: Bronze, screwed, 250 psig steam working pressure for ½ inch to 2 inch; Cast iron,flanged, 100 psig steam working pressure for 2-1/2 inches and larger for applications of50 psig or less.

4. Valve Trim, Plug, Seat and Stem: Polished stainless steel.

5. Packing: Spring Loaded Teflon.

6. Disc: Replaceable composition or stainless steel filled PTFE.

7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, approvedmanufacturers are as follows:

a. Belimo

b. Honeywell

E. Butterfly Type: To be used for two-position control only, unless prior approval is obtained fromOwner.

1. Body: Extended neck epoxy coated cast or ductile iron with full lug pattern, ANSI Class125 or 250 bolt pattern to match specified flanges.

2. Seat: EPDM, except in loop bypass applications where seat shall be metal to metal.

3. Disc: Bronze or stainless steel, pinned or mechanically locked to shaft.

4. Bearings: Bronze or stainless steel.

5. Shaft: 416 stainless steel.

6. Cold Service Pressure: 175 psi.

7. Close Off: Bubble-tight shutoff to 150 psi.

8. Operation: Valve and actuator operation shall be smooth both seating and unseating.Should more that 2 psi deadband be required to seat/unseat the valve, valve shall bereplaced at no cost to the Owner.

9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, approvedmanufacturers are as follows:

a. Keystone.



b. Jamesbury WS815.

c. Bray Series 31.

d. Dezurik BGS.

F. Ball Type:

1. Body: Brass or bronze; one-, two-, or three-piece design; threaded ends.

2. Seat: Reinforced Teflon.

3. Ball: Stainless steel.

4. Port: Standard or ‘V’ style.

5. Stem: Stainless steel, blow-out proof design, extended to match thickness of insulation.

6. Cold Service Pressure: 600 psi WOG.

7. Steam working Pressure: 150 psi.


a. Honeywell

b. Belimo

c. Spiraxsarco

d. Jordan

e. Apollo.

G. Segmented or Characterized Ball Type:

1. Body: Carbon steel (ASTM 216), one-piece design with wafer style ends.

2. Seat: Reinforced Teflon (PTFE).

3. Ball: Stainless steel ASTM A351.

4. Port: Segmented design with equal-percentage characteristic.

5. Stem: Stainless steel.

6. Cold Service Pressure: 200 psi WOG.

7. Cavitation Trim: Provide cavitation trim where indicated and/or required, designed to eliminate cavitation and noise while maintaining an equal percentage characteristic. Trim shall be a series of plates with orifices to break the pressure drop into multi-stages.


a. Jamesbury R-Series.



b. Fisher.

c. Belimo.

2.04 CRITICAL SERVICE CONTROL VALVES

A. Control valve sizing and selection is the initial responsibility of the Engineer and not left to theBAS Provider. Engineer shall provide a valve schedule that lists the requirements of the valvesfor Cv, close off, temperature etc. This should be a result of analyzing the valves performanceacross the range of control. Engineer shall consult with Owner prior to specifying controlvalves. Refer to the ‘Control Valve Specification Sheet’ located at the end of this Section.Owner shall complete the required fields designated on the Valve Sheet as noted and required.

B. General:

1. Provide factory fabricated control valves of type, body material and pressure classindicated on the ‘Control Valve Specification Sheet’ located at the end of this Section.Contractor shall utilize the sheet to submit the control valves for the Project.

2. Valves shall be as manufactured by Fisher Controls International, Valtek ControlProducts, DeZurik/Copes-Vulcan, Keystone, Leslie Controls Inc., or equal.

3. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined bymanufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximumpressure and temperature in piping system.

4. Provide valve size in accordance with scheduled or specified maximum pressure dropacross control valve.

5. Control valves shall be equipped with heavy-duty actuators and pilot positioners withproper close-off rating and capability for each individual application.

6. Minimum close-off rating shall be as scheduled and adequate for each application, andshall generally be considered at dead head rating of the pump.

2.05 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. General: Provide factory fabricated automatic control dampers of sizes, velocity and pressureclasses as required for smooth, stable, and controllable airflow. Provide parallel or opposedblade dampers as recommended by manufacturer’s sizing techniques. For dampers locatednear fan outlets, provide dampers rated for fan outlet velocity and close-off pressure, andrecommended by damper manufacturer for fan discharge damper service. Control dampersused for smoke dampers shall comply with UL 555S. Control Dampers used for fire dampersshall comply with UL 555.

B. For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities notgreater than 1500 fpm (7.62 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 2.5 inches w.c. (622Pa):

1. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.



2. Frames: Galvanized steel, 16-gage minimum thickness, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement.

3. Blades: Stainless steel in lab exhausts and galvanized steel elsewhere, maximum blade size 8 inches (200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) shafts with set screws, 16 gage minimum thickness.

4. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomer, mechanically attached, field replaceable.

5. Jamb Seals: Stainless steel.

6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze, graphite impregnated nylon sleeve or other molded synthetic sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings.

7. Linkage: Concealed in frame.

8. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or graphite impregnated nylon.

9. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 1500 fpm (7.62 m/s) and 1 inches wg. (249Pa).

10. Maximum Pressure Differential: 2.5 inches wg. (622 Pa).

11. Temperature Limits: -40 to 200 degrees F (-40 to 93 degrees C).

12. Where opening size is larger than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide or 72 inches (1829 mm) high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with intermediate frames and jackshafts appropriate for installation.

C. For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities not greater than 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 6 inches w.c. (1493 Pa):



3. Blades: Extruded aluminum hollow airfoil shape, maximum blade size 8 inches (200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) shafts, 14 gage minimum extrusion thickness.

4. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric, mechanically attached, field replaceable.


6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze sleeve, graphite impregnated nylon sleeve, molded synthetic sleeve, or stainless steel sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings.



9. Leakage: Less than 0.1 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 fpm. (20.3 m/s) and 1 inches wg. (249Pa).

10. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg. (622 Pa).




12. Where opening size is larger than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide or 72 inches (1829 mm)high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with intermediate frames and jackshaftsappropriate for the installation.

D. For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities notgreater than 4000 fpm, differential pressure not greater than 12 inches w.c.:


2. Frames: Galvanized steel, 12-gage minimum thickness, welded or riveted with cornerreinforcement.

3. Blades: Extruded aluminum hollow airfoil shape, maximum blade size 8 inches (200 mm)wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) shafts with setscrews.

4. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or stainless steel, pressed into frame,with thrust washers at bearings.

5. Linkage: 10-gage minimum thickness galvanized steel clevis type crank arms, 3/16 inchx ¾ inch (4.76 mm x 19 mm) minimum thickness tie rods.


7. Leakage: Less than 0.2 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s) and1 inches wg. (249Pa) differential pressure.




E. For general isolation and modulating control service in round ducts up to 40 inches in size atvelocities not greater than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 4 inchesw.c. (994 Pa):


2. Frames: Rolled 12 gage steel strip for sizes 6 inch and smaller, rolled 14 gage steelchannel for larger sizes, galvanized or aluminum finish.

3. Blades: Steel construction, 12 gage minimum thickness for dampers less than 18 inches(457 mm) in size, 10 gage minimum thickness for larger dampers.

4. Blade Seals: Full circumference neoprene.

5. Shaft: ½ inch (12.7 mm) diameter zinc or cadmium plated steel.




7. Leakage: Less than 0.2 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s) and 1 inches wg. (249Pa) differential pressure.



F. For general isolation and modulating control service in round ducts up to 60 inches in size at velocities not greater than 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 6 inches w.c. (1492 Pa):


2. Frames: Rolled 10-gage steel channel for sizes 48 inch and smaller, rolled 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) thick steel channel for larger sizes, galvanized or aluminum finish.

3. Blades: Steel construction, 10-gage minimum thickness for dampers not greater than 48 inches in size, ¼ inch (6.35 mm) minimum thickness for larger dampers.

4. Blade stops: ½ inch x ¼ inch (12.7 mm x 6.35 mm) full circumference steel bar.


6. Shaft: Zinc or cadmium plated steel, angle reinforcing as necessary.

7. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or stainless steel, pressed into frame, with thrust washers at bearings.




2.06 ACTUATORS

A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified. Select spring-return actuators with manual override to provide positive shut-off of devices as they are applied.

B. Actuators:


2. Two Position Electric Actuators: Line voltage (120 volt, 24 volt) with spring return. Provide end switches as required.

3. Pneumatic Actuators: Provide heavy-duty actuators with stroke indication and spring return. Actuator shall consist of steel or aluminum cylinder and pistons. Housing shall be protected both internally and externally with corrosion resistant coating. Provide position feedback positive positioners with adjustable start point and operating range. Positive positioners shall be provided on all pneumatic valves larger than 1 inch.



4. Electronic Actuators: Provide actuators with spring return for two-position (24v), 0-5 Vdc,0-10 Vdc, 2-10Vdc, 4-20 mA, as required. Actuators shall travel full stroke in less than90 seconds. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at fulltorque and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have positivepositioning circuit. [Parallel actuators on a single valve are not allowed.] or [Where twoactuators are required in parallel or in sequence provide an auxiliary actuator driver.]Actuators shall have current limiting motor protection. Actuators shall have manualoverride where indicated. Modulating actuators for valves shall have minimumrangeability of 40 to 1. High speed Belimo actuator is required for exhaust, supply, andmakeup fans.

a. Close-Off Pressure: Provide the minimum torque required, and spring return for failpositioning (unless otherwise specifically indicated) sized for required close-offpressure. Required close-off pressure for two-way water valve applications shallbe the shutoff head of associated pump. Required close-off rating of steam valveapplications shall be design inlet steam pressure plus 50 percent for low pressuresteam, and plus 10 percent for high pressure steam. Required close-off rating ofair damper applications shall be shutoff pressure of associated fan, plus 10percent.

b. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers are as follows:

1) Siemens.

2) Belimo.

3) Honeywell (with approval by BAS)

C. Quarter-Turn Actuators (for Ball Valves):

1. Electric:

a. Motor: Suitable for 120 or 240 volt single-phase power supply. Insulation shall beNEMA Class F or better. Motor shall be rated for 100 percent duty cycle. Motorsshall have inherent overload protection.

b. Gear Train: Motor output shall be directed to a self-locking gear drive mechanism.Gears shall be rated for torque input exceeding motor locked rotor torque.

c. Wiring: Power and control wiring shall be wired to a terminal strip in the actuatorenclosure

d. Failsafe Positioning: Actuators shall be spring return type for failsafe positioning.In steam applications, actuator shall fail in the fail-close position.

e. Enclosure: Actuator enclosure shall be a NEMA 4 epoxy coated metal enclosure,and shall have a minimum of two threaded conduit entries.

f. Limit Switches: Travel limit switches shall be UL approved. Switches shall limitactuator in both open and closed positions.

g. Mechanical Travel Stops: The actuator shall include mechanical travel stops ofstainless steel construction to limit actuator to specific degrees of rotation.



h. Manual Override: Actuators shall have manual actuator override to allow operation of the valve when power is off. For valves 4 inches and smaller the override may be a removable wrench or lever or geared handwheel type. For larger valves, the override shall be a fixed geared handwheel type. An automatic power cut-off switch shall be provided to disconnect power from the motor when the handwheel is engaged for manual operation.

i. Valve Position Indicator: A valve position indicator with arrow and open and closed position marks shall be provided to indicate valve position.

j. Torque Limit Switches: Provide torque limit switches to interrupt motor power when torque limit is exceeded in either direction of rotation.

k. Position Controller: For valves used for modulating control, provide an electronic positioner capable of accepting 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, and 135 Ohm potentiometer.

l. Ambient Conditions: Actuator shall be designed for operation from –140 to 150 degrees F ambient with 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.

2. Pneumatic Single- and Double-Acting Cylinder Type:

a. Air Cylinder: Shall consist of steel or aluminum cylinder, dual pistons, double rack and pinion gearing mechanism. Housing shall be protected both internally and externally with corrosion resistant coating. Actuator shall be equipped with piston guide rods or similar mechanism so that seals are not loaded as linear bearings. Single acting units shall have multiple symmetrically arranged springs to apply equal force to piston. Cylinder shall be configurable for direction of fail-safe mode in the field. Actuators shall be spring return type for failsafe positioning.

b. Position Indication: Provide extended shaft position indicator that is removable for manual override of valve.

c. Two-Position Actuators: Provide appropriate three-way or four-way solenoid valve mounted on the actuator. Solenoid valve electrical enclosure shall meet NEMA 4 requirements. Provide actuator with position switches where required.

d. Modulating Actuators: Provide a rotary electronic positioner designed to accept 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, or 135 Ohm potentiometer and operate integral 3-way or 4-way solenoid valve to position valve rotation angle as sensed by integral position feedback device to match signal input. Enclosure shall meet NEMA-4 requirements. Actuator linearity and resolution shall be 0.5 percent of span. Hysteresis and deadband shall be adjustable. Provide accessory mechanical or proximity type position switches and position transmitters where required. Actuators shall be spring return type for failsafe positioning. Provide an enclosure heater for positioners located outside of buildings. [Engineer to coordinate power and electrical wiring for heater.]

2.07 GENERAL FIELD DEVICES

A. Provide field devices for input and output of digital (binary) and analog signals into controllers (BCs, AACs, ASCs). Provide signal conditioning for all field devices as recommended by field device manufacturers and as required for proper operation in the system.



B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that all field devices are compatible withcontroller hardware and software.

C. Field devices specified herein are generally ‘two-wire’ type transmitters, with power for thedevice to be supplied from the respective controller. If the controller provided is not equipped toprovide this power, is not designed to work with ‘two-wire’ type transmitters, if field device is toserve as input to more than one controller, or where the length of wire to the controller willunacceptably affect the accuracy, the Contractor shall provide ‘four-wire’ type equal transmitterand necessary regulated DC power supply or 120 VAC power supply, as required.

D. For field devices specified hereinafter that require signal conditioners, signal boosters, signalrepeaters, or other devices for proper interface to controllers, Contractor shall furnish and installproper device, including 120V power as required. Such devices shall have accuracy andrepeatability equal to, or better than, the accuracy and repeatability listed for respective fielddevices.

E. Accuracy: As stated in this Section, accuracy shall include combined effects of nonlinearity,non-repeatability and hysteresis.

2.08 TEMPERATURE SENSORS (TS)

A. Sensor range: When matched with A/D converter of BC, AAC/ASC, or SD, sensor range shallprovide a resolution of no worse than 0.3 degrees F (0.16 degrees C) (unless noted otherwise).Where thermistors are used, the stability shall be better than 0.25 degrees F over five (5)years.

[ENGINEER SHALL CAREFULLY SPECIFY OTHER APPLICATIONS WHERE MATCHED SENSORS ARE REQUIRED FOR THE SPECIFIC PROJECT.]

B. Matched Sensors: The following applications shall require matched sensors:

1. Hydronic Temperature Difference Calculations: Provide matched supply and returntemperature sensors where the pair is used for calculating temperature difference for usein load calculations or sequencing such as across chillers and plants. Sensing elementshall be platinum RTD guaranteeing an accuracy of +/- 0.5 percent of span plus 0.1degrees C.

2. Air Handling Unit Sequencing: Provide matched pair for the cooling and heating coilleaving sensors where the sequence includes calculating an offset from the supply airsetpoint to maintain a leaving heating coil temperature. Sensing element shall beplatinum RTD guaranteeing an accuracy of +/- 0.5 percent of span plus 0.1 degrees C.

[ENGINEER MUST DESIGNATE WHERE VARIOUS AMENITIES TO ROOM SENSORS ARE REQUIRED. THE FOLLOWING ASSUMES THAT THIS WILL BE INDICATED ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OTHERWISE ENGINEER MUST ADD THE CLARIFICATION BELOW. EDIT/DELETE THE FOLLOWING TO SUIT THE SYSTEMS AS APPLICABLE.

THESE ARE SENSORS FOR STANDARD CONTROL AND MONITORING. CONSULT OWNER FOR DIRECTION IN THE APPLICATION OF SENSING ELEMENT TYPES.]

C. Room Temperature Sensor: Shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitablefor wall mounting, unless noted otherwise. Provide insulated base. Following sensingelements are acceptable:



1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.6°F accuracy at calibration point.

2. Provide setpoint adjustment where indicated. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BAS.

3. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure where indicated. This shall be a momentary contact closure.

4. Provide current temperature indication via an LCD or LED readout, where noted.

[THESE ARE SENSORS FOR CRITICAL CONTROL AND MONITORING. CONSULT OWNER FOR DIRECTION IN THE APPLICATION OF SENSING ELEMENT TYPES.]

D. Critical Room Temperature Sensor: Shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide insulated base. Following sensing elements are acceptable:

1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, +/- 0.1 degrees C measured at 0 degrees C.

2. Provide setpoint adjustment where indicated. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BAS.

3. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure where indicated. This shall be a momentary contact closure

4. Provide current temperature indication via an LCD or LED readout, where noted.

5. Where the lab is a strong acid use, CRTSs shall be adequate for acidic environment.

[THESE ARE SENSORS FOR STANDARD CONTROL AND MONITORING. CONSULT OWNER FOR DIRECTION IN THE APPLICATION OF SENSING ELEMENT TYPES.]

E. Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of sensing element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated. Sensor probe shall be 316 stainless steel.

1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.3 degrees F accuracy at calibration point


F. Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of sensing element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated. Sensor probe shall be 316 stainless steel.


[EDIT THE FOLLOWING AVERAGING LENGTH PER SQUARE FOOT BASED ON HOW HOMOGENEOUS THE AIR TEMPERATURE WILL BE AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION. FOR INSTANCE, A PREHEAT SENSOR OF A MIXED AIR PLENUM WILL REQUIRE MORE LENGTH THAN THE DISCHARGE OFF A PREHEAT COIL IN A 100 PERCENT OUTSIDE AIR HANDLING UNIT.

THESE ARE SENSORS FOR STANDARD CONTROL AND MONITORING. CONSULT OWNER FOR DIRECTION IN THE APPLICATION OF SENSING ELEMENT TYPES.]



G. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of an averaging element, junction box forwiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities toresult in one lineal foot of sensing element for each three square feet of cooling coil/duct facearea. Provide a minimum of two sensors when coil/duct face area exceeds 149 square feet.Temperature range as required for resolution indicated.

1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, or thermistor, +/- 0.3 degrees F accuracy atcalibration point.


H. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of an averaging element, junction box forwiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities toresult in one lineal foot of sensing element for each three square feet of cooling coil/duct facearea. Provide a minimum of two sensors when coil/duct face area exceeds 149 square feet.Temperature range as required for resolution indicated.


I. Liquid immersion temperature sensor shall include brass thermowell (with thermally-conductivepaste), sensor and connection head for wiring connections. Temperature range shall be asrequired for resolution of 0.15 degrees F.

1. Sensing element (chilled water/glycol systems) shall be platinum RTD +/- 0.2 degrees Cmeasured at 0 degrees C.

2. All thermowells must be installed in a positive upright position with no downwardorientation.

J. Pipe Surface-Mount Temperature Sensor: Shall include metal junction box and clamps andshall be suitable for sensing pipe surface temperature and installation under insulation. Providethermally-conductive paste at pipe contact point. Temperature range shall be as require forresolution indicated in this Section.

1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4 degreesF accuracy at calibration point.

K. Outside air sensors shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket toprevent water seepage. Temperature range shall be as require for resolution indicated in thisSection.

1. +/- 0.2 degrees C measured at 0 degrees C.

2.09 HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS

A. Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting. Unit shall be two-wiretransmitter utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance change humiditysensor. Unit shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for percent relative humidity (%RH). A combination temperature and humidity sensor may be used for zone level monitoring.Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application criteria:

1. Input Range: 0 to 100% RH.



2. Accuracy (% RH): +/- 2 percent between 20-90% RH at 77 degrees F, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability.

3. Sensor Operating Range: As required by application.

4. Long Term Stability: Less than 1 percent drift per year.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Units shall be Vaisala HM Series, General Eastern, Microline, or Hy-Cal HT Series.

2.10 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DP)

A. Liquid, Steam and Gas:

1. General: Two-wire smart DP cell type transmitter, 4-20 mA or 1-5 Vdc linear output, adjustable span and zero, stainless steel wetted parts.

2. Ambient Limits: –40 to 175 degrees F (-40 to 121 degrees C), 0 to 100% RH.

3. Process Limits: –40 to 400 degrees F (-40 to 205 degrees C).

4. Accuracy: Less than 0.1 percent.

5. Output Damping: Time constant user selectable from 0 to 36 seconds.

6. Vibration Effect: Less than +/- 0.1 percent of upper range limit from 15 to 2000 Hz in any axis relative to pipe mounted process conditions.

7. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA 4, 4X, 7, 9.

8. Approvals: FM, CSA.

9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rosemount Inc. 3051 Series, Foxboro, Johnson-Yokagawa.

B. General Purpose Low Pressure Air: Generally for each measurement of duct pressure, filter differential pressure or constant volume air velocity pressure measurement where the range is applicable.

1. General: Loop powered two-wire differential capacitance cell-type transmitter.

2. Output: Two wire 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.

3. Overall Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.

4. Minimum Range: 0.1 inches w.c.

5. Maximum Range: 10 inches w.c.

6. Housing: Polymer housing suitable for surface mounting.

7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Units shall be Setra, Modus T30, Veris PX Series, or Dwyer Series 616.

8. Static Sensing Element: Pitot-type static pressure sensing tips similar to Dwyer model A-301 and connecting tubing.



9. Magnehelic Gauges: Provide Dwyer Series 200 Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauge(or equal) for each DP transmitter. Provide gauge, mounting bracket, ¼ inch aluminumtubing, static pressure tips, and molded plastic vent valves for each gauge connection.Select range for specified recommended filter loading pressure drop to be 75 percent full-scale. For other DP transmitters select range for specified setpoint to be between 25percent and 75 percent full-scale.

C. General Purpose Low Pressure/Low Differential Air: Generally for use in static measurement ofspace pressure or constant volume air velocity pressure measurement where the range isapplicable.

1. General: Loop powered, two-wire differential capacitance cell type transmitter.

2. Output: Two-wire 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.


4. Minimum Repeatability: +/- .25 percent of reading.

5. Maximum Range: 0.1, 0.25, or 0.5 inches w.c.


7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Vicon critical room control (CRC), Setra, Modus T30.


9. Range: Select for specified setpoint to be between 25 percent and 75 percent full-scale.

D. VAV Velocity Pressure: Generally for use in variable volume air velocity pressure measurementwhere the range is applicable.

1. General: Loop powered two-wire differential capacitance cell type transmitter.

2. Output: Two-wire, 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.

3. Overall Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent.

4. Minimum Range: 0 inches w.c.

5. Maximum Range: 1 inch w.c.


7. Acceptable Manufacturers: As included by box manufacturer or Dwyer (third party)

8. Range: Select for minimum range that will accept the maximum velocity pressureexpected.

9. Magnehelic Gauges: Provide Dwyer Series 200 Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauge(or equal) for each DP transmitter. Provide gauge, mounting bracket, ¼ inch aluminumtubing, static pressure tips, and molded plastic vent valves for each gauge connection.Select range for specified setpoint to be between 25 percent and 75 percent full-scale.



2.11 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS (AFMS)

A. Fan Inlet Probe: Shall consist of vortex shedding multi-sensor probes which are installed in the inlet of the fan. Individual sensors on the probe provide direct proportional and linear signals to airflow velocity.

1. Sensor Accuracy: +/- 2.0 percent.

2. Interchangeability: +/- 0.5 percent.

3. Velocity Range: 750 to 9000 fpm.

4. Electronics Accuracy: +/- 0.05 percent.

5. Temperature Limits: -20 degrees F to 140 degrees F.

6. Enclosure for Electronics: NEMA 1.

7. Material: Aluminum.

8. Operating Range: Select minimum range to accommodate the expected flow range of the equipment.

9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ebtron or approved equal.

B. Air Flow Traverse Probes:

1. Furnish where indicated on the Drawings, vortex shedding multi-sensor insertion type, air flow traverse probes. The probes, and placement of the probes, shall provide measurement accuracy within +/- 2 percent of actual velocity. Probes shall be of cylindrical cross Section.

2. Probes shall be provided with integral mounting plate, 1/4 compression fitting connections, end mounting rod and be suitable to operate in ambient conditions of 200 degrees F. The probe assemblies shall not have a pressure drop greater than 10 percent of the velocity pressure at the maximum design flow. The probes shall not amplify sound levels in the duct.

a. Sensor Accuracy: +/- 2.0 percent.

b. Interchangeability: +/- 0.5 percent.

c. Velocity Range: 400 to 7000 9000 fpm.

d. Electronics Accuracy: +/- 0.05 percent.

e. Temperature Limits: -20 degrees F to 200 degrees F.

f. Enclosure for Electronics: NEMA 1.

g. Humidity Limits: 0 to 100% RH (non-condensing).

h. Material: 304 stainless steel.

i. Operating Range: Select minimum range to accommodate the expected flow range of the equipment.



j. The following schedule is the minimum probe quantities across either the width orheight of the duct sections where the probes are being inserted:

Insertion Side (inches) Quantity 6-11 1 12-30 2 31-48 3 48-60 4 61-84 6 85-120 6

k. Manufacturer: Tek-Air Model VT5000 or approved equal.

2.12 VALVE BYPASS FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Provide a five valve bypass kit for protection of DP sensors where the static on the pipe cancause on over pressure when connected to one port with the other at atmospheric pressure. Kitshall include high and low pressure isolation valves, high and low pressure vent valves,calibration taps, and a bypass valve contained in a NEMA 1 enclosure.

2.13 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES (DPS)

A. General Service Auto Reset - Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential andsnap acting form C contacts rated for the application. Provide manufacturer's recommendedstatic pressure sensing tips and connecting tubing. Acceptable Manufacturer - Dwyer Series1900 or approved equal.

B. General Service Manual Reset - Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential andsnap acting form C contacts rated for the application. Manual reset shall be readily accessiblein reach of personnel installed at height not to exceed 5 feet above finished floor. Providemanufacturer's recommended static pressure sensing tips and connecting tubing. AcceptableManufacturer - Dwyer Series 1900 or approved equal. . The High Static Pressure Safety Switchshall alarm to the Building Automation System upon activation.

C. General Service - Water: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint, 2 psig or adjustable differentialand snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. 60 psid minimum pressuredifferential range and 0 degrees F to 160 degrees F operating temperature range.

2.14 PRESSURE SWITCHES (PS)

A. Diaphragm or bourdon tube with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap-acting Form Ccontacts rated for the application. Pressure switches shall be capable of withstanding 150percent of rated pressure.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, ITT Neo-Dyn, ASCO, Penn, and Honeywell

2.15 TRANSDUCERS

A. Consult Owner for direction in the application of Transducers.



B. PNEUMATICS ALLOWED IN RETROFIT APPLICATIONS ONLY

2.16 CURRENT SWITCHES (CS)

A. Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch (for Constant Speed Motor Status Indication):

1. Range: 2.5 to 135 amps.

2. Trip Point: Adjustable.

3. Switch: Solid state, normally open, 1.0A @ 30VAC/DC.

4. Lower Frequency Limit: 6 Hz.

5. Trip Indication: LED.

6. Approvals: UL, CSA.

7. Max. Cable Size: 350 MCM.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries H-908.

B. Clamp-on Wire Through Current Switch (CS/CR) (for Constant Speed Motors): Same as CS with 24v command relay rated at 5A @ 240 Vac resistive, 3A @ 240 Vac inductive, load control contact power shall be induced from monitored conductor (minimum conductor current required to energize relay 5A, max. rating of 135A). Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Veris Industries, Inc., Model # H938 or RE Technologies RCS 1150.

1. Where used for single-phase devices, provide the CS/CR in a self-contained unit in a housing similar with override switch to Kele RIBX.

C. Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch for Variable Speed Motor Status Indication:

1. Range: 3.5 to 135 Amps.

2. Trip Point: Self-calibrating based on VA memory associated with frequency to detect loss of belt with subsequent increase of control output to 60 Hz.


4. Frequency Range: 35 to 75 Hz.


6. Approvals: UL, CSA

7. Max. Cable Size: 350 MCM.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries, Inc. H-904.

D. Clamp-On Wire Through Current Switch (CS/CR) (for Variable Speed Motors): Same as CS with 24v command relay rated at 5A @ 240 Vac resistive, 3A @ 240 Vac inductive, load control contact power shall be induced from monitored conductor (minimum conductor current required to energize relay 5A, max. rating of 135A). Acceptable manufacturer shall be Veris Industries, Inc., Model # H934.



E. Variable Speed Status: Where current switches are used to sense the status for variable speeddevices, the CT shall include on-board VA/Hz memory to allow distinction between a belt breakand subsequent ramp up to 60 Hz, versus operation at low speed. The belt break scenarioshall be indicated as a loss of status and the operation at low speed shall indicate normalstatus.

2.17 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT)

A. Clamp-On Design Current Transformer (for Motor Current Sensing):

1. Range: 1-10 amps minimum, 20-200 amps maximum.


3. Output: 0-5 VDC.

4. Accuracy: +/- 0.2 percent from 20 to 100 Hz.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: KELE SA100.

2.18 OUTDOOR AIR STATIC PRESSURE SENSING TIP

A. Pressure Sensor: Pressure sensing tip shall be designed to minimize the effects of wind andresulting velocity pressure up to 80 mph. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Dwyer A-306.

B. Low Air Pressure Surge Dampener: 30-second time constant. Acceptable manufacturer shallbe Modus SD030.

2.19 CONTINUOUS LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

A. Capacitance Type:

1. General: Provide a loop powered, continuous capacitance type level transmitter withadjustable span and zero.

2. Output: 4-20 mA.

3. Probe: Fluoropolymer coated stainless steel rod or cable. Provide cable probe with endattachment hardware or weight.

4. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA 4, 7.

5. Approvals: UL or CSA.

6. Accuracy: +/- 1 percent of calibrated span.

7. Process Connection: MPT or ANSI Flange as required.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Drexelbrook, Endress & Hauser.

B. Hydrostatic Pressure:



1. General: Two wire smart d/p cell type transmitter.

2. Output: 4-20 mA or 1 to 5 volt user selectable linear or square root output.

3. Range: Adjustable span and zero.

4. Probe: Stainless steel wetted parts.

5. Environmental Limits: –40 to 250 degrees F (-40 to 121 degrees C), 0 to 100% RH.

6. Accuracy: Less than 0.1 percent of span.


8. Vibration Effect: Less than +/- 0.1 percent of upper range limit from 15 to 2000 Hz in anyaxis relative to pipe mounted process conditions.



11. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rosemount Inc. 3051 Series, Foxboro, and Johnson-Yokagawa.

[ENGINEER MUST CLEARLY INDICATE WHICH FLOW METERS ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR VARIOUS DUTIES. EDIT TO SUIT THE PROJECT.]

2.20 ULTRASONIC FLOW METER FOR WATER SERVICE (MUST BE BACNET COMPATIBLE):

A. NOT CURRENTLY IN USE. CONSULT BMS TO REQUEST USE.

B. General: Single-channel non-wetted ultrasonic meter to measure volumetric fluid using transit-time flow measurement.

C. Measurement: Single channel (Two Channel) measurement.

D. Enclosure: Epoxy-coated aluminum NEMA 4X, IP66 weatherproof.

E. Accuracy: +/- 2 percent of velocity reading at 1 to 40 feet per second.

F. Rangeability: 400 to 1.

G. Repeatability: +/- 0.2 to 0.5 percent at full scale.

H. Input Power: 120 VAC or 24VDC.

I. Operating Temperature: 14 degrees F to 140 degrees F.

J. Control Panel: Stainless Steel case. Digital display: 2-line x 16-character LCD display, LEDbacklight, configurable to display up to 4 measurement parameters in sequence.

K. Keypad: 6-button internal keypad.

L. Output: Single Channel – one 4-20 mA (Two Channel – two 4-20 mA).

M. Output Units: Velocity in feet per second or meters per second.



N. Volumetric Flow: Cubic feet (ft3), cubic meters (m3), gallons (gal), and liters (L).

O. Totalizer (forward and reverse): Cubic feet (ft3), cubic meters (m3), gallons (gal), and liters (L).

P. Transducer Temperature Range: –40 degrees F to 140 degrees F.

Q. Provide all slide track brackets, stainless steel chain or strap, for a complete installation. Provide connecter cables and connectors as required for a complete system.

R. Acceptable Manufacturers: EMCO.

2.21 ULTRASONIC FLOW METER FOR STEAM SERVICE (MUST BE BACNET COMPATIBLE):

A. General: Single-channel ultrasonic meter to measure the mass flow rate of saturated or superheated steam and the volumetric flow of wet steam.

B. Measurement: Single Channel measurement.

C. Enclosure: Stainless steel NEMA 7/4X.

D. Accuracy: +/- 1 percent of velocity reading at 3 to 150 feet per second.

E. Rangeability: 1500 to 1.

F. Repeatability: +/- 0.2 to 0.5 percent at 1 to 150 feet per second.

G. Input Power: 120 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC.

H. Operating Temperature: -40 degrees F to 140 degrees F.

I. Display: 2-line x 16-character LCD display, LED backlight, configurable to display up to 4 measurement parameters in sequence.

J. Output: 4-20 mA.

K. Transducer:

1. Type: T9.

2. Temperature Range: –40 degrees F to 400 degrees F.

3. Pressure Ratings: 0 to 250 psig operating pressure, 750 psig test pressure

4. Material: Titanium.

5. Connection: Threaded or flanged connection.

L. Acceptable Manufacturers: EMCO Steam Flow Transmitter.

2.22 INSERTION TYPE TURBINE METER FOR WATER SERVICE (MUST BE BACNET COMPATIBLE):

A. General Requirements:



1. Water meter basis of design is ONICON Model F-1200 Dual Turbine Flow Meter (andBTU management system) featuring patented non-magnetic impedance sensing method,low-mass non-metallic turbines with sapphire jewel bearings and tungsten carbide shaftsproviding an extremely long-wearing mechanical system.

2. Turbine Insertion Flow Meter shall have maximum operating pressure of 400 psi andmaximum operating temperature of 200 degrees F continuous (220 degrees F peak).

3. All wetted metal parts shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Flow meter shall meetor exceed all of the accuracy, head loss, flow limits, pressure and material requirementsof the AWWA standard C704-70 for the respective pipe or tube size.

4. Analog outputs shall consist of non-interactive zero and span adjustments, a DC linearlyof 0.1 percent of span, voltage output of 0-10 V, and current output of 4-20 mA.

B. Installation: Install in water systems with a minimum of 10 pipe diameters unobstructed flow.Double turbine insertion required at between 10 and 4 diameters unobstructed flow.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Onicon Corp. Badger, and Hersey.

2.23 VORTEX SHEDDING FLOW METER FOR LIQUID, STEAM AND GAS SERVICE (MUST BE BACNET COMPATIBLE):


1. Steam meter basis of design is the Onicon F-2500 Series Vortex Flow Meter. Operatingas a loop powered device, each F-2500 meter provides a 4 - 20 mA output signal for flowrate and a scalable pulse output. Built-in display provides flow rate and total data,instantaneous temperature, operating status and diagnostic data

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Onicon, Foxboro 83 series, Johnson-Yokagawa, and Rosemount.

2.24 MAGNETIC FLOW METER FOR WATER SERVICE (MUST BE BACNET COMPATIBLE)


1. Sensor shall be a magnetic flow meter, which utilizes Faraday’s Law to measurevolumetric fluid flow through a pipe.

2. The flow meter shall consist of two (2) elements, the sensor and the electronics. Thesensor shall generate a measuring signal proportional to the flow velocity in the pipe.The electronics shall convert this EMF into a standard current output.

3. Electronic replacement shall not affect meter accuracy (electronic units are not matchedwith specific sensors).

a. Provide a four-wire, externally powered, magnetic type flow transmitter withadjustable span and zero, integrally mounted to flow tube.

b. Output: 4-20 mA.

c. Flow Tube: Stainless steel.



d. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA 4, 7.

e. Approvals: UL or CSA.

f. Stability: 0.1 percent of rate over six (6) months.

g. Process Connection: Carbon steel, ANSI 150 LB, size as required.

B. Meter Accuracy:

1. Under the reference conditions of a 68 degrees F media temperature, a 68 degrees F ambient temperature, a +/- 1 percent nominal power supply voltage, 10 diameters up stream and 5 down of straight piping and a fully developed flow profile; the meter must meet the following requirements:

2. Plus or minus 0.8 percent of reading accuracy in the flow range of 1.65 - 33 ft/sec +/- (0.66/Velocity actual feet per second +0.4) percent of reading accuracy in the flow range of 0 - 1.65 feet per second.

3. Meter repeatability shall be +/- 0.1 percent of rate at velocities > 1.65 feet per second.

C. Calibration: The sensor must be calibrated on an internationally accredited (i.e. NAMAS) flow rig with accuracy better than 0.1 percent. Calibration shall be traceable to National Institute of Standard and Technology.

D. Construction:

1. The meter piping material shall be AISI 304 stainless steel.

2. The meter flange and enclosure material shall be carbon steel.

3. The external surface of the sensor is to be treated with at least .006 inches (150 µm) of Corrosion resistant two-component paint.

4. The inner meter piping shall be protected with a neoprene liner or similar liner.

5. The electrode material shall be AISI 316 Ti or better.

6. The sensor be ANSI class 150 pounds.

E. Electronics:

1. The sensor shall contain a SENSOR-PROM, storing calibration and factory default settings, i.e. the identification of the sensor and size.

2. An ISO 9001 approved company shall manufacture the sensor and electronics.

3. As standard, the electronics must be installable directly on the sensor or installable (remote) up to 1500 feet from the sensor as a maximum.

4. With local electronics installation, the electronics shall be able to withstand three (3) feet water submersion for up to 30 minutes.

5. The electronics shall be compatible with the following power specifications:

a. 15/230 Vac +10 percent to 15 percent 50-60 Hz.



b. The power consumption must be 10 Watts or less independent of meter size.

6. The meter electronics shall be able to produce simultaneous scaleable current andfrequency/pulse output. The frequency output shall be linearly proportional to flow rateand scaleable from 0-10 kHz. The pulse output shall be scaleable from 50 to 5000milliseconds duration, suitable for an electromechanical totalizer in engineering units.

7. The electronics must have an internal totalizer for summation of flow.

8. The output of the electronics must be individually, galvanically isolated with an isolationvoltage of more than 500 V.

F. Output:

1. The current signal must be either 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA proportional to the flow velocity.

2. The output current signal must accommodate 20 percent over range without loss inlinearity.

3. The electronics shall have an alphanumeric LCD display showing actual flow andtotalized flow in engineering units.

4. The display and keyboard must be rotatable so that the display can be viewed regardlessof sensor orientation.

G. Error Detection:

1. The electronics must be able to detect the flowing error conditions:

a. Signal connection between electronics and sensor interrupted.

b. Loss of current to the coil circuit.

c. Load on the current output.

d. Defective electronics.

e. Defective sensor.

f. Empty pipe.

2. The electronics must have an Error Log where all error conditions occurring within aperiod of 180 days are stored.

H. Electronic Replacement Programming:

1. The electronics must be immediately replaceable without the need of cable disconnectionor renewed configuration programming.

2. When the supply voltage is applied, the electronics must self configure and display flowwithout keyboard contact (no programming required).

3. The electronics must be provided with an automatic zero flow setting.

4. The electronics shall be programmable with respect to:

a. User display options and menu



b. Setting data

c. Configuration of outputs

d. Zero ‘cut-off’ from 0 percent to 9.9 percent of maximum flow.

5. For ease of programming, the electronics shall be programmable away from the meterusing the meter Sensor-Prom and a 9 V battery.

6. The electronics shall be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range of -4degrees F to 120 degrees F.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Engineering Measurements Co. (EMCO MAG 3100 with a model MAG 2500 electronictransmitter and display).

2. Rosemount.

3. Toshiba.

4. Hersey Measurement.

5. Yokogawa Industrial Automation.

6. Endress & Hauser.

2.25 VENTURI FLOW METER FOR WATER SERVICE

A. Flow Sensing Element: Differential-pressure Venturi-type designed for installation in piping.

B. Construction: Bronze or cadmium plated steel with brass quick connect fittings and attachedtag with flow conversion data and rated flow. Ends shall be threaded for 2 inches and smallerand flanged or welded for larger than 2 inches.

C. Differential transmitter shall be dual range industrial grade as specified above.

D. Connect differential pressure to venturi and repipe quick connect fittings for measurement.Provide ball valves to isolate quick connects and differential pressure transmitter.

E. Apply Venturi-type flow meters where minimum flow range is no less than 40 percent ofmaximum flow.

2.26 CO2 SENSORS/TRANSMITTERS (CO2)

A. General: CO2 sensors shall use silicon based, diffusion aspirated, infrared single beam, dual-wavelength sensor.

B. Accuracy: +/- 36ppm at 800 ppm and 68 degrees F.

C. Stability: 5 percent over 5 years.

D. Output: 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc or relay.



E. Mounting: Duct or Wall as indicated.

F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Vaisala, Inc. GMD20 (duct) or GMW20 (wall).

2.27 PNEUMATIC CONTROL COMPONENTS (RETROFIT ONLY)

2.28 ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTS

A. Limit Switches (LS): Limit switches shall be UL listed, SPDT or DPDT type, with adjustable trimarm. Limit switches shall be as manufactured by Square D or Allen Bradley.

B. Electric Solenoid-Operated Pneumatic Valves (EP): EP valves shall be rated for a minimum of1.5 times their maximum operating static and differential pressure. Valves shall be ported 2-way, 3-way, or 4-way and shall be normally closed or open as required by the application. EPsshall be sized for minimum pressure drop, and shall be UL and CSA listed. Furnish and installgauges on all inputs of EPs. Furnish an adjustable air pressure regulator on input side ofsolenoid valves serving actuators operating at greater than 30 psig.

1. Coil Enclosure: Indoors shall be NEMA 1, Outdoors shall be NEMA 3, 4, 7, 9.

2. Fluid Temperature Rating: Valves for compressed air and cold water service shall have150 degrees F (66 degrees C) minimum rating. Valves for hot water or steam serviceshall have fluid temperature rating higher than the maximum expected fluid temperature.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: EP valves shall be as manufactured by ASCO or Parker.

4. Coil Rating: EP valves shall have appropriate voltage coil rated for the application (i.e.,24 VAC, 120 VAC, 24 VDC, etc.).

C. Low Temperature Detector (‘Freezestat’) (FZ): Low temperature detector shall consist of a‘cold spot’ element which responds only to the lowest temperature along any one foot of entireelement, minimum bulb size of 1/8 inches x 20 feet (3.2mm x 6.1m), junction box for wiringconnections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise, DPDT (4 wire, 2 circuit) withmanual reset. Manual reset shall be readily accessible in reach of personnel installed at heightnot to exceed 5 feet above finished floor. Temperature range 15 to 55 degrees F (-9.4 to 12.8degrees C), factory set at 38 degrees F. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in onelineal foot of sensing element for each five square feet of cooling coil/duct face area. The LowTemperature Detector shall alarm to the Building Automation System upon activation.

D. High Temperature Detectors (‘Firestat’) (FS): High temperature detector shall consist of 3-polecontacts, a single point sensor, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent airleakage of vibration noise, triple-pole, with manual reset. Temperature range 25 to 215degrees F (-4 to 102 degrees C).

E. Surface-Mounted Thermostat: Surface-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT contacts,operating temperature range of 50 to 150 degrees F (10 to 65 degrees C), and a minimum 10degrees F fixed setpoint differential.

F. Low Voltage Wall Thermostat: Wall-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT sealed contacts,operating temperature range of 50 to 90 degrees F (10 to 32 degrees C), switch rating of 24Vac (30 Vac maximum), and both manual and automatic fan operation in both the heat and coolmodes.



G. Control Relays: All control relays shall be UL listed, with contacts rated for the application, andmounted in minimum NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor locations, NEMA 4 for outdoor locations.

1. Control relays for use on electrical systems of 120 volts or less shall have, as a minimum,the following:

a. AC coil pull-in voltage range of +10 percent, -15 percent or nominal voltage.

b. Coil sealed volt-amperes (VA) not greater than four (4) VA.

c. Silver cadmium Form C (SPDT) contacts in a dustproof enclosure, with 8 or 11 pintype plug.

d. Pilot light indication of power-to-coil. Pilot light shall be visible from a standingposition of 5 feet AFF

e. Coil rated for 50 and 60 Hz service.

f. Relays shall be labeled to identify the function or purpose per 26 05 53Identification for Electrical Systems. Coordinate with owner for approved verbiageof labels.

g. Acceptable Manufacturers: Relays shall be Functional Devices (RIB), PotterBrumfield, Model KRPA or approved equal.

2. Relays used for across-the-line control (start/stop) of 120V motors, 1/4 horsepower, and1/3 horsepower, shall be rated to break minimum 10 Amps inductive load. Relays shallbe IDEC or approved equal.

3. Relays used for stop/start control shall have low voltage coils (30 VAC or less), and shallbe provided with transient and surge suppression devices at the controller interface.

4. All safety circuits shall be installed to operate individual interposing relays located in theassociated equipment control panel. Each safety device (i.e. Freezestat, DP safety,smoke detector, firestat, etc.) wiring circuit shall be installed with individual homerunsback to the associated control panel. See control drawings for details.

H. General Purpose Power Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose magnetic contactor.ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, NEMA 1 enclosure. Manufacturer shall be Square 'D', Cutler-Hammer orWestinghouse.

I. Control Transformers: Furnish and install control transformers as required. Controltransformers shall be machine tool type, and shall be UL and CSA listed. Primary andsecondary sides shall have replaceable fuses in accordance with the NEC. Transformer shallbe properly sized for application, and mounted in minimum NEMA 1 air vented enclosure.Multiple transformers in a single enclosure shall have fan aided ventilation whenever ambienttemperature exceeds 140 Deg F.

1. Transformers shall be manufactured by Westinghouse, Square ‘D’, or Jefferson.

J. Time Delay Relays (TDR): TDRs shall be capable of on or off delayed functions, withadjustable timing periods, and cycle timing light. Contacts shall be rated for the application witha minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in a NEMA 1 enclosure.



1. TDRs shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one millionoperations. TDRs shall have solid state, plug-in type coils with transient suppressiondevices.

2. TDRs shall be UL and CSA listed, Crouzet type.

K. Electric Push Button Switch: Switch shall be momentary contact, oil tight, push button, withnumber of N.O. and/or N.C. contacts as required. Contacts shall be snap-action type, andrated for minimum 120 Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by AllenBradley or approved equal.

L. Pilot Light: Panel-mounted pilot light shall be NEMA ICS 2 oil tight, transformer type, with screwterminals, push-to-test unit, LED type, rated for 120 VAC. Unit shall be 800T type, asmanufactured by Allen-Bradley or approved equal.

M. Alarm Horn: Panel-mounted audible alarm horn shall be continuous tone, 120 Vac Sonalertsolid-state electronic signal, as manufactured by Mallory or approved equal.

N. Electric Selector Switch (SS): Switch shall be maintained contact, NEMA ICS 2, oil-tightselector switch with contact arrangement, as required. Contacts shall be rated for minimum120 Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley or approvedequal.

[ENGINEER MUST CLEARLY INDICATE WHICH REFRIGERANT MONITORS ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR THE APPLICATION. ONLY SPECIFY THE REFRIGERANT MONITOR IN THIS SECTION IF NOT PROVIDED BY THE CHILLER MANUFACTURER IN THE CHILLER SPECIFICATION. EDIT TO SUIT THE PROJECT.]

2.29 REFRIGERANT MONITOR

A. General: Contractor shall provide a refrigerant sensitive infrared-based stationary refrigerantgas leak monitor system designed to continuously measure refrigerants. Refrigerant monitorshall be coordinated to detect [insert refrigerant types here if known or delete] refrigerants usedin chiller equipment installed under Division 23. The alarm system shall comply with the latestedition of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 and local code requirements.

B. The refrigerant monitor shall be capable of monitoring multiple refrigerant gas compounds atmultiple locations in concentrations of 0 PPM to a minimum of 1000 PPM. The Monitor shallhave a low range resolution of 1 PPM in the range of 1 PPM through 100 PPM. Readingsabove 100 PPM must be accurate to within +/- 5 percent of reading. Accuracy shall bemaintained within ambient environmental ranges of 0 degrees C through 50 degrees C, (32degrees F through 122 degrees F) and 5 percent through 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

C. The refrigerant monitor shall automatically and continuously monitor the areas through asample draw type tubular pick up system with an internal pump and filter. The installation of themonitoring control and the tubing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions. The location, routing, and final position of the sample tubes shall be submitted tothe engineer with all necessary shop drawings and monitor specifications and installationinstructions. Tubing size, tubing material, and tube length limitations shall be within thespecifications of the monitor manufacturer. The location and method of tube support andhangers must be identified on the shop drawings. Each of the sampling tubes shall have end ofline filters.



D. The analyzer will be based on infrared detection technology, and will be factory tested andcalibrated for the specified refrigerant or refrigerants. Factory certification of the calibrationsshall be provided with the O&M manuals. The analyzer shall provide a menu driven orautomatic method of checking both zero, span calibration for each sensor, and allow foradjustment.

E. The monitor shall be equipped with four (4) outputs. Three relays shall energize at anadjustable user defined set point based on refrigerant concentration levels. The relay thresholdadjustment shall be protected by keyed or password access controls. Adjustments andobservations shall be made at the front panel operator interface. The relay threshold valuescan be viewed without a password. The digital display will continuously display the refrigerantconcentration level and alarm status. The fourth output shall indicate a monitor malfunctionalarm. The monitor shall also have an analog output that will provide a liner scaled reference tothe refrigerant concentration in parts per million. The analog output signal shall be an industrystandard DC voltage, or mA current signal.

F. The monitor shall have a NEMA 4 enclosure with a gasketed, hinged front cover. Conduits andtube connections shall be located on the bottom of the enclosure. The enclosure shall have arust and corrosion resistant finish.

G. The following alarm modes will be provided by the refrigerant monitor:

1. Alarm Level One: Low level of refrigerant concentration at one of the sampling pointshas detected the presence of a possible refrigerant leak. The initial alarm threshold shallbe set to 5 PPM (adjustable) and increased if there are nuisance alarms. This alarmlevel shall be displayed on the refrigerant monitor interface panel, indicating whichsensor has triggered the alarm, and the associated concentration of refrigerant in PPM.This event will also send an Alarm Level One signal to the BAS through a digital outputfrom the monitor relay. This alarm will remain active until the refrigerant concentration isreduced below set point.

2. Alarm Level Two: This alarm shall indicate that one of the sensors has detected arefrigerant concentration that is approaching dangerous levels in the area beingmonitored. This alarm shall be set to 25 percent below the maximum calculatedrefrigerant level specified in the latest editions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 34.This alarm will be displayed on the monitor interface, and will indicate which of thesensors has caused the alarm, and the highest concentration in PPM. This event willalso activate the beacon and audible alarm mounted on the refrigerant monitoringenclosure. This alarm will also be sent to the BAS through the digital output of the relay.In this mode the audible alarm can be silenced, but the beacon shall remain active untilthe fault is cleared



3. Alarm Level Three: This alarm shall be set at the maximum calculated refrigerant levelspecified in the latest editions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 34whichever is thelowest concentration. The refrigerant monitor interface will display which sensor hascaused the alarm, and the associated concentration in PPM. This event will also activatethe beacon and audible alarm mounted on the refrigerant monitoring enclosure. If theaudible alarm had been silenced by an earlier alarm, the activation of this level threealarm will cause the audible alarm to be activated again. The relay in the refrigerantmonitoring panel shall activate the space ventilation system, and will disable allcombustion or flame-producing equipment via hardwired control interlocks. In addition,this event and will de-energize the energy source for any hot surface (850 degrees F or454 degrees C) located in the space. Interlocks must also be provided to close anynormally open doors or openings to the space for proper ventilation and isolation duringthis alarm condition. This alarm level will also signal the BAS through the digital outputthrough the same relay. In this mode, the audible alarm can be silenced, but the beaconshall remain active until the fault is cleared.

H. All alarm conditions shall be report to the BAS system as follows:

1. Alarm Level One: The lowest refrigerant alarm level shall detect the presence ofrefrigerant in low concentrations and energize a relay to signal a low level alarm to theBAS operator terminal(s). The alarm shall display an alarm message stating that there isa potential refrigerant leak in the designated area.

2. Alarm Level Two: The second refrigerant level alarm shall be a high refrigerant alarmalert. This alarm shall energize a relay to signal the BAS system indicating a high levelalarm on the BAS operator terminal(s). This BAS alarm shall state that high levels ofrefrigerant have been detected in the designated area.

3. Fault Alarm: Reports a high level alarm to the BAS operator terminal(s) that there is afault in the refrigerant monitoring alarm system.

2.30 NAMEPLATES

A. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates for all equipment, components, and field devicesfurnished. Nameplates shall be 1/8 inch thick, black, with white center core, and shall beminimum 1 inch x 3 inch, with minimum ¼ inch high block lettering. Nameplates for devicessmaller than 1 inch x 3 inch shall be attached to adjacent surface.

B. Each nameplate shall identify the function for each device.

2.31 TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall test and calibrate all signaling circuits of all field devices to ascertain thatrequired digital and accurate analog signals are transmitted, received, and displayed at systemoperator terminals, and make all repairs and recalibrations required to complete test. Contractorshall be responsible for test equipment required to perform these tests and calibrations. Testequipment used for testing and calibration of field devices shall be at least twice as accurate asrespective field device (e.g., if field device is +/- 0.5 percent accurate, test equipment shall be+/- 0.25 percent accurate over same range).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Owner.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS



C. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and all local codes.

D. Main Control Air Piping: All main air piping between the compressors and the control panels shall be copper, run per ASTM B88

E. Branch Control Air Piping: Accessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in mechanical equipment rooms; inside mechanical equipment enclosures, such as heating and cooling units, instrument panels; across roofs, in pipe chases, etc. Inaccessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in concrete slabs; furred walls; or ceilings with no access.

1. Provide copper tubing with maximum unsupported length of three (3) feet for accessible tubing run exposed to view. Terminal single-line connections less than 18 inches length may be copper tubing, or polyethylene tubing run. Tubing exposed to ambient conditions must be properly protected from environmental conditions and protected from damage.

2. Provide copper tubing for inaccessible tubing, other than in concrete pour. In a concrete pour polyethylene tubing may be used, install in rigid conduit or vinyl-jacketed polyethylene tubing. Install in galvanized rigid steel conduit at all exterior locations. Install in PVC Schedule 40 conduit if encased in concrete.

3. Polyethylene tubing may be used in control panels provided it is run in a neat and orderly fashion, bundled where applicable, properly supported and installed in a neat and workman like manner. Fasten flexible connections bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion.

4. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psi (207 kPa) for 24 hours. Test fails if more than 2 psi loss occurs.

5. Number-code or color-code tubing, except local individual room control tubing, for future identification and servicing of control system. Code shall be as indicated on approved installation drawings.

F. Control Wiring: The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connection of electric control devices.



1. Wiring System: Install complete wiring system for electric control systems. Concealwiring exposed in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping areexposed. Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines. Install in accordancewith the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26. Fasten flexibleconductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect againstabrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly.

2. Control Wiring Conductors: Install control wiring conductors, without splices betweenterminal points, color-coded. Install in neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened.Install in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division26.

3. Communication wiring, signal wiring and low voltage control wiring shall be installedseparate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded atcontroller end only, unless otherwise recommended by the controller manufacturer.

4. All WAN and LAN patch cords shall be approved and installed as directed by owner.

5. BAS low voltage wiring/cables: All cables shall have legible printed sleeve identificationlabels at each device and the panel termination.

a. Labels shall be high temperature permasleeve (TM) Marker, such as BradyPermaSleeve TM, part number - "BPSPT-187-175-WT” or owner approvedequivalent.

b. Each label shall be identified with the entire BAS point name utilized in the BASdatabase and the point address.

[ENGINEER SHALL CONSULT WITH OWNER PRIOR TO ALLOWING EXPOSED CABLE AND INCLUDING THE APPLICABLE PARAGRAPHS.]

6. Terminate all control wiring internal to panels to screw terminal connections or ownerapproved wire connection equivalent. Wire nuts and/or splices are not allowed in panels.When terminating a wire cable, the cable jacket, cable shielding wire, and cable shieldingmaterial shall be finished in a neat consistent workmanlike manner.

7. [Install all control wiring external to panels in electric metallic tubing or raceway.Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines. Provide compression typeconnectors. Install wiring in galvanized rigid steel conduit at all exterior locations andwhere subjected to moisture. Install in PVC Schedule 40 conduit if encased in concrete.All conduits penetrating partitions, walls or floors shall be sealed with a submitted andapproved fire/smoke sealant material to prevent migration of air through the conduitsystem.

8. [Communication wiring, signal wiring and low voltage control wiring may be run withoutconduit in concealed, accessible locations if noise immunity is ensured.

a. Contractor shall be fully responsible for noise immunity and rewire in conduit ifelectrical or RF noise affects performance.

b. Accessible locations are defined as areas inside mechanical equipmentenclosures, such as heating and cooling units, instrument panels etc.; inaccessible pipe chases with easy access, or suspended ceilings with easy access.Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines.



Run in a neat and orderly fashion, bundled where applicable, and completely suspended (strapped to rigid elements or routed through wiring rings) away from areas of normal access. Tie and support conductors neatly with suitable nylon ties and not to exceed five (5) foot intervals. Communication wiring may not be bundled with electrical nor with fire alarm wiring. All in-wall communication wiring must be run in a ¾”minimum conduit. Wiring passing thru a fire-rated partition must be fire-caulked.

c. Conductors shall not be supported by the ceiling system or ceiling support system. Conductors shall be pulled tight and be installed as high as practically possible in ceiling cavities. Wiring shall not be laid on the ceiling, duct, or light fixtures. Wiring run down the wall in conduit shall have one loop of additional slack.

d. Conductors shall not be installed between the top cord of a joist or beam and the bottom of roof decking.

9. Secondary LAN Communication cabling: All wiring shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26. Wiring/cables shall be provided in a customized color jacketing material. Color coding shall be green or orange. Material and labeling hall be as specified in section 27 05 53 (IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS), http://www.uh.edu/facilities-planning-construction/vendor-resources/owners-design-criteria/master-specs/jan-2017/division27Jan2017updated.pdf#page=35.

10. Number-code or color-code conductors appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. Code shall be as indicated on approved installation drawings.

G. Control Valves: Install so that actuators, wiring, and tubing connections are accessible for maintenance. [Refer to Figure C at end of Section] Where possible, install with valve stem axis vertical, with operator side up. Where vertical stem position is not possible or would result in poor access, valves may be installed with stem horizontal. Do not install valves with stem below horizontal, or down.

H. Averaging Temperature Sensors: Cover no more than two square feet per linear foot of sensor length except where indicated. Generally, where flow is sufficiently homogeneous/adequately mixed at sensing location, consult Engineer of Record for requirements.

[ENGINEER MUST SPECIFICALLY SHOW LOCATIONS OF ALL FLOW MEASURING STATIONS AND FLOW METERS AND DESIGN THE STRAIGHT LENGTH OF DUCT OF PIPE REQUIRED FOR ACCURATE SENSORS. THIS LENGTH MUST BE SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON THE DRAWING AND BE ADEQUATE FOR THE INSTALLATION.]

I. Airflow Measuring Stations: Ebtron air flow temperature measurement device is the basis of design. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations in an unobstructed straight length of duct (except those installations specifically designed for installation in fan inlet). For installations in fan inlets, provide on both inlets of double inlet fans and provide inlet cone adapter as recommended by AFM station manufacturer.

[ENGINEER MUST SPECIFICALLY SHOW LOCATIONS OF ALL FLOW MEASURING STATIONS AND FLOW METERS AND DESIGN THE STRAIGHT LENGTH OF DUCT OF PIPE REQUIRED FOR ACCURATE SENSORS. THIS LENGTH MUST BE SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON THE DRAWING AND BE ADEQUATE FOR THE INSTALLATION.]

J. Fluid Flow Sensors: Install per manufacturer’s recommendations in an unobstructed straight length of pipe.





K. Relative Humidity Sensors: Provide element guard as recommended by manufacturer for highvelocity installations. For high limit sensors, position remote enough to allow full moistureabsorption into the air stream before reaching the sensor.

L. Water Differential Pressure Transmitters: Provide valve bypass arrangement to protect againstover pressure damaging the transmitter.

M. Steam Differential Pressure Transmitters: Install per manufacturer’s instructions at location asshown on the Drawings,

N. Pipe Surface Mount Temperature Sensors: Install with thermally conductive paste at pipecontact point. Where sensor is to be installed on an insulated pipe Contractor shall neatly cutinsulation install sensor, repair or replace insulation and vapor barrier and adequately sealvapor barrier.

O. Flow Switches: Where possible, install in a straight run of pipe at least 15 diameters in length tominimize false indications.

P. Current Switches for Motor Status Monitoring: Adjust so that setpoint is below minimumoperating current and above motor no load current.

Q. Supply Duct Pressure Transmitters:

1. General: Install pressure tips with at least four (4) ‘round equivalent’ duct diameters ofstraight duct with no takeoffs upstream. Install static pressure tips securely fastened withtip facing upstream in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Locatethe transmitter at an accessible location to facilitate calibration.

2. VAV System ‘Down-Duct’ Transmitters: Locate pressure tips approximately 2/3 of thehydraulic distance to the most remote terminal in the straightest run in the air system.

R. Cutting and Patching Insulation: Repair insulation to maintain integrity of insulation and vaporbarrier jacket. Use hydraulic insulating cement to fill voids and finish with material matching orcompatible with adjacent jacket material.

3.03 REFRIGERANT MONITOR INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Place sensing tips in locations tomaximize effectiveness.

B. Provide hard wire interlocks to the emergency ventilation and shutdown of combustion devices.Visual and audible alarms are required.

[FOR CRITICAL SERVICE CONTROL VALVE APPLICATIONS, ENGINEER SHALL COMPLETE THE APPLICABLE FOLLOWING FORMS FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL APPLICATION AND/OR VALVE. CONTROL VALVE SIZING AND SELECTION IS THE INITIAL RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ENGINEER AND NOT LEFT TO THE BAS PROVIDER. THE ITEMS NOTED WITH A * AND *,** SHALL BE COMPLETED BY THE ENGINEER TO LIST THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE VALVES FOR CV, CLOSE OFF, TEMPERATURE RATINGS, CAGE MATERIAL, SEAT MATERIAL, TRIM MATERIAL ETC. FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL APPLICATION. THIS SHOULD BE A RESULT OF ANALYZING THE VALVES PERFORMANCE AND APPLICATION ACROSS THE RANGE OF CONTROL. ENGINEER SHALL CONSULT WITH OWNER PRIOR TO SPECIFYING THESE VALVES.]

C. Figures A and B (below) illustrate the required layout of a Building Automation Panel in newconstruction.



FIGURE B: HIGH VOLTAGE PANEL

FIGURE A: LOW VOLTAGE PANEL




FIGURE C: VALVE INSTALLATION



University of Houston Steam Control Valve Specification Sheet (Globe Body)

Project Name

REVISIONS SHEET xx of xx NO. BY DATE DESCRIPTION SPEC. NO. REVISION 1 15951 * 2 CONTRACT DATE 3 X mm/dd/yy 4 PROJECT NUMBER 5 XXXX.XX6 BY CHECKED APPROVED 7 XYZ XYZ XYZ

GENERAL

Tag Number * Service Description * P&ID Sheet Number * Line No. or Vessel No. * Line Size / Mat'l / Sch. * Electrical Class Power Supply * *

PROCESS DATA

Fluid Fluid State SATURATED STEAM <125 PSIG VAPOR

Operating Condition Units Minimum Normal Maximum Other Flow Rate LB/HR * * * * Inlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Outlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Temperature DEG F * * * *

Mol. Wt. Sp. Wt Sp. Grav Viscosity Sp Heat



BODY

Style Size GLOBE xx" End Connection Rating xx" RF FLANGED ANSI CLASS 150 Port Size Travel * * Valve Cv Valve C1/Km * ** Body Matl. Bonnet ASTM A216 WCB ASTM A216 WCB Characteristic Trim Number EQUAL PERCENTAGE *,** Cage Matl. Retainer Matl. * * Seat Matl. Seat Ring Matl. *,** *,** Plug Matl. Stem Matl. *,** *,** Flow Action DOWN Gaskets SPIRAL METALLIC Stem Guide ** Packing GLASS FILLED PTFE** Required Seat Tightness ANSI CLASS IV Max. Allowable Sound Level (dBA) <75 dBA

ACTUATOR

Type PNEUMATIC Size Bench Set * * Push-Down To Fail Position CLOSE* CLOSE* Close At Open At 6 PSIG* 30 PSIG* Handwheel NONE*

POSITIONER

Type Electronic Communications Protocol * Input Signal Output Signal 4-20 mA Air Supply 80 PSIG NOMINAL*

TRANSDUCER Type * Input Signal * Output Signal *

OPTIONS Air Set w/ Gauges YES* Solenoids * Position Switches *



SELECTION BASED ON

Manufacturer Fisher, Valtek, Dezurik-Copes, Leslie Valve Model Number * Actuator Model No. * Positioner Model No. * Filter Regulator YES

NOTES

*, ** Engineer to consult with and use manufacturer’s recommended steam trim for the service, usually a hardened 400 series stainless steel. * Engineer shall fill in to suit application.** Vendor to confirm based on process data provided.



University of Houston Water Control Valve Specification Sheet (Globe Body)

Project Name

Revisions SHEET xx of xx NO. BY DATE DESCRIPTION SPEC. NO. REVISION 1 15951 * 2 CONTRACT DATE 3 X mm/dd/yy 4 PROJECT NUMBER 5 XXXX.XX 6 BY CHECKED APPROVED 7 XYZ XYZ XYZ

GENERAL


PROCESS DATA

Fluid Fluid State WATER LIQUID Operating Condition Units Minimum Normal Maximum Other Flow Rate GPM * * * * Inlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Outlet Pressure PSIG * * * *

Temperature DEG F * * * *

Level FEET * * * * Mol. Wt. Sp. Wt Sp. Grav Viscosity Sp Heat



BODY

Style Size GLOBE xx" End Connection Rating xx" RF FLANGED ANSI CLASS 150 Port Size Travel * * Valve Cv Valve C1/Km * ** Body Matl. Bonnet ASTM A216 WCC ASTM A216 WCC Characteristic Trim Number EQUAL PERCENTAGE ** Cage Matl. Retainer Matl. * * Seat Matl. Seat Ring Matl. 316 STAINLESS STEEL 316 STAINLESS STEEL Plug Matl. Stem Matl. 316 STAINLESS STEEL 316 STAINLESS STEEL Flow Action DOWN Gaskets PTFE Stem Guide ** Packing PTFE Required Seat Tightness ANSI CLASS IV Max. Allowable Sound Level (dBA) <75 dBA

ACTUATOR


POSITIONER

Type Electronic Communications Protocol * Input Signal Output Signal 4-20 mAAir Supply 80 PSIG NOMINAL*


OPTIONS

Air Set w/ Gauges YES* Solenoids * Position Switches *



SELECTION BASED ON


NOTES * Engineer shall fill in to suit application. ** Vendor to confirm based on process data provided.




Project Name

Revisions SHEET xx of xx NO. BY DATE DESCRIPTION SPEC. NO. REVISION 1 15951 * 2 CONTRACT DATE 3 X mm/dd/yy 4 PROJECT NUMBER 5 XXXX.XX6 BY CHECKED APPROVED 7 XYZ XYZ XYZ

GENERAL


PROCESS DATA

Fluid Fluid State WATER LIQUID Operating Condition Units Minimum Normal Maximum Other Flow Rate GPM * * * * Inlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Outlet Pressure PSIG * * * *

Temperature DEG F * * * *

Level FEET * * * * Mol. Wt. Sp. Wt Sp. Grav Viscosity Sp Heat



BODY


ACTUATOR


POSITIONER

Type Electronic Communications Protocol * Input Signal Output Signal 4-20 mA Air Supply 80 PSIG NOMINAL*


OPTIONS




SELECTION BASED ON


NOTES * Engineer shall fill in to suit application.** Vendor to confirm based on process data provided.

University of Houston Master Specifications Project Name

AE Project Number: BAS BAS Operator Interface 25 11 09 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 11 09 – BAS OPERATOR INTERFACES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications, ElectronicSafety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, andthis Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may be reciprocallyapplicable to this Section.

C. Refer to Section 25 00 00 - Building Automation System (BAS) General for generalrequirements.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Includes:

1. Operator Workstations.

2. Control System Servers.

3. Portable Operator Terminal / Remote Workstation.

4. Printers.

B. Furnish and install all Operator Interfaces and Control System Servers as required for theBAS functions specified. All computers shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a periodof one year after final acceptance.




C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirementsand standards addressed within the following references:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL




B. The make and model of control system server computers, personal computers (PC),notebook PC’s, monitors, and printers shall comply with Owner’s current standards fordesktop personal computers as of the date of Substantial Completion. Contact Owner for thecurrent computer hardware standards.

C. Operating system for operator workstation shall comply with Owner’s current standards fordesktop personal computers as of the date of Substantial Completion. Contact Owner for thecurrent computer hardware standards.

2.02 OPERATOR WORKSTATION (OWS)

A. Equipment listed below is representative of recent hardware requirements. Consultwith BMS Project Manager regarding current computer equipment modelspecifications. Consult with BMS Project Manager regarding current computerequipment model specifications.

B. Workstation PC shall have the capability of changing serial port interrupt vectors andIOBASE addresses through software.

C. Operating system for operator workstation shall meet or exceed the minimumrequirements of the BAS software and shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements ofUNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON. All software shall be at least the latest version available as ofthe date of Contract completion.

D. Provide software, graphics and programming as specified in Section 25 15 00.

E. Provide network card approved by BAS manufacturer to support Supervisory LANcommunications (10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP) for OWSs connected to the LocalSupervisory LAN and network card or LANID where connected to the Primary ControllerLAN.

F. Provide additional hardware, video drivers, serial port, etc., to facilitate all control functionsand software requirements specified for the BAS.

IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE CONTROL SYSTEM SERVER AND OWS’S BE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND/OR THEIR LOCATION CLEARLY DEFINED. EDIT THE FOLLOWING AS APPLICABLE.

G. Operator Workstations shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings or as directed byOwner.

2.03 CONTROL SYSTEM SERVER (CSS)

VERIFY WITH OWNER IF A CSS EXISTS FOR USE ON THIS PROJECT.

A. Owner will provide a virtual server for use by controls vendor..

2.04 PORTABLE OPERATOR TERMINAL (POT) / REMOTE WORKSTATION

A. Equipment listed below is representative of recent hardware requirements. Consultwith BMS Project Manager regarding current portable terminal specifications

B. Portable Operator Terminal shall support system management by connection to thecontrollers, by connection via the Internet, and by dial-up communications while serving asthe remote workstation.



C. Provide one notebook personal computer (PC) that meets or exceeds the minimumrequirements of the BAS software and meets or exceeds the minimum requirements ofUNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON. Notebook PC shall contain a 24X/24X/24X/8X CD-RW/DVDROM Combo Drive.

D. Provide a 10/100 LAN+56K CardBus Type III PC Card if internal adapter is not present.

E. Provide minimum 14.1 inch XGA active matrix display.

F. Provide carrying case and extra battery.

G. Operating system for operator workstation shall meet or exceed the minimumrequirements of the BAS software and shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements ofUNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON.. Provide software, graphics and programming as specified inSection 25 15 00.

H. Provide additional hardware, video drivers, serial ports, etc., to facilitate all controlfunctions and software requirements specified for the building automation system.

I. Provide all controller configuration and interface software and/or plug ins for all devicesapplicable. All shall be loaded and functional. Provide all required interface cables requiredto connect to all networks, routers, controllers, SDs etc.

J. Wherever a POT connection point is not accessible in the same room as the devicecontrolled, Contractor shall provide a wireless system, to permit configuration, testing andoperation.

K. Include licensing for all software packages.

1. BAS licensing for this POT shall allow unlimited access to all aspects of the anymanufacturer’s system including system access, workstations, points, programming,database management, graphics etc.

2. No restrictions shall be placed on the license.

3. All operator interface, programming environment, networking, database managementand any other software used by the Contractor to install the system or needed to operatethe system to its full capabilities shall be licensed to and provided to the Owner.Warranties for upgrades to software for five years shall be included.

2.05 PRINTER (NOT REQUIRED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION



C. Set up workstations and printers as indicated on the Drawings. Install all software andverify that the systems are fully operational. Ensure licensing is provided for all software.



D. No license, software component, key, etc or any piece of information required for installing, configuring, operating, diagnosing and maintaining the system shall be withheld from the Owner.

E. Install electronic control system Operation and Maintenance Manuals, programming guides, network configuration tools, and control Shop Drawings etc. on each OWS and CSS. Provide interface or shortcuts to guide user to the appropriate information.

F. Set up portable operator terminal and configure it as the remote workstation. Install all software and verify that the system is fully operational.


University of Houston Master Construction Specifications Insert Project Name

AE Project Number: BAS Basic Materials, Interfaces, Sensors - Retrofit 25 11 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 11 10 – BAS BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS - (RETROFIT)

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 25 11 00 BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and Sensors

C. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems

D. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications, ElectronicSafety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, andthis Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions also may be reciprocallyapplicable to this Section. Building automation system requirements may be specified, but notlimited to, the following Sections when applicable:

1. Packaged engine generator system.

2. Fuel oil piping system.

3. Hot water boilers.

4. Computer room air conditioning units.

5. Automatic transfer switch.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. This Section applies to situations where controls are being replaced on existingequipment but not where core equipment is being replaced.

2. Pneumatic Tubing

3. Wiring.

4. Control Valves and Actuators.

5. Control Dampers and Actuators.

6. Control Panels.

7. Sensors.

8. Pneumatic Control Components (Gauges, Switches, Relays, etc.)

9. Electric Control Components (Switches, EP Valves, Thermostats, Relays, etc.).

10. Transducers.

11. Current Switches.



12. Nameplates.

13. Testing Equipment.

B. Refer to Section 25 00 10 for general requirements.

C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems; not Work of this Section.

D. Provide the following electrical Work as Work of this Section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections:

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.

2. Interlock wiring between electrically interlocked devices, sensors, and between a hand or auto position of motor starters as indicated for all mechanical and controls.

3. Wiring associated with annunciator and alarm panels (remote alarm panels) and connections to their associated field devices.

4. All other necessary wiring for fully complete and functional control system as specified.





1.04 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Control Valves furnished under this Section shall be installed under the applicable piping Section in accordance with the valve manufacturer’s published installation instructions under the direction of the BAS Provider who will be fully responsible for the proper operation of the valve.

B. Control Dampers furnished under this Section shall be installed under the applicable air distribution or air handling equipment Section under the direction of the BAS Provider who will be fully responsible for the proper operation of the damper.

C. Water Pressure Taps, Thermal Wells, Flow Switches, Flow Meters, etc. that will have wet surfaces, shall be installed under the applicable piping Section under the direction of the BAS Provider who will be fully responsible for the proper installation and application.

D. Variable Frequency Drives furnished under section 23 05 13 shall be provided with serial communication protocol information specific to the selected BAS Provider. BAS Provider shall be fully responsible to interface and make available VFD information in the building automation system as monitor only information. Control of the VFD shall meet controller standalone requirements of Section 25.



E. Controlled Equipment Power Wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 26.Where control involves 120 volt (V) control devices controlling 120V equipment, Division 26Contractor shall extend power wiring to the equipment. BAS Provider shall extend it from theequipment to the control device.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL



A. Control Air Supply: Contractor may reuse existing control air in buildings where pneumaticcontrols will be reused

1. Branch Air Piping (to include main air between field control panels and field devices:

a. Seamless copper tubing, Type K or L, ASTM B 88; with cast-bronze solder jointfittings, ANSI B1.18; or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings, ANSI B16.22; exceptbrass compression-type fittings at connections to equipment. Solder shall be 95/5tin antimony, or other suitable lead free composition solder.

b. Virgin polyethylene non-metallic tubing type FR, ASTM D 2737 encased in EMT.Tubing outside diameter size shall be not less than the larger of ¼ inch or theinstrument connection size

2. Branch Air Piping Termination, Concealed Air Piping, And Tubing Within Control Panels:

a. Virgin polyethylene non-metallic tubing type FR, ASTM D 2737. Use compressionor push-on brass fittings. Branch air piping terminations length shall not exceed 24inches.

B. General: Provide electronic and electric control products in sizes and capacities indicated,consisting of valves, dampers, controllers, sensors, and other components as required forcomplete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standardmaterials and components as published in their product information; designed andconstructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for application indicated.

C. Communication Wiring and BAS low voltage wiring/cables: All wiring shall be in accordancewith the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26. Wiring/cables shall beprovided in a customized color jacketing material. Material color shall be as specified insection 27 05 53 (Identification for Low-Voltage Cables).

1. Contractor shall supply all communication wiring between Building Controllers, Routers,Gateways, AAC’s, ASC’s and local and remote peripherals outside the UNIVERSITY OFHOUSTON IT infrastructure. (e.g., operator workstations, printers, and modems).

2. Local Supervisory LAN: For any portions of this network required under this Section ofthe Specification, Contractor shall comply with Division 27 Communication specifications.Network shall be run with no splices and separate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts.



3. Secondary Controller LANs: Communication wiring shall be individually 100 percentshielded pairs per manufacturer’s recommendations for distances installed, with overallPVC cover, Class 2, plenum-rated run with no splices and separate from any wiring overthirty (30) volts. Shield shall be terminated and wiring shall be grounded asrecommended by building controller manufacturer.

a. Wet / Damp Locations – Wiring in underground raceways or raceways which aresubject to moderate degrees of moisture shall be listed for installation in wetlocations. Direct burial wiring without a raceway is prohibited.

D. Signal Wiring: Contractor shall run all signal wiring in accordance with the latest edition ofthe National Electrical Code and Division 26.

1. Signal wiring to all field devices, including, but not limited to, all sensors, transducers,transmitters, switches, etc. shall be twisted, 100 percent shielded pair, minimum 18-gagewire, with PVC cover. Signal wiring shall be run with no splices and separate from anywiring above thirty (30) volts.


2. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at controller end only unless otherwiserecommended by the controller manufacturer.

E. Low Voltage Analog Output Wiring: Contractor shall run all low voltage control wiring inaccordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26.

1. Low voltage control wiring shall be 18-gage. Wiring size for RJ-11 and RJ-45 connectorsshall be 22-gage, twisted pair, 100 percent shielded, with PVC cover, Class 2 plenum-rated. Low voltage control wiring shall be run with no splices separate from any wiringabove thirty (30) volts.


F. Control Panels: Provide control panels with suitable brackets for wall mounting, unless notedotherwise, for each control system. Locate panel adjacent to systems served. Mount centerof control panels [60 inches – confirm with Owner] above finished floor or roof. [Refer toFigures A and B at end of Section]

G.

1. Interior: Fabricate panels of 16-gage furniture-grade steel, totally enclosed on four sides,with removable perforated backplane, hinged door and keyed lock, with manufacturer'sstandard shop-painted finish and color. Panel / enclosure shall be sized to provideadequate mounting space for all components plus a minimum of 25% spare backplanecapacity. All components shall have a minimum of 2 inch clearance from the four sides ofthe panel unless factory wired and designed otherwise.

2. Exterior: 16-gage 304 or 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosure. Panel shall havehinged door, keyed lock, and integral, thermostatically controlled heater. Provide hingeddeadfront inside panel when flush-mounted control and/or indicating devices are includedin panel. Fiberglass or aluminum, as applicable, to be used when gases that are beingused in the panel area are corrosive to stainless steel.



3. Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices.

4. Control panel shall be completely factory wired and piped, and all electrical connectionsmade to a terminal strip. Wire nuts are not acceptable in exposed area of panel. High andlow voltage cables shall be isolated from each other.

5. All gauges and control components shall be identified by means of nameplates or Ownerapproved equivalent.

6. All control tubing and wiring shall be run neatly and orderly in open slot wiring duct withcover. (Electrical wireway shall be located underneath panel to run wire, allowing wiringto enter from below.)

7. Provide a 6 inch x 6 inch minimum wireway (metal wiring/tubing) trough across the entirewidth of the panel mounted to the bottom of the panel with close nipples of sufficient sizefor additional 50 percent wiring and tubing capacity. Wireways shall not be less than 24inches in length. Control panel wiring shall be installed and distributed in the wireway tominimize routing of wiring and tubing within the control panel. Wireway construction tobe the same as the associated control panel.

8. Complete wiring and tubing termination Drawings shall be mounted in, and a second setmounted adjacent to, each panel in a frame with lexan cover of sufficient size to be easilyreadable.

2.03 CONTROL VALVES

A. General:

1. Provide factory fabricated control valves of type, body material and pressure classindicated on the ‘Control Valve Specification Sheet’ located at the end of this Section.Control valves for chilled water and heating water coils shall be pressure independenttype, Contractor shall utilize the sheet to submit the control valves for the Project.

2. Valves shall be as manufactured by Belimo, Siemens, Fisher Controls International,Valtek Control Products, DeZurik/Copes-Vulcan, Keystone, Leslie Controls Inc., or equal.

3. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined bymanufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximumpressure and temperature in piping system.

4. Provide pressure independent valve size in accordance valve manufacturer’srecommendations. Provide pressure dependent valve size in accordance with scheduledor specified maximum pressure drop across control valve.

5. Control valves shall be equipped with heavy-duty actuators and pilot positioners withproper close-off rating and capability for each individual application. Pressureindependent control valves shall be provided with actuators manufactured, andwarranted by the valve manufacturer. Entire valve/actuator assembly shall be warrantedfor 5 years; first two years shall be unconditional.

6. Minimum close-off rating shall be as scheduled and adequate for each application, andshall generally be considered at dead head rating of the pump.



7. Pressure independent control valves shall be provided with one (1) service tool or one (1)copy of service software for use in commissioning these valves. Service tool or softwareshall be provided to TAB contractor, and subsequently transferred to Owner’sRepresentative with job Record Documents. Pressure independent control valvemanufacturer shall provide one (1) hour of training in the use of the service tool/servicesoftware to TAB personnel and BAS personnel prior to the start of the commissioningprocess. Pressure independent control valve manufacturer shall provide one (1) hour oftraining in the use of the service tool/service software to Owner’s personnel as part of therequired BAS training.

2.04 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. General: Provide factory fabricated automatic control dampers of sizes, velocity andpressure classes as required for smooth, stable, and controllable airflow. Provide parallel oropposed blade dampers as recommended by manufacturer’s sizing techniques. Fordampers located near fan outlets, provide dampers rated for fan outlet velocity and close-offpressure, and recommended by damper manufacturer for fan discharge damper service.Control dampers used for smoke dampers shall comply with UL 555S. Control Dampersused for fire dampers shall comply with UL 555.

B. For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities notgreater than 1500 feet per minute (fpm) (7.62 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 2.5inches w.c. (622 Pa):


2. Frames: Galvanized steel, 16-gage minimum thickness, welded or riveted with cornerreinforcement.

3. Blades: Stainless steel in lab exhausts and galvanized steel elsewhere, maximum bladesize 8 inches (200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) shafts with set screws, 16 gage minimum thickness.

4. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomer, mechanically attached, field replaceable.


6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze, graphite impregnated nylon sleeve orother molded synthetic sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings.



9. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 1500 fpm. (7.62 m/s)and 1 inches wg. (249Pa).

10. Maximum Pressure Differential: 2.5 inches wg. (622 Pa).


12. Where opening size is larger than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide or 72 inches (1829 mm)high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with intermediate frames and jackshaftsappropriate for installation.



C. For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities not greater than 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 6 inches w.c. (1493 Pa):



3. Blades: Extruded aluminum hollow airfoil shape, maximum blade size 8 inches (200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) shafts, 14 gage minimum extrusion thickness.

4. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric, mechanically attached, field replaceable.


6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze sleeve, graphite impregnated nylon sleeve, molded synthetic sleeve, or stainless steel sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings.



9. Leakage: Less than 0.1 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 fpm. (20.3 m/s) and 1 inches wg. (249Pa).



12. Where opening size is larger than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide or 72 inches (1829 mm) high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with intermediate frames and jackshafts appropriate for the installation.

D. For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities not greater than 4000 fpm, differential pressure not greater than 12 inches w.c.:



3. Blades: Extruded aluminum hollow airfoil shape, maximum blade size 8 inches (200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) shafts with set screws.

4. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or stainless steel, pressed into frame, with thrust washers at bearings.

5. Linkage: 10-gage minimum thickness galvanized steel clevis type crank arms, 3/16 inch x 3/4 inch (4.76 mm x 19 mm) minimum thickness tie rods.




7. Leakage: Less than 0.2 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s) and1 inches wg. (249Pa) differential pressure.




E. For general isolation and modulating control service in round ducts up to 40 inches in size atvelocities not greater than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 4inches w.c. (994 Pa):


2. Frames: Rolled 12 gage steel strip for sizes 6 inch and smaller, rolled 14 gage steelchannel for larger sizes, galvanized or aluminum finish.

3. Blades: Steel construction, 12 gage minimum thickness for dampers less than 18 inches(457 mm) in size, 10 gage minimum thickness for larger dampers.


5. Shaft: ½ inch (12.7 mm) diameter zinc or cadmium plated steel.


7. Leakage: Less than 0.2 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 fpm. (20.3 m/s) and1 inches wg. (249Pa) differential pressure.



F. For general isolation and modulating control service in round ducts up to 60 inches in size atvelocities not greater than 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 6inches w.c. (1492 Pa):


2. Frames: Rolled 10-gage steel channel for sizes 48 inch and smaller, rolled 3/16 inch(4.76 mm) thick steel channel for larger sizes, galvanized or aluminum finish.

3. Blades: Steel construction, 10-gage minimum thickness for dampers not greater than 48inches in size, ¼ inch (6.35 mm) minimum thickness for larger dampers.

4. Blade stops: ½ inch x ¼ inch (12.7 mm x 6.35 mm) full circumference steel bar.


6. Shaft: Zinc or cadmium plated steel, angle reinforcing as necessary.







2.05 ACTUATORS

A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified. Select spring-return actuators with manual override to provide positive shut-off of devices as they are applied.

B. Actuators:


2. Two Position Electric Actuators: Line voltage (120 volt, 24 volt) with spring return. Provide end switches as required.

3. Modulating Electronic Actuators: Provide actuators with spring return for 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10Vdc, and 4-20 mA on valves greater than 1 inch. 3-point floating actuators for terminal units are to fail in place unless specified otherwise. Actuators shall travel full stroke in less than 150 seconds. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have positive positioning circuit where indicated. [Parallel actuators on a single valve are allowed only if written approval is given by Owner]. Actuators shall have current limiting motor protection. Actuators shall have manual override. Modulating actuators for valves shall have minimum rangeability of 40 to 1.

a. Close-Off Pressure: Provide the minimum torque required, and spring return for fail positioning (unless otherwise specifically indicated) sized for required close-off pressure. Required close-off pressure for two-way water valve applications shall be the shutoff head of associated pump. Required close-off rating of steam valve applications shall be design inlet steam pressure plus 50 percent for low pressure steam, and 10 percent for high pressure steam. Required close-off rating of air damper applications shall be shutoff pressure of associated fan, plus 10 percent.

b. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers are as follows:

1) Siemens.

2) Automated Logic.

3) Belimo.

4) Johnson Controls.

5) Delta.

6) Substitutions: By written approval from Owner.



2.06 GENERAL FIELD DEVICES

A. Provide field devices for input and output of digital (binary) and analog signals into controllers(BCs, AACs, ASCs). Provide signal conditioning for all field devices as recommended byfield device manufacturers and as required for proper operation in the system.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that all field devices are compatible withcontroller hardware and software.

C. Field devices specified herein are generally ‘two-wire’ type transmitters, with power for thedevice to be supplied from the respective controller. If the controller provided is not equippedto provide this power, is not designed to work with ‘two-wire’ type transmitters, if field deviceis to serve as input to more than one controller, or where the length of wire to the controllerwill unacceptably affect the accuracy, the Contractor shall provide ‘four-wire’ type equaltransmitter and necessary regulated DC power supply or 120 VAC power supply, as required.

D. For field devices specified hereinafter that require signal conditioners, signal boosters, signalrepeaters, or other devices for proper interface to controllers, Contractor shall furnish andinstall proper device, including 120V power as required. Such devices shall have accuracyand repeatability equal to, or better than, the accuracy and repeatability listed for respectivefield devices.

E. Accuracy: As stated in this Section, accuracy shall include combined effects of nonlinearity,nonrepeatability and hysteresis.

2.07 VFD SERIAL COMMUNICATION

A. VFD Serial communications shall include, but not be limited to monitor the following feedbacksignals:

1. Process variable.

2. Output speed/frequency.

3. Current

4. Torque

5. Power (kW)

6. Operating hours

7. Kilowatt hours (kWh)

8. Relay outputs

9. Diagnostic warning and fault information

2.08 TEMPERATURE SENSORS (TS)

A. Sensor Type Selection

1. Certified Control and Monitoring sensors shall require a matching class A RTD andtransmitter pair which is factory calibrated and installed for the following application:

a. Dedicated building side immersion CHW supply temperature sensor for each heatexchanger.



b. TECO CHW immersion supply and return temperature sensors.

c. Dedicated averaging final supply air temperature sensor for all AHU greater than20,000 CFM.

d. CHW and HW temperature sensors used for BTU calculation.

e. Other certified temperature sensors identified in the construction documents.

2. Standard Control and Monitoring sensors shall be utilized for all other sensors notidentified as Certified Control and Monitoring sensors.

B. Sensor resolution: When matched with A/D converter of BC, AAC/ASC, or SD, sensor rangeshall provide a resolution of no worse than 0.2 degrees F (unless noted otherwise). Wherethermistors are used, the stability shall be better than 0.25 degrees F over five (5) years.

C. Room Temperature Sensor: Shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover,suitable for wall mounting, unless noted otherwise. Provide insulated base. Sensor color andtype shall match surrounding existing sensor when applicable. Following sensing elementsare acceptable:

1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, ±0.6 degrees Faccuracy at calibration point.

2. Provide setpoint adjustment where indicated. The setpoint adjustment shall be awarmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BAS.

3. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure where indicated.This shall be a momentary contact closure.

4. Provide current temperature indication via an LCD or LED readout, where indicated.

D. Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor: Application allowed on supply air volumes of 2000CFM or less and non-critical return air readings. Shall consist of sensing element, junctionbox for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. Temperaturerange as required for resolution indicated.

1. Sensing element shall be 100 Ohm platinum RTD which transmits a 4 to 20 mA outputsignal. The accuracy of this sensor shall be ± 0.7 degrees F. This type of sensor does notrequire field calibration and shall be replaced if tolerance of ± 1.4 degrees F is exceeded.

2. 10,000 ohms sensing element shall be allowed for the auxiliary temperature sensor forair terminal application specific controllers. Temperature range 55-95 Deg F. Mid RangeAccuracy + (-) 0.5 Deg F. Sensor shall be secured in place with a minimum of a 2x4metal enclosure.

E. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of an averaging element, junction box forwiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantitiesto result in one lineal foot of sensing element for each three square feet of cooling coil/ductface area. Provide a minimum of two sensors when coil/duct face area exceeds 149 squarefeet. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated.

1. Sensing element shall be class A 100 Ohm platinum RTD which transmits a 4 to 20 mAoutput signal.



a. Standard Control and Monitoring: The accuracy of this sensor shall be ± 0.7 degrees F. This type of sensor does not require field calibration and shall be replaced if tolerance of ± 1.4 degrees F is exceeded

b. Certified Control and Monitoring” The accuracy of this matched paired sensor shall be ± 0.2 degrees F. This sensor shall be factory calibrated and shall be replaced if field tolerance of ± 0.3 degrees F is exceeded. Provide to owner the manufacturer’s matched pair certificate of temperature uncertainty at 25%, 50% and 75% of temperature span of the unit

F. Liquid immersion temperature sensor shall include brass thermowell (with thermally-conductive paste), sensor and connection head for wiring connections. Temperature range shall be as required to fit the application

1. Sensing element shall be class A100 Ohm platinum RTD which transmits a 4 to 20 mA output signal..

a. Standard Control and Monitoring: The accuracy of this sensor shall be ± 0.6 degrees F. This type of sensor shall be factory calibrated and shall be replaced if tolerance of ± 0.9 degrees F is exceeded.

b. Certified Control and Monitoring: The accuracy of this matched paired sensor shall be ± 0.2 degrees F. This type of sensor shall be factory calibrated and shall be replaced if field tolerance of ± 0.3 degrees F is exceeded. Provide to owner the manufacturer’s matched pair certificate of temperature uncertainty at 25%, 50% and 75% of temperature span of the unit.

G. Pipe Surface-Mount Temperature Sensor: Shall be used only where indicated or by written approval by Owner. Sensor shall include metal junction box and clamps and shall be suitable for sensing pipe surface temperature and installation under insulation. Provide thermally conductive paste at pipe contact point.

1. Sensing element shall be 100 Ohm platinum RTD which transmits a 4 to 20 mA output signal. The accuracy of this sensor shall be ± 1.1 degrees F on a range of 30 - 250 degrees F scale. This sensor shall be factory calibrated and shall be replaced if tolerance of ± 0.9 degrees F is exceeded.

H. Outside air sensors shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage.

1. Sensing element shall be 100 Ohm platinum RTD which transmits a 4 to 20 mA output signal. The accuracy of this sensor shall be ± 0.6 degrees F. This type of sensor does not require field calibration and shall be replaced if tolerance of ± 1.2 degrees F is exceeded.

2.09 HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS

A. Units shall be suitable for their application. Unit shall be two-wire transmitter utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance change humidity sensor. Unit shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for percent relative humidity (% RH). A combination temperature and humidity sensor may be used for zone level monitoring. Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application criteria:

1. Input Range: 0 to 100% RH.

2. Accuracy (% RH): ±2 percent between 20-90% RH at 77 degrees F, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability.



3. Sensor Operating Range: As required by application.

4. Long Term Stability: Less than 1 percent drift per year.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Units shall be Siemens, Vaisala HM Series, General Eastern,Microline, or Hy-Cal HT Series.

2.10 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DP)

A. Liquid, Steam and Gas:

1. General: Two-wire smart DP cell type transmitter, 4-20 mA linear output, adjustable spanand zero, stainless steel wetted parts.

2. Ambient Limits: 0 to 175 degrees F.

3. Process Limits: 0 to 175 degrees F.

4. Accuracy: Less than 0.3 percent.


6. Vibration Effect: Less than ±0.1 percent of upper range limit from 15 to 2000 Hz in anyaxis relative to pipe mounted process conditions.



9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra, Rosemount Inc. 3051 Series, Foxboro, Johnson-Yokagawa.

B. General Purpose Low Pressure Air: Generally for each measurement of duct pressure, filterdifferential pressure or constant volume air velocity pressure measurement where the rangeis applicable. Sensor shall be in range at all times.

1. General: Loop powered two-wire differential capacitance cell-type transmitter.

2. Output: Two wire 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.


4. Minimum Range: 0.1 inches w.c.

5. Maximum Range: 10 inches w.c.


7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Units shall be Setra,




9. Magnehelic Gauges: Provide Dwyer Series 200 Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauge (or equal) for each DP transmitter for filter differential pressure. Provide gauge, mounting bracket, ¼ inch aluminum tubing, static pressure tips, and molded plastic vent valves for each gauge connection. Select range for specified recommended filter loading pressure drop to be 75 percent full-scale. For other DP transmitters select range for specified setpoint to be between 25 percent and 75 percent full-scale.

2.11 VALVE BYPASS FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Provide a five valve bypass kit for protection of DP sensors where the static on the pipe can cause on over pressure when connected to one port with the other at atmospheric pressure. Kit shall include high and low pressure isolation valves, high and low pressure vent valves, calibration taps, and a bypass valve contained in a NEMA 1 enclosure.

2.12 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES (DPS)

A. General Service Auto Reset - Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap acting form C contacts rated for the application. Provide manufacturer's recommended static pressure sensing tips and connecting tubing. Acceptable Manufacturer - Dwyer Series 1900 or approved equal.

B. General Service Manual Reset - Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap acting form C contacts rated for the application. Manual reset shall be readily accessible in reach of personnel installed at height not to exceed 5 feet above finished floor. Provide manufacturer's recommended static pressure sensing tips and connecting tubing. Acceptable Manufacturer - Dwyer Series 1900 or approved equal. The High Static Pressure Safety Switch shall alarm to the Building Automation System upon activation.

C. General Service - Water: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint, 2 psig or adjustable differential and snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. 60 psid minimum pressure differential range and 0 degrees F to 160 degrees F operating temperature range.

2.13 PRESSURE SWITCHES (PS)

A. Diaphragm or bourdon tube with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. Pressure switches shall be capable of withstanding 150 percent of rated pressure.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Siemens, Square D, ITT Neo-Dyn, ASCO, Penn, Honeywell, and Johnson Controls.

2.14 TRANSDUCERS

A. Consult Owner for direction in the application of Transducers.

B. Standard Capacity Electronic-to-Pneumatic (E-P) Transducers: E-P transducers shall be Voltage-to-Pneumatic (V-P) type, Current-to-Pneumatic (I-P) type [PNEUMATICS ALLOWED IN RETROFIT APPLICATIONS ONLY]:

1. Electrical Power Supply: 24 Vac or 24 Vdc.

2. Pneumatic Air Supply: 30 psig (2.07 bar) maximum

3. Air Capacity: 1100 scim @ 20 psig (300 cm3/sec @ 1.4 bar).

4. Air Consumption: Zero at steady state.



5. Output Span: 0-20 psig (0-1.4 bar).

6. Input: 4-20 mA, 0-5 Vdc, 1-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, 0-15 Vdc, or 3-15 Vdc input.

7. Gauges: Provide with main and branch air gauges

8. Enclosure: Polymer designed for surface or panel mount. Provide with main air andbranch air gauges.

9. Air Connections: ¼ inch (6.35 mm) barbed.

10. Failure Mode on Power Loss: Non-failsafe transducers shall have no output air loss.Failsafe transducers shall exhaust output upon power loss.

11. Acceptable Manufacturers: RE Technologies Model UCP-522.

C. Consult Owner for direction in the application of Transducers.

D. Electronic-to-Pneumatic (E-P) Transducers: E-P transducers shall be Voltage-to-Pneumatic(V-P) type, Current-to-Pneumatic (I-P) type, Phase cut Type [PNEUMATICS ALLOWED INRETROFIT APPLICATIONS ONLY]:

1. Electrical Power Supply: 24 Vac or 24 Vdc, 100 mA.

2. Accuracy: +/- 1 percent.

3. Feedback: Branch pressure feedback from an on board pressure sensor - VDCFeedback.

4. Override: Manual Potentiometer.

5. Pneumatic Air Supply: 25-30 psig (2.07 bar) maximum.

6. Air Capacity: .5 scim @ 20 psig (300 cm3/sec @ 1.4 bar).

7. Air Consumption: None.

8. Output Span: 3-15 psig factory set field adjustable.

9. Input: 4-20 mA, 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, 0-18 Vdc, 0-20V Phase Cut input.

10. Gauges: Provide with main and branch air gauges.

11. Enclosure: NEMA 1. Provide with main air and branch air gauges.

12. Air Connections: ¼ inch (6.35 mm) barbed brass.

13. Failure Mode on Power Loss: Non-failsafe transducers shall have no output air loss.Failsafe transducers shall exhaust output upon power loss.

14. Acceptable Manufacturers: TRIATEK CP-3000.

2.15 CURRENT SWITCHES (CS)

A. Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch (for Motor Status Indication):



1. Range: 3.5 to 135 amps.




5. Approvals: UL, CSA.

6. Maximum Cable Size: 350 MCM.

7. Manufacturers: Veris Industries H-608, H-904, H-908.

a. Veris Model Number H-608 restricted to constant speed motors rated 40 horsepower or less.

b. Veris Model Number H-904 required on VFD motors.

B. Variable Speed Status: Contractor shall utilize programmable status contacts from the VSD where applicable.

2.16 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT)

A. Clamp-On Design Current Transformer (for Motor Current Sensing)

1. Range: 1-10 amps minimum, 20-200 amps maximum.


3. Output: 0-5 VDC.

4. Accuracy: ±0.2 percent from 20 to 100 Hz.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: KELE SA100.

[ENGINEER MUST REFER TO THE BAS MASTER SPECIFICATION SECTION 25 11 10 FOR THE FOLLOWING APPLICATIONS IF NEEDED:

AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS (AFMS)

ULTRASONIC FLOW METER FOR WATER SERVICE

ULTRASONIC FLOW METER FOR STEAM SERVICE

INSERTION TYPE TURBINE METER FOR WATER SERVICE

VORTEX SHEDDING FLOW METER FOR LIQUID, STEAM AND GAS SERVICE

MAGNETIC FLOW METER FOR WATER SERVICE

VENTURI FLOW METER FOR WATER SERVICE

REFRIGERANT MONITOR]



2.17 CO2 SENSORS/TRANSMITTERS (CO2)

A. General: CO2 sensors shall use silicon based, diffusion aspirated, infrared single beam,dual-wavelength sensor.

B. Accuracy: ±100 ppm.

C. Stability: 5 percent over 5 years.

D. Output: 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc or relay.

E. Mounting: Duct or Wall as indicated.

F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Vaisala, Inc. GMD20 (duct) or GMW20 (wall).

2.18 PNEUMATIC CONTROL COMPONENTS (RETROFIT ONLY)

A. Analog Pressure Gauges: Gauges shall be pneumatic type, minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)in diameter, with white face and black numerals. Surface-mounted gauges shall havechrome plated trim and be a minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) in diameter.

B. Pneumatic Actuated Pressure Switches (PE) (for 30 psig max pressure control systems):Pressure ranges and sensitivity of PEs shall match control system sequence of operation.Switch operation shall be externally adjustable over the operating pressure range (nominal 0-20 psig, 0 to 138 KPa). PE switches shall be SPDT type, rated for the particular application,and shall be UL listed. PE shall be as manufactured by Penn.

C. Pilot Positioners: Operating span adjustment range is from 3 to 15 psi (21 to 104 kPa), or asrequired for the actuator being served. Positioner shall be furnished with zero and spanadjustments and a mounting bracket for attachment directly to the actuator.

2.19 ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTS

A. Limit Switches (LS): Limit switches shall be UL listed, SPDT or DPDT type, with adjustabletrim arm. Limit switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley.

B. Low Temperature Detector (‘Freezestat’) (FZ): Low temperature detector shall consist of a‘cold spot’ element which responds only to the lowest temperature along any one foot ofentire element, minimum bulb size of 1/8 inch x 20 feet (3.2mm x 6.1m), junction box forwiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise, DPDT (4 wire, 2circuit) with manual reset. Manual reset shall be readily accessible in reach of personnelinstalled at height not to exceed 5 feet above finished floor. Temperature range 15 to 55degrees F (-9.4 to 12.8 degrees C), factory set at 38 degrees F. Provide sensor lengths andquantities to result in one lineal foot of sensing element for each five square feet of coolingcoil/duct face area. The Low Temperature Detector shall alarm to the Building AutomationSystem upon activation

C. High Temperature Detectors (‘Firestat’) (FS): High temperature detector shall consist of 3-pole contacts, a single point sensor, junction box for wiring connections and gasket toprevent air leakage of vibration noise, triple-pole, with manual reset. Temperature range 25to 215 degrees F (-4 to 102 degrees C).

D. Surface-Mounted Thermostat: Surface-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT contacts,operating temperature range of 50 to 150 degrees F (10 to 65 degrees C), and a minimum 10degrees F fixed setpoint differential.



E. Low Voltage Wall Thermostat: Wall-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT sealedcontacts, operating temperature range of 50 to 90 degrees F (10 to 32 degrees C), switchrating of 24 Vac (30 Vac maximum), and both manual and automatic fan operation in both theheat and cool modes.

F. Control Relays: All control relays shall be UL listed, with contacts rated for the application.

1. Control relays for use on electrical systems of 120 volts or less shall have, as a minimum,the following:

a. Pilot light indication of power-to-coil. Pilot light shall be visible from a standingposition of 5 feet AFF.

b. Coil rated for 50 and 60 Hz service.

c. Relays shall be labeled in a professional manner to identify the function or purposeper 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.. Coordinate with owner forapproved verbiage of labels

d. Acceptable Manufacturers: Relays shall be Functional Devices (RIB), PotterBrumfield, Model KRPA or approved equal.

2. Relays used for across-the-line control (start/stop) of 120V motors, 1/4 horsepower, and1/3 horsepower, shall be rated to break minimum 10 Amps inductive load. Relays shallbe IDEC or approved equal.

3. Relays used for stop/start control shall have low voltage coils (30 VAC or less), and shallbe provided with transient and surge suppression devices at the controller interface.

4. All safety circuits shall be installed to operate individual interposing relays located in theassociated equipment control panel. Each safety device (i.e. freezestat, DP safety,smoke detector, firestat, etc.) wiring circuit shall be installed with individual homerunsback to the associated control panel. See control Drawings for details.

G. General Purpose Power Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose magnetic contactor.ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, NEMA 1 enclosure. Manufacturer shall be Square 'D', Cutler-Hammeror Westinghouse.

H. Control Transformers: Furnish and install control transformers as required. Controltransformers shall be machine tool type, and shall be US and CSA listed. 120/24 VACtransformers shall be fused in accordance with the NEC. Transformer shall be properly sizedfor application, and mounted in minimum NEMA 1 air vented enclosure. Multiple transformersin a single enclosure shall have fan aided ventilation whenever ambient temperature exceeds140 deg F

1. Transformers shall be manufactured by Westinghouse, Square ‘D’, Jefferson orapproved equal.

I. Time Delay Relays (TDR): TDRs shall be capable of on or off delayed functions, withadjustable timing periods, and cycle timing light. Contacts shall be rated for the applicationwith a minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in a NEMA 1 enclosure.

1. TDRs shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one millionoperations. TDRs shall have solid state, plug-in type coils with transient suppressiondevices.



2. TDRs shall be UL and CSA listed, Crouzet type.

J. Electric Push Button Switch: Switch shall be momentary contact, oil tight, push button, with number of N.O. and/or N.C. contacts as required. Contacts shall be snap-action type, and rated for minimum 120 Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley or approved equal.

K. Pilot Light: Panel-mounted pilot light shall be NEMA ICS 2 oil tight, transformer type, with screw terminals, push-to-test unit, LED type, rated for 120 VAC. Unit shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley or approved equal.

L. Alarm Horn: Panel-mounted audible alarm horn shall be continuous tone, 120 Vac Sonalert solid-state electronic signal, as manufactured by Mallory or approved equal.

M. Electric Selector Switch (SS): Switch shall be maintained contact, NEMA ICS 2, oil-tight selector switch with contact arrangement, as required. Contacts shall be rated for minimum 120 Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley or approved equal.

2.20 NAMEPLATES

A. Provide engraved phenolic or micarta nameplates for all equipment, components, and field devices furnished. Nameplates shall be 1/8 inch thick, black, with white center core, and shall be minimum 1 inch x 3 inch, with minimum ¼ inch high block lettering. Nameplates for devices smaller than 1 inch x 3 inch shall be attached to adjacent surface.

B. Each nameplate shall identify the function for each device.

2.21 TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall test and calibrate all signaling circuits of all field devices to ascertain that required digital and accurate analog signals are transmitted, received, and displayed at system operator terminals, and make all repairs and recalibrations required to complete test. Contractor shall be responsible for test equipment required to perform these tests and calibrations. Test equipment used for testing and calibration of field devices shall be at least twice as accurate as respective field device (e.g., if field device is ±0.5 percent accurate, test equipment shall be ±0.25 percent accurate over same range).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION



C. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, roughing-in Drawings and details shown on Drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and all local codes.

D. Control Wiring: The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connection of electric control devices.



1. Wiring System: Install complete wiring system for electric control systems. Concealwiring exposed in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping areexposed. Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines. Install in accordancewith the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26. Fasten flexibleconductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect againstabrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly.

2. Control Wiring Conductors: Install control wiring conductors, without splices betweenterminal points, color-coded. Install in neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened.Install in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division26.

3. Communication wiring, signal wiring and low voltage control wiring shall be installedseparate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded atcontroller end only, unless otherwise recommended by the controller manufacturer.

4. All WAN and LAN patch cords shall be approved and installed as directed by owner.

5. BAS low voltage wiring/cables: All cables shall have legible printed sleeve identificationlabels at each device and the panel termination.

a. Labels shall be high temperature permasleeve (TM) Brady PermaSleeve TM, partnumber - "BPSPT-187-175-WT” or owner approved equivalent.

b. Each label shall be identified with the entire BAS point name utilized in the BASdatabase and the point address.

6. Terminate all control wiring internal to panels to screw terminals connections or ownerapproved wire connection equivalent. Wire nuts and/or splices are not allowed in panels.When terminating a wire cable, the cable jacket, cable shielding wire, and cable shieldingmaterial shall be finished in a neat consistent workmanlike manner.

7. Install all control wiring external to panels in electric metallic tubing or raceway.Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines. Provide steel type connectors.Install wiring in galvanized rigid steel conduit at all exterior locations and where subjectedto moisture. Install in PVC Schedule 40 conduit if encased in concrete. All conduitspenetrating partitions, walls or floors shall be sealed with a submitted and approvedfire/smoke sealant to prevent migration of air through the conduit system.

8. Communication wiring, signal wiring and low voltage control wiring may be run withoutconduit in concealed, accessible locations if noise immunity is ensured.

a. Contractor shall be fully responsible for noise immunity and rewire in conduit ifelectrical or RF noise affects performance.

b. Accessible locations are defined as areas inside mechanical equipmentenclosures, such as heating and cooling units, instrument panels etc.; inaccessible pipe chases with easy access, or suspended ceilings with easy access.Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines.



c. Run in a neat and orderly fashion, bundled where applicable, and completely suspended (strapped to rigid elements or routed through wiring rings) away from areas of normal access. Tie and support conductors neatly with suitable nylon ties and not to exceed five (5) foot intervals. Communication wiring may not be bundled with electrical nor with fire alarm wiring. All in-wall communication wiring must be run in a ¾”minimum conduit. Wiring passing thru a fire-rated partition must be fire-caulked.

d. Conductors shall not be supported by the ceiling system or ceiling support system. Conductors shall be pulled tight and be installed as high as practically possible in ceiling cavities. Wiring shall not be laid on the ceiling or duct.

e. Conductors shall not be installed between the top cord of a joist or beam and the bottom of roof decking.

9. Secondary LAN Communication cabling shall be provided in an Owner approved color dedicated to the BAS. All wiring shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 26. Wiring/cables shall be provided in a customized color jacketing material. Color coding shall be green or orange. Material and labeling hall be as specified in section 27 05 53 (IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS). http://www.uh.edu/facilities-planning-construction/vendor-resources/owners-design-criteria/master-specs/jan-2017/division27Jan2017updated.pdf#page=35.Number-code or color-code conductors appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. Code shall be as indicated on approved installation Drawings..

E. Control Valves: Install so that actuators, wiring, and tubing connections are accessible for maintenance. [Refer to Figure C at end of Section] Where possible, install with valve stem axis vertical, with operator side up. Where vertical stem position is not possible or would result in poor access, valves may be installed with stem horizontal. Do not install valves with stem below horizontal, or down.

F. Averaging Temperature Sensors: Cover no more than two square feet per linear foot of sensor length except where indicated. Manufacturer recommended mounting clips shall be used to support and prevent any movement of the sensing probe in the air flow. Generally, where flow is sufficiently homogeneous/adequately mixed at sensing location, consult Engineer of Record for requirements.

G. Fluid Flow Sensors: Install per manufacturer’s recommendations in an unobstructed straight length of pipe.

H. Relative Humidity Sensors: Provide element guard as recommended by manufacturer for high velocity installations. For high limit sensors, position remote enough to allow full moisture absorption into the air stream before reaching the sensor.

I. Water Differential Pressure Transmitters: Provide 5 valve bypass arrangement to protect against over pressure damaging the transmitter.

J. Steam Differential Pressure Transmitters: Install per manufacturer’s instructions at location as shown on the Drawings.

K. Pipe Surface Mount Temperature Sensors: Install with thermally conductive paste at pipe contact point. Where sensor is to be installed on an insulated pipe Contractor shall neatly cut insulation install sensor, repair or replace insulation and vapor barrier and adequately seal vapor barrier.






L. Flow Switches: Where possible, install in a straight run of pipe at least 15 diameters in lengthto minimize false indications.

M. Current Switches for Motor Status Monitoring: Adjust so that set point is below minimumoperating current and above motor no load current.

N. Supply Duct Pressure Transmitters:

1. General: Install pressure tips with at least four (4) ‘round equivalent’ duct diameters ofstraight duct with no takeoffs upstream. Install static pressure tips securely fastened withtip facing upstream in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Locatethe transmitter at an accessible location to facilitate calibration.

2. VAV System ‘Down-Duct’ Transmitters: Locate pressure tips approximately 2/3 of thehydraulic distance to the most remote terminal in the straightest run in the air system.

O. Cutting and Patching Insulation: Repair insulation to maintain integrity of insulation andvapor barrier jacket. Use hydraulic insulating cement to fill voids and finish with materialmatching or compatible with adjacent jacket material.

[FOR CRITICAL SERVICE CONTROL VALVE APPLICATIONS, ENGINEER SHALL COMPLETE THE APPLICABLE FOLLOWING FORMS FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL APPLICATION AND/OR VALVE. CONTROL VALVE SIZING AND SELECTION IS THE INITIAL RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ENGINEER AND NOT LEFT TO THE BAS PROVIDER. THE ITEMS NOTED WITH A * AND *,** SHALL BE COMPLETED BY THE ENGINEER TO LIST THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE VALVES FOR CV, CLOSE OFF, TEMPERATURE RATINGS, CAGE MATERIAL, SEAT MATERIAL, TRIM MATERIAL ETC. FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL APPLICATION. THIS SHOULD BE A RESULT OF ANALYZING THE VALVES PERFORMANCE AND APPLICATION ACROSS THE RANGE OF CONTROL. ENGINEER SHALL CONSULT WITH OWNER PRIOR TO SPECIFYING THESE VALVES.]




University of Houston Steam Control Valve Specification Sheet (Globe Body)

Project Name

REVISIONS SHEET xx of xx NO. BY DATE DESCRIPTION SPEC. NO. REVISION 1 15951 * 2 CONTRACT DATE 3 X mm/dd/yy 4 PROJECT NUMBER 5 XXXX.XX6 BY CHECKED APPROVED 7 XYZ XYZ XYZ

GENERAL


PROCESS DATA

Fluid Fluid State SATURATED STEAM <125

PSIG VAPOR Operating Condition Units Minimum Normal Maximum Other Flow Rate LB/HR * * * * Inlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Outlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Temperature DEG F * * * *

Mol. Wt. Sp. Wt Sp. Grav Viscosity Sp Heat



BODY

Style Size GLOBE xx" End Connection Rating xx" RF FLANGED ANSI CLASS 150 Port Size Travel * * Valve Cv Valve C1/Km * ** Body Matl. Bonnet ASTM A216 WCB ASTM A216 WCB Characteristic Trim Number EQUAL PERCENTAGE *,** Cage Matl. Retainer Matl. * * Seat Matl. Seat Ring Matl. *,** *,** Plug Matl. Stem Matl. *,** *,** Flow Action DOWN Gaskets SPIRAL METALLIC Stem Guide ** Packing GLASS FILLED PTFE** Required Seat Tightness ANSI CLASS IV Max. Allowable Sound Level (dBA) <75 dBA

ACTUATOR


POSITIONER





OPTIONS


SELECTION BASED ON

Manufacturer Fisher, Valtek, Dezurik-Copes, Leslie, Belimo Valve Model Number * Actuator Model No. * Positioner Model No. * Filter Regulator YES

NOTES

*, ** Engineer to consult with and use manufacturer’s recommended steam trim for the service, usually a hardened 400 series stainless steel. * Engineer shall fill in to suit application.** Vendor to confirm based on process data provided.




Project Name


GENERAL


PROCESS DATA

Fluid Fluid State WATER LIQUID Operating Condition Units Minimum Normal Maximum Other Flow Rate GPM * * * * Inlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Outlet Pressure PSIG * * * * Temperature DEG F * * * * Level FEET * * * * Mol. Wt. Sp. Wt Sp. Grav Viscosity Sp Heat



BODY


ACTUATOR


POSITIONER



OPTIONS


SELECTION BASED ON

Manufacturer Fisher, Valtek, Dezurik-Copes, Leslie, Belimo Valve Model Number * Actuator Model No. * Positioner Model No. *



Filter Regulator YES





Project Name


GENERAL


PROCESS DATA




BODY.


ACTUATOR


POSITIONER



OPTIONS


SELECTION BASED ON

Manufacturer Fisher, Valtek, Dezurik-Copes, Leslie, Belimo Valve Model Number * Actuator Model No. * Positioner Model No. *



Filter Regulator YES




University of Houston Water Control Valve Specification Sheet (Pressure Independent, ½”-2”)

Project Name


GENERAL


PROCESS DATA


BODY.

Style Size Pressure Independent xx" End Connection Rating xx" Female NPT 400 PSI Body Matl. Characteristic. Forged Brass, Nickel Plated Equal Percentage Char. Disc ½” & ¾” Char. Disc 1”-2” Brass TEFZEL® Diaphragm ½” & ¾” Diaphragm 1”-2” Silicone and Nomex Polyester Reinforced Silicone Seat Matl. Seat Ring Matl. Fiberglass reinforced Teflon® PTFE Viton®



Ball Matl. Stem Matl. Chrome Plated Brass Chrome Plated Brass Valve Action Rotary Regulator Components Stainless Steel, Brass, Delrin 500AF Spring Stainless Steel Packing 2 EPDM O-Rings Required Seat Tightness ANSI CLASS IV Max. Allowable Sound Level (dBA) <75 dBA

ACTUATOR

Type Electronic Size Bench Set * * Normal Position Fail Position CLOSE* CLOSE* Close At Open At 2 VDC 10 VDC Manual Overide *

OPTIONS Feedback YES* Position Switches * Service Tool/Software YES*

SELECTION BASED ON

Manufacturer Fisher, Valtek, Dezurik-Copes, Leslie, Belimo Valve Model Number * Actuator Model No. *




University of Houston Water Control Valve Specification Sheet (Pressure Independent, 2½”-6”)

Project Name


GENERAL


PROCESS DATA


BODY.

Style Size Pressure Independent xx" End Connection Rating xx" ANSI 125 Flange ANSI 125, Standard Class B Body Matl. Characteristic. Cast Iron-GG25 and Ductile Iron-GGG50 Equal Percentage Char. Disc 2”-3” Char. Disc 4”-6” Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Seat Matl. Seat Ring Matl. PTFE PTFE Ball Matl. Stem Matl. Stainless Steel Stainless Steel



Valve Action Rotary Packing 2 EPDM O-Rings Required Seat Tightness ANSI CLASS IV Max. Allowable Sound Level (dBA) <75 dBA

ACTUATOR

Type Electronic Size Bench Set * * Normal Position Fail Position CLOSE* CLOSE* Flow Sensor Type Magnetic Manual Overide *

OPTIONS Feedback YES*

Position Switches * Service Tool/Software YES*

SELECTION BASED ON

Manufacturer Fisher, Valtek, Dezurik-Copes, Leslie, Belimo Valve Model Number * Actuator Model No. *



AE Project Number: BAS Field Panels 25 14 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 14 00 – BAS FIELD PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY


1. Building Controller (BC).

2. Advance Application Specific Controller (AAC).

3. Application Specific Controller (ASC).

B. Furnish and install DDC Control units and/or Smart Devices required to support specifiedbuilding automation system functions.

C. Refer to Section 25 00 00 - Building Automation System (BAS) General for generalrequirements.




C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements andstandards addressed within all references.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. The BAS and digital control and communications components installed, as Work of thisContract shall be an integrated distributed processing system of the following manufactureror communication protocol. No other products will be considered as substitutions.



1. Siemens Building Technologies - APOGEE: Provide control products and systems thatcompletely integrate and operate from the existing APOGEE system currently inoperation at the institution.

2. All access, programming, alarming, system configuration shall be utilized from theexisting system software and database without any third party programs or gateways.

2.03 STAND-ALONE FUNCTIONALITY

A. General: These requirements clarify the requirement for stand-alone functionality relative topackaging I/O devices with a controller. Stand-alone functionality is specified with thecontroller and for each Application Category specified in this Section. This item refers toacceptable paradigms for associating the points with the processor.

B. Functional Boundary:

1. Provide controllers so that all points associated with and common to one unit or othercomplete system/equipment shall reside within a single control unit. The boundaries of astandalone system shall be as dictated in the Contract Documents.

2. Systems specified for the Application Category will dictate the boundary of thestandalone control functionality. See related restrictions below.

3. When referring to the controller as it pertains to the standalone functionality, reference isspecifically made to the processor.

4. One processor shall execute all the related I/O control logic via one operating system thatuses a common programming and configuration tool.

C. The following configurations are considered acceptable with reference to a controller’sstandalone functionality:

1. Points packaged as integral to the controller such that the point configuration is listed asan essential piece of information for ordering the controller (having a unique orderingnumber).

2. Controllers with processors and modular back planes that allow plug in point modules asan integral part of the controller.

3. I/O point expander boards, plugged directly into the main controller board to expand thepoint capacity of the controller.

D. The following configurations are considered unacceptable with reference to a controller’sstandalone functionality:

1. I/O point expansion devices connected to the main controller board via wiring and assuch may be remote from the controller and that communicate via a sub LAN protocol.

2. Multiple controllers enclosed in the same control panel to accomplish the pointrequirement.

2.04 BUILDING CONTROLLER (BC)




1. The BC(s) shall provide fully distributed control independent of the operational status ofthe OWSs and CSS. All necessary calculations required to achieve control shall beexecuted within the BC independent of any other device. All control strategies performedby the BC(s) shall be both operator definable and modifiable through the OperatorInterfaces.

2. BCs shall perform overall system coordination, accept control programs, performautomated HVAC functions, control peripheral devices and perform all necessarymathematical and logical functions.

3. BCs shall share information with the entire network of BCs for full global control directlywithout requiring other BCs, LAN devices, Local Supervisory LAN gateways, routers etc.to assist, perform, or act as an intermediate device for communicating.

4. Each controller shall permit multi-user operation from multiple workstations and portableoperator terminals connected either locally or over the Primary Controller LAN. Each unitshall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory, microprocessor, battery backup,regulated power supply, power conditioning equipment, ports for connection of operatinginterface devices, and control enclosure.

5. BCs shall be programmable from an operator workstation, portable operator terminal, orhand held operating device. BC shall contain sufficient memory for all specified globalcontrol strategies, user defined reports and trending, communication programs, andcentral alarming.

6. BCs shall be connected to a controller network that qualifies as a Primary ControllingLAN.

7. All BCs shall be protected from any memory loss due to a loss of power by one or acombination of the following:

a. Volatile RAM shall have a battery backup using a lithium battery with a ratedservice life of fifty (50) hours, and a rated shelf life of at least five (5) years. Self-diagnostic routine shall report an alarm for a low battery condition.

b. EEPROM, EPROM, or NOVROM non-volatile memory.

8. In addition, BCs shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC functions. Each BCshall be capable of standalone direct digital operation utilizing its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, wiring terminal strips, A/D converters, real-timeclock/calendar and voltage transient and lightning protection devices. Refer tostandalone functionality specified above.

9. The BC shall provide for point mix flexibility and expandability. This requirement may bemet via either a family of expander boards, modular input/output configuration, or acombination thereof. Refer to stand alone functionality specified above.

10. All BC point data, algorithms and application software shall be modifiable from theOperator Workstation.

11. Each BC shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via amicroprocessor resident in the BC. The database and all application programs for eachBC shall be stored in non-volatile or battery backed volatile memory within the BC andwill be able to upload/download to/from the OWS and/or CSS.



12. BC shall provide buffer for holding alarms and messages. Alarms and messages shall reside in a buffer within the controller and be delivered up to the CSS via the LAN when the buffer is full or when scheduled.

13. BC shall provide buffer for holding trends. Trends shall reside in a buffer within the controller and be delivered up to the CSS via the LAN when the buffer is full or when scheduled.

14. Each BC shall include self-test diagnostics, which allow the BC to automatically alarm any malfunctions, or alarm conditions that exceed desired parameters as determined by programming input.

15. Each BC shall contain software to perform full DDC/PID control loops.

16. For systems requiring end-of-line resistors those resistors shall be located in the BC.

17. Input-Output Processing:

a. Digital Outputs (DO):

1) Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 Vac or Vdc, 1 amp maximum current. Each shall be configurable as normally open or normally closed.

2) Each output shall have an LED to indicate the operating mode of the output and a manual hand off or auto switch to allow for override. Provide feedback to remotely indicate the HOA is not in the Auto position. If these HOA switches are not provided on the main board they shall be provided via isolation relays within the control enclosure.

3) Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BC’s board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturer’s board is unacceptable). Provide suppression to limit transients to acceptable levels.

b. Analog Inputs (AI):

1) AI shall be O-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 0-20 Vdc, and 0-20 mA. Provide signal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input.

2) Each input shall be a discrete input to the BC’s board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise).

3) A/D converters shall have a minimum resolution of twelve (12) bits.

c. Digital Inputs (DI):

1) Monitor dry contact closures.

2) Accept pulsed inputs of at least one per second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC and shall be isolated from the main board.

d. Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as specified above.

e. Electronic Analog Outputs (AO):

1) Voltage mode: 0-5 Vdc and 0-10 Vdc; Current mode: 4-20 mA. Provide zero and span calibration and circuit protection.



2) Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) analog via a DO and transducer is acceptableonly with Owner approval (Generally these will not be allowed on loops with ashort time constant such as discharge temperature loops, economizer loops,pressure control loops and the like. They are generally acceptable for standardroom temperature control loops).

3) Where these are allowed, transducer/actuator shall be programmable fornormally open, normally closed, or hold last position and shall allow adjustabletiming. Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BC’s board (multiplexing to aseparate manufacturers board is unacceptable). D/A converters shall have aminimum resolution of ten (10) bits.

f. Analog Output Pneumatic (AOP), 0-20 psi:

1) Pneumatic outputs via an I/P transducer, or digital to pneumatic transducer areacceptable.

2) Multiplexed digital to pneumatic transducers are acceptable provided they aresupplied as a standard product and part of the BC and provide individualfeedback.

3) Multiplexed pneumatic outputs of a separate manufacturer are unacceptable.

g. Pulsed Inputs:

1) Capable of counting up to eight (8) pulses per second with buffer to accumulatepulse count.

2) Pulses shall be counted at all times.

18. A communication port for operator interface through a terminal shall be provided in eachBC. It shall be possible to perform all program and database back-up, systemmonitoring, control functions, and BC diagnostics through this port. Standalone BCpanels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normaloperation of permanently connected modems, printers, or workstations.

19. Each BC shall be equipped with loop tuning algorithm for precise proportional, integral,derivative (PID) control. Loop tuning tools provided with the Operator Workstationsoftware is acceptable. In any case, tools to support loop tuning must be provided suchthat P, I, and D gains are automatically calculated.

20. All analog output points shall have a selectable failure setpoint. The BC shall be capableof maintaining this failure setpoint in the event of a system malfunction, which causesloss of BC control, or loss of output signal, as long as power is available at the BC. Thefailure setpoint shall be selectable on a per point basis.

21. Slope intercepts and gain adjustments shall be available on a per-point basis.

22. BC Power Loss:

a. Upon a loss of power to any BC, the other units on the primary controlling networkshall not in any way be affected.



b. Upon a loss of power to any BC, the battery backup shall ensure that the energymanagement control software, the Direct Digital Control software, the databaseparameters, and all other programs and data stored in the RAM are retained for aminimum of fifty (50) hours. An alarm diagnostic message shall indicate that theBC is under battery power.

c. Upon restoration of power within the specified battery backup period, the BC shallresume full operation without operator intervention. The BC shall automaticallyreset its clock such that proper operation of any time dependent function ispossible without manual reset of the clock. All monitored functions shall beupdated.

d. Should the duration of a loss of power exceed the specified battery back-up periodor BC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel shall automatically reportthe condition (upon resumption of power) and be capable of receiving a downloadvia the network, and connected computer. In addition, the Owner shall be able toupload the most current versions of all energy management control programs,Direct Digital Control programs, database parameters, and all other data andprograms in the memory of each BC to the operator workstation via the local areanetwork, or via the telephone line dial-up modem where applicable, or to the laptopPC via the local RS-232C port.

23. BC Failure:

a. Building Controller LAN Data Transmission Failure: BC shall continue to operatein stand-alone mode. BC shall store loss of communication alarm along with thetime of the event. All control functions shall continue with the global valuesprogrammable to either last value or a specified value. Peer BCs shall recognizethe loss, report alarm and reconfigure the LAN.

b. BC Hardware Failure: BC shall cease operation and terminate communicationwith other devices. All outputs shall go to their specified fail position.

24. Each BC shall be equipped with firmware resident self-diagnostics for sensors and becapable of assessing an open or shorted sensor circuit and taking an appropriate controlaction (close valve, damper, etc.).

25. BCs may include LAN communications interface functions for controlling secondarycontrolling LANs Refer to Section 25 30 00 - BAS System Communications Devices forrequirements if this function is packaged with the BC.

26. A minimum of four (4) levels of password protection shall be provided at each BC.

27. BCs shall be mounted in packaged equipment enclosures, or locking wall mounted in anenclosure, as specified elsewhere.

28. In the last month of the Warranty Period, all controller firmware, software, drivers, etc. willbe upgraded to the latest release (version) in effect at the end of the Warranty Period.

29. All BC naming conventions shall adhere to the format as established by the Owner’sStandard Acronyms document.

B. I/O Point Expansion Devices communicating to BC via a sub LAN protocol:



1. Utilizing any point from a point expansion device communicating to BC via a sub LAN protocol to support the BC’s Stand Alone Functionality requirement is not allowed.

2. Point expansion devices shall be mounted in packaged equipment enclosures, or locking wall mounted enclosure in a readily accessible location. Identify panel enclosure with the entire point address of point expansion device(s) on an engraved phenolic or micarta nameplate.

3. The owner shall approve the location of point expansion devices mounted above finished ceiling prior to installation. An owner approved ceiling tag shall identify the specific location of the point expansion device location.

4. Each point expansion device shall be identified in the database with the location of where the device is physically installed to allow the owner to service these devices when needed. The owner shall approve the final method identifying the locations with the available software options.

C. BACnet Building Controller Requirements:

1. The BC(s) shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) device profile as defined in the BACnet standard.

2. BCs shall communicate over the BACnet Building Controller LAN.

3. Each BC shall be connected to the BACnet Building Controller LAN communicating to/from other BCs.

2.05 ADVANCED APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (AAC) AND APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC)


1. AACs and ASCs shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC equipment. Each unit shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory and will continue to operate all local control functions in the event of a loss of communications on the ASC LAN or sub-LAN. Refer to standalone requirements by application specified in this Section. In addition, it shall be able to share information with every other BC and AAC /ASC on the entire network.

2. Each AAC and ASC shall include self-test diagnostics that allow the AAC /ASC to automatically relay to the BC, LAN Interface Device or workstation, any malfunctions or abnormal conditions within the AAC /ASC or alarm conditions of inputs that exceed desired parameters as determined by programming input.

3. AACs and ASCs shall include sufficient memory to perform the specific control functions required for its application and to communicate with other devices.

4. Each AAC and ASC must be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation utilizing its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, minimum eight (8) bit A to D conversion, voltage transient and lightning protection devices. All volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least fifty (50) hours with a battery life of five (5) years.

5. All point data; algorithms and application software within an AAC /ASC shall be modifiable from the Operator Workstation.



6. In the last month of the Warranty Period, all controller firmware, software, drivers, etc. willbe upgraded to the latest release (version) in effect at the end of the Warranty Period.

7. AAC and ASC Input-Output Processing

a. Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 VAC or VDC, 1amp maximum current. Each shall be configurable as normally open or normallyclosed. Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the AAC/ASC’s board(multiplexing to a separate manufacturer’s board is unacceptable). Providesuppression to limit transients to acceptable levels.

b. Analog Inputs (AI): AI shall be O-5 Vdc, 0-10Vdc, 0-20Vdc, and 0-20 mA. Providesignal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input. Each input shallbe a discrete input to the BC’s board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturersboard is unacceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise). A/D convertersshall have a minimum resolution of eight to ten bits depending on application.

c. Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed inputs of at leastone per second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC and shallbe isolated from the main board.


e. Electronic Analog Outputs (AO) as required by application:

1) Voltage mode, 0-5VDC and 0-10VDC; current mode (4-20 mA). Provide zeroand span calibration and circuit protection. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)analog via a DO and transducer is acceptable only with Owner approval(Generally, PWM will not be allowed on loops with a short time constant such asdischarge temperature loops, economizer loops, pressure control loops and thelike. They are generally acceptable for standard room temperature controlloops.).

2) Where PWM is allowed, transducer/actuator shall be programmable for normallyopen, normally closed, or hold last position and shall allow adjustable timing.Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BC’s board (multiplexing to aseparate manufacturers board is unacceptable).

3) D/A converters shall have a minimum resolution of eight (8) bits.

f. Analog Output Pneumatic (AOP), 0-20 psi: Pneumatic outputs via an I/Ptransducer, PWM/P transducer, or digital to pneumatic transducer are acceptable.Multiplexed digital to pneumatic transducers are acceptable provided they aresupplied as a standard product and part of the AAC /ASC and provide individualfeedback. Multiplexed pneumatic outputs of a separate manufacturer areunacceptable.

B. BACnet AAC(s) and ASC(s) Requirements:

1. The AAC(s) and ASC(s) shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnet Building Controller(B-AAC and B-ASC) device profile as defined in the BACnet standard.

2. AAC(s) and ASC(s) shall communicate over the BACnet Building Controller LAN or theASC LAN or sub-LAN.



3. Each BC shall be connected to the BACnet Building Controller LAN communicatingto/from other BCs.

C. Terminal Unit Controllers:

1. Terminal unit controllers controlling damper positions to maintain a quantity of supply orexhaust air serving a space shall have an automatically initiated function that resets thevolume regulator damper to the fully closed position on a scheduled basis.

2. The controllers shall initially be set up to perform this function once every 24 hours. Thepurpose of this required function is to reset and synchronize the actual damper positionwith the calculated damper position and to assure the damper will completely close whencommanded.

3. The software shall select scheduled terminal units randomly and shall not allow morethan 5 percent of the total quantity of controllers in a building to perform this function atthe same time. When possible the controllers shall perform this function when the supplyor exhaust air system is not operating or is unoccupied.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do notproceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptableto Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION



C. All Division 25 installation including but not limited to, cable and wiring, grounding, racewayand conduit, electrical circuit and panel identifications, wiring devices, and lighting shallcomply with Division 26 installation requirements. In addition to the Division 26 requirements,contractor shall label panel board name and circuit number in an owner approved manner ateach BAS field panel, control cabinet, or point of termination in which a 120VAC controlcircuit is utilized.



D. Figures A and B (below) illustrate the required layout of a Building Automation Panel in newconstruction.

FIGURE B: HIGH VOLTAGE PANEL

FIGURE A: LOW VOLTAGE PANEL



3.03 SYSTEM ACCESS

A. Provide an Ethernet connection and a 5 port hub at each panel housing a controller orcontrollers that provides access to the Local Supervisory LAN and to the Control SystemServer for all Controllers, other than an Application Category 1 Controllers. The user shall beable to access each controller on the system using this connection via the Control SystemServer database for graphics, schedules, programming, controller configuration etc.

3.04 HARDWARE APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

1. The functional intent of this specification is to allow cost effective application ofmanufacturers standard products while maintain the integrity and reliability of the controlfunctions.

2. A Building Controller as specified above is generally fully featured and customizablewhereas the AAC/ASC refers to a more cost-effective unit designed for lower-endapplications. Specific requirements indicated below are required for the respectiveapplication. Manufacturer may apply the most cost-effective unit that meets therequirement of that application.

B. Standalone Capability:

1. Each Control Unit shall be capable of performing the required sequence of operation forthe associated equipment.

2. All physical point data and calculated values required to accomplish the sequence ofoperation shall originate within the associated CU with only the exceptions enumeratedbelow. Listed below are functional point data and calculated values that shall be allowedto be obtained from or stored by other CUs or SDs via LAN.

C. Where associated control functions involve functions from different categories identifiedbelow, the requirements for the most restrictive category shall be met.

D. Application Category 0 (Distributed Monitoring):

1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Monitoring of variables that are not used in a control loop, sequence logic, orsafety.

2. Points on BCs, AACs, and ASCs may be used in these applications as well as SDsand/or general-purpose I/O modules.

3. Where these points are trended, Contractor shall verify and document that the networkbandwidth is acceptable for such trends and is still capable of acceptable and timelycontrol function.

Delete equipment that is not applicable – do not move equipment types from one category to another. E. Application Category 1 (Application Specific Controller):




a. Fan Coil Units.

b. Airflow Control Boxes (VAV and Constant Volume Terminal Units).

c. Miscellaneous Heaters.

d. Unitary equipment <15 tons (Package Terminal AC Units, Package Terminal HeatPumps, Split-System AC Units, Split-System Heat Pumps, Water-Source HeatPumps).

e. Induction Units.

f. Dual Duct Zone Dampers.

2. ASCs may be used in these applications.

3. Standalone Capability:

a. Provide capability to execute control functions for the application for a givensetpoint or mode, which shall generally be occupied mode control.

b. Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired from other controllers viaLANs. In the event of a loss of communications with any other controller, or anyfault in any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of any of these values,the ASC shall use the last value obtained before the fault occurred.

c. If such fault has not been corrected after the specified default delay time, specifieddefault value(s) shall then be substituted until such fault has been corrected.

PHYSICAL/VIRTUAL POINT Default Value Scheduling Period Normal Morning Warm-Up Off (cold discharge air) Load Shed Off (no shedding) Summer/Winter Winter Trend Data N/A [Smoke Pressurization Mode] [Normal Mode]

4. Mounting:

a. ASCs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be mountedon the equipment in an accessible enclosure and shall be rated for plenum use.

b. ASCs that control equipment mounted in a mechanical room may either bemounted in, on the equipment, or on the wall of the mechanical room at anadjacent, accessible location.

c. ASCs that control equipment mounted outside or in occupied spaces shall eitherbe located in the unit or in a proximate mechanical/utility space.

d. BAS Provider may furnish ASCs to the terminal unit manufacturer for factorymounting.



5. Programmability: Operator shall be able to modify all setpoints (temperature and airflow), scheduling parameters associated with the unit, tuning and set up parameters, interstage timing parameters, and mode settings. Application-specific block control algorithms may be used to meet the sequence of operations. The ability to customize the control algorithm is not required unless specifically indicated otherwise.

6. LAN Restrictions: For networks operating at 38.4 kbps or less, limit the number of nodes on the network to meet all system performance criteria and to no more than 80 percent of the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. For networks operating at greater than 38.4 kbps limit the number of nodes on the network to meet all system performance criteria up to the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.

Delete equipment that is not applicable – do not move equipment types from one category to another. F. Application Category 2 (General Purpose Terminal Controller):

a. Applications in this category include the following:

b. Unitary Equipment >= 15 tons (Air Conditioners, Heat Pumps, Packaged Heating/Cooling Units, and similar).

c. Small, Constant Volume Single Zone Air Handling Units.

d. Constant Volume Pump Start/Stop.

e. Miscellaneous Equipment (Exhaust Fan) Start/Stop.

f. Miscellaneous Monitoring (not directly associated with a control sequence and where trending is not critical).

2. BCs may be used in these applications.

3. ASC’s may be used in these applications provided the ASC meets all requirements specified below. This category requires a general-purpose ASC to which application-specific control algorithms can be attached.


a. Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired from other ASCs via LANs.

b. In the event of a loss of communications with any other ASCs, or any fault in any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of any of these values, the AAC/ASC shall use the last value obtained before the fault occurred.

c. If such fault has not been corrected after the specified default delay time, specified default value(s) shall then be substituted until such fault has been corrected.

Physical/Virtual Point Default Delay Time Default Value Outside Air Temperature 3 minutes 80°F Outside Air Humidity 3 minutes 60% RH Outside Air Enthalpy 3 minutes 30 Btu/lb Trend Data 3 minutes N/A Cooling/Heating Requests 3 minutes None



Physical/Virtual Point Default Delay Time Default Value [Smoke Pressurization Mode]

[3 minutes] [Normal Mode]

[Smoke Exhaust Command]

[3 minutes] [Normal Mode]

5. Mounting:

a. ASCs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be mountedon the equipment and shall be rated for plenum use.

b. ASCs that control equipment located in occupied spaces or outside shall either bemounted within the equipment enclosure (responsibility for physical fit remains withthe Contractor) or in a near by mechanical/utility room in which case it shall beenclosed in a NEMA 1, locking enclosure.

6. Programmability:

a. Operator shall be able to modify all setpoints (temperature and airflow), schedulingparameters associated with the unit, tuning and set up parameters, interstagetiming parameters, and mode settings.

b. Operator shall be able to address and configure spare inputs for monitoring.

c. Operator shall be able to address and configure spare outputs for simple singleloop control actions or event initiated actions.

d. Application-specific block control algorithms shall used to meet the sequence ofoperations. The ability to customize the control algorithm is not required unlessspecifically indicated otherwise.

7. LAN Restrictions: Limit the number of nodes servicing any one of these applications onthe AAC/ASC LAN to 32.

Delete equipment that is not applicable – do not move equipment types from one category to another. G. Application Category 3 (Advanced Application Controller):


a. Steam Pressure Reducing Station Control.

b. Steam Converter Control.

c. Large Constant Volume Air Handlers.

d. VAV Air Handlers.

e. Dual Duct Air Handlers.

f. Multizone Air Handlers.

g. Self Contained VAV Units.

h. Air Handlers serving critical areas.



i. Central Cooling Plant.

j. Central Heating Plant.

k. Cooling Towers.

l. Sequenced or Variable Speed Pump Control.

m. Local Chiller Control (unit specific).

n. Campus Loop Chilled Water Control.

2. BCs shall be used in these applications.

3. LAN Restrictions: Comply with Part Two requirements, Stand-Alone Functionality.

3.05 CONTROL UNIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Section 25 00 00 for requirements pertaining to control unit quantity and location.



SECTION 25 14 10 – BAS FIELD PANELS - RETROFIT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:1. Building Controller (BC).

2. Advance Application Specific Controller (AAC).

3. Application Specific Controller (ASC).

B. Furnish and install DDC Control units and/or Smart Devices required to support specifiedbuilding automation system functions.

C. Refer to Section 25 00 10 for general requirements.


A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified bya specific edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicableto this Project.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and localrequirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.


2.02 STAND-ALONE FUNCTIONALITY

A. General: These requirements clarify the requirement for stand-alone functionality relative to packaging I/O devices with a controller. Stand-alone functionality is specified with the controller and for each Application Category specified in this Section. This item refers to acceptable paradigms for associating the points with the processor.

B. Functional Boundary: 1. Provide controllers so that all points associated with and common to one unit or other

complete system/equipment shall reside within a single control unit. The boundaries of a standalone system shall be as dictated in the Contract Documents.

2. Systems specified for the Application Category will dictate the boundary of the standalone control functionality. See related restrictions below.

3. When referring to the controller as it pertains to the standalone functionality, reference is specifically made to the processor.

4. One processor shall execute all the related I/O control logic via one operating system that uses a common programming and configuration tool.

C. The following configurations are considered acceptable with reference to a controller’s standalone functionality:

1. Points packaged as integral to the controller such that the point configuration is listed as an essential piece of information for ordering the controller (having a unique ordering number).

2. Controllers with processors and modular back planes that allow plug in point modules as an integral part of the controller.

3. I/O point expander boards, plugged directly into the main controller board to expand the point capacity of the controller.

D. The following configurations are considered unacceptable with reference to a controller’s standalone functionality:

1. I/O point expansion devices connected to the main controller board via wiring and as such may be remote from the controller and that communicate via a sub LAN protocol.

2. Multiple controllers enclosed in the same control panel to accomplish the point requirement.

2.03 BUILDING CONTROLLER (BC)

A. The BC(s) shall provide fully distributed control independent of the operational status of the OWSs and CSS. All necessary calculations required to achieve control shall be executed within the BC independent of any other device. All control strategies performed by the BC(s) shall be both operator definable and modifiable through the Operator Interfaces.


B. BCs shall perform overall system coordination, accept control programs, perform automatedHVAC functions, control peripheral devices and perform all necessary mathematical and logicalfunctions.

C. BCs shall share information with the entire network of BCs for full global control directly withoutrequiring other BCs, LAN devices, Local Supervisory LAN gateways, routers etc. to assist,perform, or act as an intermediate device for communicating.

D. Each controller shall permit multi-user operation from multiple workstations and portableoperator terminals connected either locally or over the Primary Controller LAN. Each unit shallhave its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory, microprocessor, battery backup, regulatedpower supply, power conditioning equipment, ports for connection of operating interfacedevices, and control enclosure.

E. BCs shall be programmable from an operator workstation, portable operator terminal, or handheld operating device. BC shall contain sufficient memory for all specified global controlstrategies, user defined reports and trending, communication programs, and central alarming.

F. BCs shall be connected to a controller network that qualifies as a Primary Controlling LAN.G. All BCs shall be protected from any memory loss due to a loss of power, power surge, or

unstable power by one or a combination of the following:1. Volatile RAM shall have a battery backup using a lithium battery with a rated service life

of fifty (50) hours, and a rated shelf life of at least five (5) years. Self-diagnostic routineshall report an alarm for a low battery condition.

2. EEPROM, EPROM, or NOVROM non-volatile memory.

H. In addition, BCs shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC functions. Each BC shallbe capable of standalone direct digital operation utilizing its own processor, non-volatilememory, input/output, wiring terminal strips, A/D converters, real-time clock/calendar andvoltage transient and lightning protection devices. Refer to standalone functionality specifiedabove.

I. For systems requiring end-of-line resistors those resistors shall be located in the BC.J. Input-Output Processing:

1. Digital Outputs (DO):

a. Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 Vac or Vdc, 1 amp maximum current. Eachshall be configurable as normally open or normally closed.

b. Each output shall have an LED to indicate the operating mode of the output and amanual hand off or auto switch to allow for override. Provide feedback to remotelyindicate the HOA is not in the Auto position. If these HOA switches are not providedon the main board they shall be provided via isolation relays within the controlenclosure.

c. Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BC’s board (multiplexing to a separatemanufacturer’s board is unacceptable). Provide suppression to limit transients toacceptable levels.

2. Analog Inputs (AI):


a. AI shall be O-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 0-20 Vdc, and 0-20 mA. Provide signal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input.

b. Each input shall be a discrete input to the BC’s board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise).

c. A/D converters shall have a minimum resolution of twelve (12) bits.

3. Digital Inputs (DI):

a. Monitor dry contact closures.

b. Accept pulsed inputs of at least one per second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC and shall be isolated from the main board.

4. Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as specified above.

5. Electronic Analog Outputs (AO):

a. Voltage mode: 0-5 Vdc and 0-10 Vdc; Current mode: 4-20 mA. Provide zero and span calibration and circuit protection.

b. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) analog via a DO and transducer is acceptable only with Owner approval (Generally these will not be allowed on loops with a short time constant such as discharge temperature loops, economizer loops, pressure control loops and the like. They are generally acceptable for standard room temperature control loops.).

c. Where these are allowed, transducer/actuator shall be programmable for normally open, normally closed, or hold last position and shall allow adjustable timing. Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BC’s board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable).

d. D/A converters shall have a minimum resolution of ten (10) bits.

6. Analog Output Pneumatic (AOP), 0-20 psi:

a. Pneumatic outputs via an I/P transducer, or digital to pneumatic transducer are acceptable.

b. Multiplexed digital to pneumatic transducers are acceptable provided they are supplied as a standard product and part of the BC and provide individual feedback.

c. Multiplexed pneumatic outputs of a separate manufacturer are unacceptable.

7. Pulsed Inputs:

a. Capable of counting up to eight (8) pulses per second with buffer to accumulate pulse count.

b. Pulses shall be counted at all times.


K. BC Power Loss:1. Upon a loss of power, power surge, or unstable power to any BC, the other units on the

primary controlling network shall not in any way be affected.

2. Upon a loss of power, power surge, or unstable power to any BC, the battery backupshall ensure that the energy management control software, the Direct Digital Controlsoftware, the database parameters, and all other programs and data stored in the RAMare retained for a minimum of fifty (50) hours. An alarm diagnostic message shallindicate that the BC is under battery power.

3. Upon restoration of power within the specified battery backup period, the BC shallresume full operation without operator intervention. The BC shall automatically reset itsclock such that proper operation of any time dependent function is possible withoutmanual reset of the clock. All monitored functions shall be updated.

4. Should the duration of a loss of power exceed the specified battery back-up period or BCpanel memory be lost for any reason, the panel shall automatically report the condition(upon resumption of power) and be capable of receiving a download via the network, andconnected computer. In addition, the Owner shall be able to upload the most currentversions of all energy management control programs, Direct Digital Control programs,database parameters, and all other data and programs in the memory of each BC to theoperator workstation via the local area network, or via the telephone line dial-up modemwhere applicable, or to the laptop PC via the local RS-232C port.

L. BC Failure:1. Building Controller LAN Data Transmission Failure: BC shall continue to operate in

stand-alone mode. BC shall store loss of communication alarm along with the time of theevent. All control functions shall continue with the global values programmable to eitherlast value or a specified value. Peer BCs shall recognize the loss, report alarm andreconfigure the LAN.

2. BC Hardware Failure: BC shall cease operation and terminate communication with otherdevices. All outputs shall go to their specified fail position.

M. BCs may include LAN communications interface functions for controlling secondary controllingLANs Refer to Section 25 30 10 - BAS System Communications Devices for requirements if thisfunction is packaged with the BC.

N. All BC naming conventions shall adhere to the format as established by the Owner’s StandardAcronyms document.

O. I/O Point Expansion Devices communicating to BC via a sub LAN protocol:1. Utilizing any point from a point expansion device communicating to BC via a sub LAN

protocol to support the BC’s Stand Alone Functionality requirement is not allowed.

2. Point expansion devices shall be mounted in packaged equipment enclosures, or lockingwall mounted enclosure in a readily accessible location. Identify panel enclosure with theentire point address of point expansion device(s) on an engraved phenolic or micartanameplate.


3. The owner shall approve the location of point expansion devices mounted above finished ceiling prior to installation. An owner approved ceiling tag shall identify the specific location of the point expansion device location.

4. Each point expansion device shall be identified in the database with the location of where the device is physically installed to allow the owner to service these devices when needed. The owner shall approve the final method identifying the locations with the available software options.

2.04 ADVANCED APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (AAC) AND APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC)

A. General Requirements: 1. AACs and ASCs shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC equipment. Each

unit shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory and will continue to operate all local control functions in the event of a loss of communications on the ASC LAN or sub-LAN.

2. AACs and ASCs shall include sufficient memory to perform the specific control functions required for its application and to communicate with other devices.

3. Each AAC and ASC must be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation utilizing its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, minimum eight (8) bit A to D conversion, voltage transient and lightning protection devices. All volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least fifty (50) hours with a battery life of five (5) years.

4. All point data; algorithms and application software within an AAC /ASC shall be modifiable from the Operator Workstation.

5. AAC and ASC Input-Output Processing:

a. Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 VAC or VDC, 1 amp maximum current. Each shall be configurable as normally open or normally closed. Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the AAC/ASC’s board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturer’s board is unacceptable). Provide suppression to limit transients to acceptable levels.

b. Analog Inputs (AI): AI shall be O-5 Vdc, 0-10Vdc, 0-20Vdc, and 0-20 mA. Provide signal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input. Each input shall be a discrete input to the BC’s board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise). A/D converters shall have a minimum resolution of eight to ten bits depending on application.

c. Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed inputs of at least one per second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC and shall be isolated from the main board.



e. Electronic Analog Outputs (AO) as required by application:

1) Voltage mode, 0-5VDC and 0-10VDC; current mode (4-20 mA). Provide zeroand span calibration and circuit protection. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)analog via a DO and transducer is acceptable only with Owner approval(Generally, PWM will not be allowed on loops with a short time constant such asdischarge temperature loops, economizer loops, pressure control loops and thelike. They are generally acceptable for standard room temperature controlloops.).

2) Where PWM is allowed, transducer/actuator shall be programmable for normallyopen, normally closed, or hold last position and shall allow adjustable timing.Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BC’s board (multiplexing to aseparate manufacturers board is unacceptable).

3) D/A converters shall have a minimum resolution of eight (8) bits.

B. Terminal Unit Controllers:1. Terminal unit controllers controlling damper positions to maintain a quantity of supply or

exhaust air serving a space shall have an automatically initiated function that resets thevolume regulator damper to the fully closed position on a scheduled basis.

2. The controllers shall initially be set up to perform this function once every 24 hours. Thepurpose of this required function is to reset and synchronize the actual damper positionwith the calculated damper position and to assure the damper will completely close whencommanded.

3. The software shall select scheduled terminal units randomly and shall not allow morethan 5 percent of the total quantity of controllers in a building to perform this function atthe same time. When possible the controllers shall perform this function when the supplyor exhaust air system is not operating or is unoccupied.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referencedstandards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.C. All Division 25 installation including but not limited to, cable and wiring, grounding, raceway and

conduit, electrical circuit and panel identifications, wiring devices, and lighting shall comply withDivision 26 installation requirements. In addition to the Division 26 requirements, contractorshall label panel board name and circuit number in an owner approved manner at each BASfield panel, control cabinet, or point of termination in which a 120VAC control circuit is utilized.


D. Figure A (below) illustrates the required layout of a Building Automation Panel in retrofitconstruction.

3.02 HARDWARE APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General:1. The functional intent of this Specification is to allow cost effective application of

manufacturers standard products while maintain the integrity and reliability of the controlfunctions.

2. A Building Controller as specified above is generally fully featured and customizablewhereas the AAC/ASC refers to a more cost-effective unit designed for lower-endapplications. Specific requirements indicated below are required for the respectiveapplication. Manufacturer may apply the most cost-effective unit that meets therequirement of that application.

B. Standalone Capability:1. Each Control Unit shall be capable of performing the required sequence of operation for

the associated equipment.

FIGURE A.


2. All physical point data and calculated values required to accomplish the sequence ofoperation shall originate within the associated CU with only the exceptions enumeratedbelow. Listed below are functional point data and calculated values that shall be allowedto be obtained from or stored by other CUs or SDs via LAN.

C. Where associated control functions involve functions from different categories identified below,the requirements for the most restrictive category shall be met.

D. Application Category 0 (Distributed Monitoring):1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Monitoring of variables that are not used in a control loop, sequence logic, or safety.

2. Points on BCs, AACs, and ASCs may be used in these applications as well as SDsand/or general-purpose I/O modules.

3. Where these points are trended, Contractor shall verify and document that the networkbandwidth is acceptable for such trends and is still capable of acceptable and timelycontrol function.

E. Application Category 1 (Application Specific Controller):1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Fan Coil Units.

b. Airflow Control Boxes (VAV and Constant Volume Terminal Units).

c. Miscellaneous Heaters.

d. Unitary equipment <15 tons (Package Terminal AC Units, Package Terminal HeatPumps, Split-System AC Units, Split-System Heat Pumps, Water-Source HeatPumps).

e. Induction Units.

f. Dual Duct Zone Dampers.


a. Provide capability to execute control functions for the application for a given setpointor mode, which shall generally be occupied mode control.

b. Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired from other controllers viaLANs. In the event of a loss of communications with any other controller, or any faultin any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of any of these values, the ASCshall use the last value obtained before the fault occurred.


Physical/Virtual Point Default Value


Physical/Virtual Point Default Value Scheduling Period Normal Morning Warm-Up Off (cold discharge air) Load Shed Off (no shedding) Summer/Winter Winter Trend Data N/A

3. Mounting:

a. ASCs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be mounted on the equipment in an accessible enclosure and shall be rated for plenum use.

b. ASCs that control equipment mounted in a mechanical room may either be mounted in, on the equipment, or on the wall of the mechanical room at an adjacent, accessible location.

c. ASCs that control equipment mounted outside or in occupied spaces shall either be located in the unit or in a proximate mechanical/utility space.

d. BAS Provider may furnish ASCs to the terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting.

4. LAN Restrictions: For networks operating at 38.4 kbps or less, limit the number of nodes on the network to meet all system performance criteria and to no more than 80 percent of the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. For networks operating at greater than 38.4 kbps limit the number of nodes on the network to meet all system performance criteria up to the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Application Category 2 (General Purpose Terminal Controller): 1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Unitary Equipment >= 15 tons (Air Conditioners, Heat Pumps, Packaged Heating/Cooling Units, and similar).

b. Small, Constant Volume Single Zone Air Handling Units.

c. Constant Volume Pump Start/Stop.

d. Miscellaneous Equipment (Exhaust Fan) Start/Stop.

e. Miscellaneous Monitoring (not directly associated with a control sequence and where trending is not critical).


a. Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired from other ASCs via LANs.

b. In the event of a loss of communications with any other ASCs, or any fault in any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of any of these values, the AAC/ASC shall use the last value obtained before the fault occurred.



Physical/Virtual Point Default Delay Time Default Value Outside Air Temperature 3 minutes 80°F Outside Air Humidity 3 minutes 60% RH Outside Air Enthalpy 3 minutes 30 Btu/lb Trend Data N/A Cooling/Heating Requests 3 minutes None

3. Mounting:

a. ASCs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be mounted onthe equipment and shall be rated for plenum use.

b. ASCs that control equipment located in occupied spaces or outside shall either bemounted within the equipment enclosure (responsibility for physical fit remains withthe Contractor) or in a near by mechanical/utility room in which case it shall beenclosed in a NEMA 1, locking enclosure.

4. LAN Restrictions: Limit the number of nodes servicing any one of these applications onthe AAC/ASC LAN to 80 percent capacity on new installed LANs.

G. Application Category 3 (Advanced Application Controller):1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Steam Pressure Reducing Station Control.

b. Steam Converter Control.

c. Large Constant Volume Air Handlers.

d. VAV Air Handlers.

e. Dual Duct Air Handlers.

f. Multizone Air Handlers.

g. Self-Contained VAV Units.

h. Air Handlers serving critical areas.

i. Central Cooling Plant.

j. Central Heating Plant.

k. Cooling Towers.

l. Sequenced or Variable Speed Pump Control.

m. Local Chiller Control (unit specific).


n. Campus Loop Chilled Water Control.

2. BCs shall be used in these applications.

3. LAN Restrictions: Comply with Part Two requirements, Stand-Alone Functionality.

3.03 CONTROL UNIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Section 25 00 10 for requirements pertaining to control unit quantity and location.



AE Project Number: BAS Software Programming 25 15 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 15 00 – BAS SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING

Consult BMS Project Manager re: 2.13: POINT STRUCTURING AND NAMING convention

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Although Specifications throughout the Mechanical, Electrical, Communications,Electronic Safety and Security divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable tothis Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them; additional Divisions alsomay be reciprocally applicable to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. System Software.

2. Programming Description.

3. Control Algorithms.

4. Energy Management Applications.

5. Password Protection.

6. Alarm Reporting.

7. Trending.

8. Data Acquisition and Storage.

9. Point Structuring.

10. Dynamic Color Graphics.

B. Fully configure systems and furnish and install all software, programming and dynamiccolor graphics for a complete and fully functioning system as specified.

C. Refer to Section 25 00 00 - Building Automation System (BAS) General for generalrequirements as well as requirements for interface with Owner’s WAN.






C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicablerequirements and standards addressed within all references.

1.04 LICENSING

A. Provide or upgrade all licensing for all software packages at all required workstations.BAS licensing shall allow unlimited simultaneous users for access to all aspects of thesystem including system access, workstations, points, programming, databasemanagement, graphics etc. No restrictions shall be placed on the licensing. Alloperator interface, programming environment, networking, database management andany other software used by the Contractor to install the system or needed to operatethe system to its full capabilities shall be licensed and provided to the Owner.

B. All software should be available on all Operator Workstations or CSSs provided, andon all Portable Operator Terminals. Hardware and software keys to provide all rightsshall be installed on all workstations. At least two (2) sets of CDs shall be provided withbackup software for all software provided, so that the Owner may reinstall any softwareas necessary. Include all licensing for workstation operating systems, and all requiredthird-party software licenses.

C. Provide licensing and original software copies for each OWS or CSS.

D. Provide licensing and original software copies for each remote graphic workstation.Licenses for remote graphic workstations shall allow for access to any Site and shallnot be restricted to accessing only the LANs included in this Project.

E. In the last month of the Warranty Period, upgrade all software and firmware packagesto the latest release (version) in effect at the end of the Warranty Period.

F. Refer to Section 25 00 00 - Building Automation System (BAS) General for furtherrequirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, stateand local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities havingjurisdiction.

2.02 SYSTEM SOFTWARE-GENERAL

A. Functionality and Completeness: Contractor shall furnish and install all software andprogramming necessary to provide a complete and functioning system as specified.Contractor shall include all software and programming not specifically itemized in theseSpecifications, which is necessary to implement, maintain, operate, and diagnose thesystem in compliance with these Specifications.



B. Configuration: The software shall support the system as a distributed processing network configuration.

2.03 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. BC Software Residency: Each BC as defined below shall be capable of control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. All software including the following shall reside and execute at the BC:

1. Real-Time Operating System software.

2. Real-Time Clock/Calendar and network time synchronization.

3. BC diagnostic software.

4. LAN Communication software/firmware.

5. Direct Digital Control software.

6. Alarm Processing and Buffering software.

7. Energy Management software.

8. Data Trending, Reporting, and Buffering software.

9. I/O (physical and virtual) database.

10. Remote Communication software.

B. AAC/ASC Software Residency: Each AAC/ASC as defined below shall be capable of control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. As a minimum, software including the following shall reside and execute at the AAC/ASC. Other software to support other required functions of the AAC/ASC may reside at the BC or LAN interface device (specified in Section 25 30 00) with the restrictions/exceptions per application provided in Section 25 14 00:

1. Real-Time Operating System software.

2. AAC/ASC diagnostic software.

3. LAN Communication software.

4. Control software applicable to the unit it serves that will support a single mode of operation.

5. I/O (physical and virtual) database to support one mode of operation.

C. Stand Alone Capability: BC shall continue to perform all functions independent of a failure in other BC/AAC/ASC or other communication links to other BCs/AACs/ASCs. Trends and runtime totalization shall be retained in memory. Runtime totalization shall be available on all digital input points that monitor electric motor status. Refer also to Section 25 14 00 for other aspects of stand alone functionality.



D. Operating System: Controllers shall include a real-time operating system resident inROM. This software shall execute independently from any other devices in the system.It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization

scheme to allow functional override of control functions. Refer also to Section 25 14 00for other aspects of the controller’s operating system.

E. Network Communications: Each controller shall include software/firmware thatsupports the networking of CUs on a common communications trunk that forms therespective LAN. Network support shall include the following:

1. Building Controller/Primary LAN shall be a high-speed network designed andoptimized for control system communication. If a Primary LAN communicationstrunk is severed, BCs shall reconfigure into two separate LANs and continueoperations without interruption or Operator intervention.

2. Controller communication software shall include error detection, correction, andre-transmission to ensure data integrity.

3. Operator/System communication software shall facilitate communicationsbetween other BCs, all subordinate AACs/ASCs (including CIDs—ChillerControls Interface Device), Gateways and LAN Interface Devices or OperatorWorkstations. Software shall allow point interrogation, adjustment,addition/deletion, and programming while the controller is on line and functioningwithout disruption to unaffected points. The software architecture shall allownetworked controllers to share selected physical and virtual point informationthroughout the entire system.

F. Point Database/Summary Table:

1. All points included in the typical equipment point list must be represented toOwner’s WAN in a common, open protocol format. All points should be providedas BACnet standard analog, binary, schedule, or trend objects. Namingconventions for these points and network addressing are discussed in Part Threeof this Section.

2. Point/system database creation and modification shall be via a user-friendly,menu-driven program. System software shall support virtual or logic point (pointsnot representing a physical I/O) creation. Software shall support virtual pointswith all services specified herein. Database software shall support definition ofall parameters specified in Part Three of this Section for a given point type. Ifdatabase does not support all these parameters, software module shall becreated and attached to the points which accomplish the respective function.

G. Diagnostic Software: Controller software shall include diagnostic software that checksmemory and communications and reports any malfunctions

H. Alarm/Messaging Software: Controller software shall support alarm/messageprocessing and buffering software as more fully specified below.



I. Application Programs: CUs shall support and execute application programs as more fully specified below:

1. All Direct Digital Control software, Energy Management Control software, and functional block application programming software templates shall be provided in a ‘ready-to-use’ state, and shall not require (but shall allow) Owner programming.

2. Line programs shall supply preprogrammed functions to support these energy management and functional block application algorithms. All functions shall be provided with printed narratives and/or flow diagrams to document algorithms and how to modify and use them.

J. Security: Controller software shall support multiple level password access restriction as more fully specified below.

K. Direct Digital Control: Controller shall support application of Direct Digital Control Logic. All logic modules shall be provided pre-programmed with written documentation to support their application. Provide the following logic modules as a minimum:

1. Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control with analog, PWM and floating output.

2. Two Position control (Hi or Low crossing with deadband).

3. Single-Pole Double-Throw relay.

4. Delay Timer (delay-on-make, delay-on-break, and interval).

5. Hi/Low Selection.

6. Reset or Scaling Module.

7. Logical Operators (And, Or, Not, Xor).

L. Psychrometric Parameters: Controller software shall provide preprogrammed functions to calculated and present psychrometric parameters (given temperature and relative humidity) including the following as a minimum: Enthalpy, Wet Bulb Temperature.

M. Updating/Storing Application Data: Site-specific programming residing in volatile memory shall be uploadable/downloadable from an OWS or CSS connected locally, to the Primary LAN, to the Local Supervisory LAN and remotely via the internet and modem and telephone lines as applicable but all must be available. Initiation of an upload or download shall include all of the following methods; Manually, Scheduled, and Automatically upon detection of a loss or change.

N. Restart: System software shall provide for orderly shutdown upon loss of power and automatic restart upon power restoration. Volatile memory shall be retained; outputs shall go to programmed fail (open, closed, or last) position. Equipment restart shall include a user definable time delay on each piece of equipment to stagger the restart. Loss of power shall be alarmed at operator interface indicating date and time.



O. Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any deviceon the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able toselect to set the time and date for an individual device, devices on a single network, orall devices simultaneously. Automatic time synchronization shall be provided.

P. Miscellaneous Calculations: System software shall automate calculation ofpsychometric functions, calendar functions, kWh/kW, and flow determination andtotalization from pulsed or analog inputs, curve-fitting, look-up table, input/outputscaling, time averaging of inputs and A/D conversion coefficients.

2.04 APPLICATION PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION

A. The application software shall be user programmable.

B. This Specification generally requires a programming convention that is logical, easy tolearn, use, and diagnose. General approaches to application programming shall beprovided by one, or a combination, of the following conventions:

1. Point Definition: provide templates customized for point type, to support input ofindividual point information. Use standard BACnet Objects as applicable.

2. Graphical Block Programming: Manipulation of graphic icon ‘blocks’, each ofwhich represents a subroutine, in a functional/logical manner forming a controllogic diagram. Blocks shall allow entry of adjustable settings and parameters viapop-up windows. Provide a utility that shall allow the graphic logic diagrams tobe directly compiled into application programs. Logic diagrams shall be viewableeither off-line, or on-line with real-time block output values.

3. Functional Application Programming: Pre-programmed application specificprograms that allow/require limited customization via ‘fill-in-the-blanks’ edit fields.Typical values would be setpoints gains, associated point names, alarm limits,

etc.

4. Line Programming: Textual syntax-based programming in a language similar toBASIC designed specifically for HVAC control. Subroutines or functions forenergy management applications, setpoints, and adjustable parameters shall becustomizable, but shall be provided preprogrammed and documented.

C. Provide a means for testing and/or debugging the control programs both off-line andon-line.

2.05 ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS

A. System shall have the ability to perform all of the following energy managementroutines via preprogrammed function blocks or template programs. As a minimumprovide the following whether or not required in the software:

1. Time-of-Day Scheduling.

2. Calendar-Based Scheduling.



3. Holiday Scheduling.

4. Temporary Schedule Overrides.

5. Optimal Start/Optimal Stop-based on space temperature offset, outdoor air temperature, and building heating and cooling capacitance factors as a minimum.

6. Night Setback and Morning Recovery Control, with ventilation only during occupancy.

7. Economizer Control (enthalpy or dry-bulb).

8. Peak Demand Limiting / Load Shedding.

9. Dead Band Control.

B. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization.

2.06 PASSWORD PROTECTION

A. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the Owner’s authorized BAS Administrator to limit workstation control, display and database manipulation capabilities as BAS Administrator deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned user name with a unique password.

B. All passwords for the system shall be provided to the Owner including administrator, dealer, or factory level passwords for the systems provided under this Project.

C. Passwords shall restrict access to all Control Units.

D. Each user name shall be assigned to a discrete access level. A minimum of five (5) levels of access shall be supported. Alternately, a comprehensive list of accessibility/functionality items shall be provided, to be enabled or disabled for each user.

E. A minimum of 250 user names shall be supported per Owner’s direction.

F. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for the access level assigned to their user name.

G. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving interface device software on-line.



2.07 ALARM AND EVENT MANAGEMENT REPORTING

A. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarms andmessages to operator devices and memory files. Each BC shall perform distributed,independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no timeshall a BCs ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at an OperatorWorkstation or local handheld device, or by communications with other panels on thenetwork.

1. Alarm Descriptor: Each alarm or point change shall include that point’s Englishlanguage description, and the time and date of occurrence. In addition to thealarm’s descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, displayand store an alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or directoperator response.

2. Alarm Prioritization:

a. The software shall allow users to define the handling and routing of eachalarm by their assignment to discrete priority levels.

b. A minimum of ten (10) priority levels shall be provided. For each prioritylevel, users shall have the ability to enable or disable an audible tonewhenever an alarm is reported and whenever an alarm returns to normalcondition.

c. All alarms shall display at the appropriate workstation alarm screen andeach shall be assigned with the correct color and numeric value of priority.

d. Attention needs to be considered where instantaneous on / off alarms mayoccur and defined as being nuisance alarms. These types of alarms thatactivate and deactivate in a short time period shall be delayed or enhancedin such a way to prevent them from becoming nuisance alarms.

e. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for eachindividual alarm and for each priority level. Contractor shall coordinate withthe Owner on establishing alarm priority definitions.

3. Alarm Report Routing: Each alarm shall be associated with a priority level andunique user-defined list of operator devices including any combination of local orremote workstations, printers, workstation disk files, e-mail addresses, andpagers. All alarms associated with a given priority level shall be routed to alloperator devices on the user-defined list associated with that priority level. Foreach priority level, alarms shall be automatically routed to a default operatordevice in the event that alarms are unable to be routed to any operator deviceassigned to the priority level.



4. Auto-Dial Alarm Routing: For alarm priority levels that include a remoteworkstation (accessed by modem) as one of the listed reporting destinations, theBC shall initiate a call to report the alarm, and shall terminate the call after alarmreporting is complete. System shall be capable of multiple retries and bufferalarms until a connection is made. If no connection is made, system shallattempt connection to an alternate dial-up workstation. System shall also be ableto dial multiple pagers upon alarm activation.

5. Alarm Acknowledgment: For alarm priority levels that are directed to aworkstation screen, an indication of alarm receipt shall be displayed immediatelyregardless of the application in use at the workstation, and shall remain on thescreen until acknowledged by a user having a password that allows alarmacknowledgment. Upon acknowledgment, the complete alarm message string(including date, time, and user name of acknowledging operator) shall be storedin a selected file on the workstation hard disk.

B. It shall be possible for any operator to receive a summary of all alarms regardless ofacknowledgement status; for which a particular recipient is enrolled for notification;based on current event state; based on the particular event algorithm (e.g., change ofvalue, change of state, out of range, and so on); alarm priority; and notification class.

C. Alarming Services:

1. All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnet eventdetection and notification mechanisms. The workstation shall receive BACnetalarm and event notifications from any gateway or BACnet controller in thesystem and display them to an operator.

2. The alarm shall be linked to the system graphic it corresponds to. Either intrinsicreporting or algorithmic change reporting may be used but the intrinsic reportingmethod is preferred.

3. The workstation shall also log alarms and events, provide a way for an operatorwith sufficient privilege to acknowledge alarms, and log acknowledgements ofalarms. It shall be possible for an operator to receive, at any time, a summary ofall alarms that are currently in effect at any Site whether or not they have beenacknowledged. Operators shall also be able to view and change alarm limits forany alarm at the appropriate password level

D. Alarm Historical Database: The database shall store all alarms and events objectoccurrences in an ODBC or an OLE database-compliant relational database. Providea commercially available ODBC driver or OLE database data provider, which wouldallow applications to access the data using standard Microsoft Windows Data Services.

E. Submit all alarms per Section 25 00 00.

2.08 TRENDING

A. The software shall display historical data in both a tabular and graphical format. Therequirements of this trending shall include the following:



1. Provide trends for all physical points, virtual points and calculated variables.

2. BACnet Trend Objects are required and all trend data shall be stored in relationaldatabase format as specified in herein under Data Acquisition and Storage.

3. In the graphical format, the trend shall plot at least four (4) different values for agiven time period superimposed on the same graph. The four (4) values shall bedistinguishable by using unique colors. In printed form the four (4) lines shall bedistinguishable by different line symbology. Displayed trend graphs shall indicatethe engineering units for each trended value.

4. The sample rate and data selection shall be selectable by the operator.

5. The trended value range shall be selectable by the operator.

6. Where trended values on one table/graph are COV, software shall automaticallyfill the trend samples between COV entries.

B. Control Loop Performance Trends: Controllers incorporating PID control loops shallalso provide high resolution sampling in less than six second increments for verificationof control loop performance.

C. Data Buffering and Archiving: Trend data shall be buffered at the BC, and uploaded tohard disk storage when archival is desired. All archived trends shall be transmitted tothe on-Site OWS or CSS as applicable. Uploads shall occur based upon a user-defined interval, manual command, or automatically when the trend buffers becomefull.

D. Time Synchronization: Provide a time master that is installed and configured tosynchronize the clocks of all BACnet devices supporting time synchronization.Synchronization shall be done using Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). All trendsample times, both BACnet and LonTalk, shall be able to be synchronized. Thefrequency of time synchronization message transmission shall be selectable by theoperator.

E. Submit all Trends per Section 25 00 00.

2.09 DYNAMIC PLOTTING

A. Provide a utility to dynamically plot in real-time at least four (4) values on a given 2-dimensional dynamic plot/graph with at least two Y-axes. At least five (5) dynamicplots shall be allowed simultaneously.

2.10 DATA ACQUISITION AND STORAGE

A. All points included in the typical equipment point list must be represented in a common,open or accessible format. All points should be provided as BACnet standard analog,binary, schedule, or trend objects. Naming conventions for these points and networkaddressing are discussed in the ‘Point Naming Conventions’ paragraph below.



B. Data from the BAS shall be stored in relational database format. The format and the naming convention used for storing the database files shall remain consistent across the database and across time. The relational structure shall allow for storage of any additional data points, which are added to the BAS in future. The metadata/schema or formal descriptions of the tables, columns, domains, and constraints shall be provided for each database.

C. The database shall allow applications to access the data while the database is running. The database shall not require shutting down in order to provide read-write access to the data. Data shall be able to be read from the database without interrupting the continuous storage of trend data being carried by the BAS.

D. The database shall be ODBC or OLE database compliant. Provide a commercially-available ODBC driver or OLE database data provider, which would allow applications to access the data via Microsoft Windows standard data access services.

2.11 TOTALIZATION

A. The software shall support totalizing analog, digital, and pulsed inputs and be capable of accumulating, storing, and converting these totals to engineering units used in the documents. These values shall generally be accessible to the Operator Interfaces to support management-reporting functions.

B. Totalization of electricity use/demand shall allow application of totals to different rate periods, which shall be user definable.

C. When specified to provide electrical or utility Use/Demand, the Contractor shall obtain from the local utility all information required to obtain meter data, including k factors, conversion constants, and the like.

2.12 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULING

A. Provide a graphic utility for user-friendly operator interface to adjust equipment-operating schedules.

B. All operators shall be able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to modify schedule entries from any workstation.

C. Scheduling feature shall include multiple seven-day master schedules, plus holiday schedule, each with start time and stop time. Master schedules shall be individually editable for each day and holiday.

D. Scheduling feature shall allow for each individual equipment unit to be assigned to one of the master schedules.



E. Timed override feature shall allow an operator to temporarily change the state ofscheduled equipment. An override command shall be selectable to apply to anindividual unit, all units assigned to a given master schedule, or to all units in abuilding. Timed override shall terminate at the end of an operator selectable time, or atthe end of the scheduled occupied/unoccupied period, whichever comes first. Apassword level that does not allow assignment of master schedules shall allow a timedoverride feature.

F. A yearly calendar feature shall allow assignment of holidays, and automatic reset ofsystem real time clocks for transitions between daylight savings time and standardtime.

2.13 POINT STRUCTURING AND NAMING

A. General:

1. The intent of this Section is to require a consistent means of naming pointsacross the Owner’s WAN. Contractor shall configure the systems from theperspective of the Owner’s WAN, not solely the local Project.

2. The following requirement establishes a standard for naming points andaddressing Buildings, Networks, Devices, Instances, and the like.

3. The convention is tailored towards the Owner’s WAN and as such, the interfaceshall always use this naming convention.

4. Native BACnet systems shall also use this naming convention. For non-BACnetsystems, the naming convention shall be implemented as much as practical, andany deviations from this naming convention shall be approved by the Owner.

5. Each controller shall have English language descriptors for all system points,variables, parameters etc. located and accessible form the controller memory.All point naming shall match between all system files and record documents.

B. Point Summary Table:

1. The term ‘Point’ is a generic description for the class of object represented byanalog and binary inputs, outputs, and values.

2. With each schematic, Contractor shall provide a Point Summary Table listing:

a. Building code (3 digit building acronym).

b. Floor code.

c. Room number.

d. Sub room letter.

e. Equipment type.



f. Equipment number.

g. Equipment code.

h. Full point name (see Point Naming Convention paragraph).

i. Point description.

j. Ethernet backbone network number.

k. Network number.

l. Device ID.

m. Device MAC address.

n. Object ID (object type, instance number).

o. Engineering units.

3. Additional fields for non-BACnet systems shall be appended to each row. PointSummary Table shall be provided in both hard copy and in electronic format(ODBC-compliant).

4. Point Summary Table shall also illustrate Network Variables/BACnet Data Links.

5. The BAS Provider shall coordinate with the Owner’s representative to compileand submit a proposed Point Summary Table for review prior to any objectprogramming or Project startup. The Contractor shall support and not impededirect negotiations between the BAS Provider and the Owner to allow thecustomizing necessary for structuring the BAS point names to meet the Owner’sneeds. The Owner shall grant approval of final point names to be verified throughCommissioning by issuing the approved alarms to the Contractor.

6. The Point Summary Table shall be kept current throughout the duration of theProject by the Contractor as the Master List of all points for the Project. Projectcloseout documents shall include an up-to-date accurate Point Summary Table.The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner the final Point Summary Table prior tofinal acceptance of the system. The Point Summary Table shall be used as areference and guide during the Commissioning process.

7. The Point Summary Table shall contain all data fields on a single row per point.The Point Summary Table is to have a single master source for all pointinformation in the building that is easily sorted and kept up-to-date. Although arelational database of Device ID-to-point information would be more efficient, thesingle line format is required as a single master table that will reflect all pointinformation for the building. The point description shall be an easilyunderstandable English-language description of the point.

The Table below provides an example of the information to be described.Consult BMS Project Manager for current point summary table format.



Point Summary Table - Example (Transpose for a single point per row format) Building Number Floor Level Room Number Sub room letter Equipment Type e.g. Air Handler (AH) Equipment Number Equipment Code *POINT NAME (OBJECT NAME) *Point Description (Object Description) Ethernet Network Number Network Number Device ID Device MAC address Object Type Instance Number Engineering Units e.g. KW Network Variable? e.g. True Server Device Client Devices Included with Functional *Represents information that shall reside in the relevant property for the object

C. Point Naming Convention:

1. All point names shall adhere to the Owner’s format. Said objects shall include all physical I/O points, calculated points used for standard reports, and all application program parameters. For each BAS object, a specific and unique name shall be required.

2. For each point, seven (7) distinct descriptors shall be linked to form each unique object name: Building Code, Floor, Room Number, Equipment Type, Equipment Number or Letter, Equipment Code or Point Description. All keyboard characters except a space are allowable. Each of the four (4) descriptors must be bound by a period to form the entire object name. Reference the paragraphs below for an example of these descriptors.



3. The Owner shall designate the ‘Building’ descriptor. The ‘Equipment Type’descriptor shall define the equipment category; e.g., Chiller, Air Handling Unit, orother equipment. The ‘Equipment Code’ descriptor shall define the hardware orsoftware type or function associated with the equipment; e.g., supplytemperature, water pressure, alarm, mixed air temperature setpoint, etc. andshall contain any numbering conventions for multiples of equipment; e.g.,CHLR1KW, CHLR2KW, BLR2AL (Boiler 2 Alarm), HWP1ST (Hot Water Pump 1Status).

4. A consistent object (point) naming convention shall be utilized to facilitatefamiliarity and operational ease across Owner’s WAN. Inter-facility consistencyshall be maintained to ensure transparent operability to the greatest degreepossible. The table below details the object naming convention and generalformat of the descriptor string. A maximum of 30 characters shall be used.

The Table below provides an example of the point name convention. ConsultBMS Project Manager for current format requirements.

Point / Object Name Requirements Sample: 585.02.1000a.AH31.SAT

Building No. 3 (or 4) numeric characters

(02) - Floor Location 2 alpha or numeric characters - Must use two characters, such as, (02) for Second Floor

(.) 1 character - period; acts as a separator (100) - Room Number 3 - 4 numeric characters

(a) - Sub Room Letter (a-z) if no sub room DO NOT use space or a dash

(.) 1 character - period; acts as a separator (AH) - Equipment Type 2 alpha characters (31) - Equipment Number,Equipment Letter, orCombination

1-2 upper case alpha and/or numericcharacters

(.) 1 character - period; acts as a separator (SAT) - Equipment Code 1 - 4 alpha characters

D. Device Addressing Convention:

1. BACnet network numbers and Device Object IDs shall be unique throughout thenetwork.

2. All assignment of network numbers and Device Object IDs shall be coordinatedwith the Owner.

3. Each Network number shall be unique throughout all facilities and shall beassigned in the following manner unless specified otherwise:

4. Each Device Object Identifier property shall be unique throughout the system andshall be assigned in the following manner unless specified otherwise:



5. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner or a designated representative to ensure that no duplicate Device Object IDs occur.

6. Alternative Device ID schemes or cross Project Device ID duplication if allowed shall be approved before Project commencement by the Owner.

2.14 OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHIC SOFTWARE

A. Graphic software shall facilitate user-friendly interface to all aspects of the System Software specified above. The intent of this Specification is to require a graphic package that provides for intuitive operation of the systems without extensive training and experience. It shall facilitate logical and simple system interrogation, modification, configuration, and diagnosis.

B. Graphic software shall support multiple simultaneous screens to be displayed and resizable in a ‘Windows’-like environment. All functions excepting text entry functions shall be executable with a mouse.

C. Graphic software shall provide for multitasking such that third-party programs can be used while the OWS software is on line. Software shall provide the ability to alarm graphically even when operator is in another software package.

D. Operating system software shall be [Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional].

E. The software shall allow for Owner creation of user-defined, color graphic displays of geographic maps, building plans, floor plans, and mechanical and electrical system schematics. These graphics shall be capable of displaying all point information from the database including any attributes associated with each point (i.e., engineering units, etc.). In addition, operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse

F. Screen Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system graphic screens via a graphical penetration scheme by using the mouse to select from menus or ‘button’ icons. Each graphic screen shall be capable of having a unique list of other graphic screens that are directly linked through the selection of a menu item or button icon.

G. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic physical point values shall automatically updated at a minimum frequency of six (6) updates per minute without operator intervention. Point value fields shall be displayed with a color code depicting normal, abnormal, override and alarm conditions.

H. Point Override Feature: Each displayed point shall be individually enabled/disabled to allow mouse-driven override of digital points or changing of analog points. Such overrides or changes shall occur in the control unit, not just in the workstation software. The graphic point override feature shall be subject to password level protection. Points that are overridden shall be reported as an alarm, and shall be displayed in a coded color. The alarm message shall include the operator’s user name. A list of points that are currently in an override state shall be available through menu selection.



I. Submit all Graphics per Section 25 00 00.

J. Dynamic Symbols: Provide a selection of standard symbols that change inappearance based on the value of an associated point.

1. Analog symbol: Provide a symbol that represents the value of an analog point asthe length of a line or linear bar.

2. Digital symbol: Provide symbols such as switches, pilot lights, rotating fanwheels, etc. to represent the value of digital input and output points.

3. Point Status Color: Graphic presentations shall indicate different colors fordifferent point statuses. (For instance, green = normal, red = alarm, gray (or‘???’) for non-response.

K. Graphics Development Package: Graphic development and generation software shallbe provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.

1. The Contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbolsdepicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters,dampers, etc.), mechanical system components (e.g., pumps, chillers, coolingtowers, boilers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.

2. The Graphic Development Package shall use a mouse or similar pointing deviceto allow the user to perform the following:

a. Define symbols.

b. Position items on graphic screens.

c. Attach physical or virtual points to a graphic.

d. Define background screens.

e. Define connecting lines and curves.

f. Locate, orient and size descriptive text.

g. Define and display colors for all elements.

h. Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated systempoints or other displays.

i. Create hot spots or link triggers to other graphic displays or other functionsin the software.



2.15 REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER WORKSTATION GRAPHIC SOFTWARE

A. Remote graphic operator software shall provide all the functionality specified for thelocal graphic software. It shall also provide for dial-up communications using thespecified modems via commercial telephone lines to connect to the Local Supervisoryor Primary LAN, and using the Internet.

B. Software shall not require graphic images to be sent across the phone lines or 56Kbpsor slower Internet connection. Graphic images shall reside on the remote operatorworkstation hard drive and all licenses must be provided for the graphic software onthe remote machine. Exceptions to this requirement include:

1. System configuration uses an Internet server and presents web pages that canbe pulled up using a standard browser.

2. System configuration uses an Internet server and presents the standaloneapplication running locally but controlled via a remote browser. OperatorInterface Graphical Software application must therefore support multi-instancingto allow multiple simultaneous remote connections and use of the graphicsoftware.

C. Software shall be capable of initiating communication to the any LAN, upon usercommand, to perform all specified functions. Software shall be capable of initiatingcommunication to the LANs in accordance with user-programmed time schedules toupload trend and report data. Software shall be capable of communicating from theLAN in accordance with user-programmed time schedules to report alarms, uploadtrend, and report data. Software shall automatically terminate the communicationwhenever all applications requiring modem connection are closed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly and completely configure BAS system software,supplemental software, network communications, CSS, OWS, remote operatorworkstation, portable operators terminal, printer, and remote communications.

3.02 SITE-SPECIFIC APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

A. Provide all database creation and Site-specific application control programming asrequired by these Specifications, national and local standards and for a fully functioningsystem. Provide all initial Site-specific application programming and thoroughlydocument programming. Generally meet the intent of the written sequence ofoperation. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to request clarification on sequenceissues that require such clarification.

B. All Site-specific programming shall be fully documented and submitted for review andapproval, both prior to downloading into the panel, at the completion of functionalperformance testing, and at the end of the Warranty Period.



C. All programming, graphics and data files must be maintained in a logical system ofdirectories. All file names shall adhere to the naming convention format as establishedin the Owner’s Standard Acronyms documentation. All files developed for the Projectwill be the property of the Owner and shall remain on the workstation(s)/server(s) at thecompletion of the Project.

3.03 PASSWORD SETUP

A. Set up the following password levels to include the specified capabilities:

1. Level 1: (Owner’s BAS Administrator):

a. Level 2 capabilities.

b. View, add, change and delete user names, passwords, password levels.

c. All unrestricted system capabilities including all network managementfunctions.

2. Level 2: (Programmer):


b. Configure system software.

c. Modify control unit programs.

d. Modify graphic software.

e. Essentially unrestricted except for viewing or modifying user names,passwords, password levels.

3. Level 3: (Senior HVAC Technician):


b. Override output points.

c. Change setpoints.

d. Change equipment schedules.

e. Exit BAS software to use third party programs.

4. Level 4: (Junior HVAC Technician):


b. Acknowledge alarms.

c. Temporarily override equipment schedules.

5. Level 5: (HVAC Technician Trainee):



a. Display all graphic data.

b. Trend point data.

B. Contractor shall assist Owner’s operators with assigning user names, passwords and password levels.

3.04 POINT PARAMETERS

A. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog input:

1. Name.

2. Address.

3. Scanning frequency or COV threshold.

4. Engineering units.

5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units.

6. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition.

7. High and low value reporting limits (reasonableness values), which shall prevent control logic from using shorted or open circuit values.

8. Default value to be used when the actual measured value is not reporting. This is required only for points that are transferred across the primary and/or secondary controlling networks and used in control programs residing in control units other than the one in which the point resides. Events causing the default value to be used shall include failure of the control unit in which the point resides, or failure of any network over which the point value is transferred.

9. Selectable averaging function that shall average the measured value over a user selected number of scans for reporting.

B. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog output:

1. Name.

2. Address.

3. Output updating frequency.

4. Engineering units.

5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units.

6. Output Range.

7. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting.



C. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital input:

1. Name.

2. Address.

3. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.).

4. Debounce time delay.

5. Message and alarm reporting as specified.

6. Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the lastchange of state.

7. Totalization of on-time (for all motorized equipment status points), andaccumulated number of off-to-on transitions.

D. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital output:

1. Name.

2. Address.

3. Output updating frequency.

4. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.).

5. Direct or Reverse action selection.

6. Minimum on-time.

7. Minimum off-time.

8. Status association with a DI and failure alarming (as applicable).

9. Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the lastchange of state.

10. Totalization of on-time (for all motorized equipment status points), andaccumulated number of off-to-on transitions.

11. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting.

3.05 TRENDS

A. Contractor shall establish and store trend logs. Trend logs shall be prepared for eachphysical input and output point, and all dynamic virtual points such as setpoints subjectto a reset schedule, intermediate setpoint values for cascaded control loops, and thelike as directed by the Owner.



B. The Owner will analyze trend logs of the system operating parameters to evaluate normal system functionality. Contractor shall establish these trends and ensure they are being stored properly.

1. Data shall include a single row of field headings and the data thereafter shall be contiguous. Each record shall include a date and time field or single date stamp. Recorded parameters for a given piece of equipment or component shall be trended at the same intervals and be presented in a maximum of two separate 2-dimensional formats with time being the row heading and field name being the column heading.

C. Sample times indicated as COV (±) or change-of-value mean that the changed parameter only needs to be recorded after the value changes by the amount listed. When output to the trending file, the latest recorded value shall be listed with any given time increment record. The samples shall be filled with the latest values also if the points include different time intervals. If the BAS does not have the capability to record based on COV, the parameter shall be recorded based on the interval common to the unit.

D. Trending intervals or COV thresholds shall be dictated by the Owner upon system start-up.

E. The Contractor shall demonstrate functional trends as specified for a period of 30 days after successful system demonstration before final acceptance of the system.

3.06 TREND GRAPHS

A. Prepare controller and workstation software to display graphical format trends. Trended values and intervals shall be the same as those specified

B. Lines shall be labeled and shall be distinguishable from each other by using either different line types, or different line colors.

C. Indicate engineering units of the y-axis values; e.g. degrees F., inches w.g., Btu/lb, percent open, etc.

D. The y-axis scale shall be chosen so that all trended values are in a readable range. Do not mix trended values on one graph if their unit ranges are incompatible.

E. Trend outside air temperature, humidity, and enthalpy during each period in which any other points are trended.

F. All points trended for one HVAC subsystem (e.g. air handling unit, chilled water system, etc.) shall be trended during the same trend period.

G. Each graph shall be clearly labeled with HVAC subsystem title, date, and times.

[Engineer must edit the following to be Project specific.]



3.07 ALARMS

A. This Section supersedes and over rules all references to building automation alarms inthe Contract Documents, including all sequences of operations and other sections ofthe BAS Specification in regards to alarms. The Contractor shall support and notimpede direct negotiations between the BAS Provider and the Owner to allow thecustomizing necessary for customizing alarms and alarm parameters to meet theOwner’s needs.

B. The BAS Provider is required to submit a point summary to confirm building automationpoint names as specified herein The BAS Provider shall submit this point summarywith the addition of identifying all alarms which includes detail information on the alarmparameters to the UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Manager of Building Automation forapproval prior to the beginning of any Commissioning process of the buildingautomation system.

C. The UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Manager of Building Automation will provide theformat form to the BAS Provider upon request. The Owner shall grant approval ofalarms to be verified through Commissioning by issuing the approved alarms to theContractor. The approved alarms issued to the Contractor shall be used for theFunctional Test Procedures alarms tested. The Contractor shall initiate the start of thisprocess immediately after building automation submittal have been approved andmonitor the progress to ensure the construction schedule is not delayed.

D. Analog Input Alarms:

1. Duct Static Pressure:

a. Alarm @ +(-) 0.3 inches from set point for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.

b. Normal @ +(-) 0.2 inches from set point for 5 minutes.

c. Alarm is active after fan is proven ON for the minimum time necessary toallow the sensor to be within the alarm parameter.

d. Alarm is deactivated after fan is proven OFF.

2. Duct Air Temperatures:

a. Alarm @ +(-) 2.0 degrees F from set point for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.

b. Normal @ +(-) 1.0 degrees F from set point for 5 minutes.

c. Alarm is active after fan is proven ON for the minimum time necessary toallow the sensor to be within the alarm parameter.


3. Space or Room Temperature:

a. Typically will not be alarmable.



b. Submit as not alarmable and Owner will confirm.

4. Duct or Space Humidity:

a. Alarm @ (+) 15 percent from set point (60 percent) for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.

b. Alarm @ (-) 20 percent from set point (60 percent) for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.

c. Normal @ 5 percent from offset alarm parameters for 5 minutes.

d. Point is always ready to alarm.

5. Water temperature sensors which are inputs to control loops:

a. Submit reasonable alarm parameter to prevent nuisance alarming Priority 3.

b. Owner will confirm alarm.

6. All other Analog Inputs:

a. BAS Provider shall utilize their expertise and recommend not less than three (3) analog input alarms which protect the Owner’s best interests.

b. Submit at Priority 3 with recommended alarm parameters.

c. Identify recommended alarms in submittal.

d. Owner will confirm alarm.

E. Digital Inputs Alarms:

1. Proofs (current sensor, air flow switches, water differential pressure switches etc).

a. Digital inputs paired with BAS digital output will have the ability to alarm at all times @ Priority 3.

b. Alarm will delay for the reason time needed when the state of the digital output changes to prevent nuisance alarms.

c. Point is in alarmed condition when the value of the digital input does not equal the value of the digital output after the time delay.

d. Point is in the Normal condition when the value of the digital input equals the value of the digital output after the time delay.

e. Digital input proofs without a paired digital output shall not alarm and be for monitoring purposes only.



2. Safeties (high static cutout, freeze condition, excessive vibration, high humiditycutout, VFD fault, etc.).

a. The digital input shall be always ready to alarm without delay.

b. The digital input shall display “ALARM” at Priority 3 at the Alarm screenwhen activated.

c. The digital input shall display “NORMAL” at the Alarm screen whendeactivated.

3. Monitoring Digital Inputs (auxiliary drain pan alarm, Liebert Unit general alarm,water detector, etc) the exception is air filter differential pressure switch.

a. All digital inputs which “deactivated” is the normal state of planedoperations shall alarm when the normal state of planed operation changes.

b. The digital input shall display “ALARM” at Priority 3 at the Alarm screenwhen activated.

c. The digital input shall display “NORMAL” at the Alarm screen whendeactivated.

4. Air Filters:



c. The digital input shall display “DIRTY” when activated.

d. The digital input shall display “CLEAN” when deactivated

F. Analog Outputs Alarms:

1. All Analog Outputs:

a. BAS Provider shall utilize their expertise and recommend any analogoutput alarms which protect the Owner’s best interests.

b. Identify recommended alarms in submittal.

c. Owner will confirm any alarms.

G. Digital Outputs Alarms:

1. Refer to digital inputs paired with digital outputs as specified herein.

2. All Digital Outputs:

a. BAS Provider shall utilize their expertise and recommend any digital outputalarms which protect the Owner’s best interests.





H. Nuisance Alarms: All alarms which have been identified by the Owner as a nuisance alarm due to numerous times in and out of alarm, shall be addressed and corrected by the Contractor in a manner that the Owner has approved.

I. See requirements for additional equipment-specific alarms specified in the Contract Documents.

3.08 GRAPHIC SCREENS

[Engineer must provide electronic control design floor plans.] A. Floor Plan Screens: The Contract Document Drawings will be made available to the

Contractor in AutoCAD LT 2002 format upon request. These Drawings may be used only for developing backgrounds for specified graphic screens; however the Owner does not guarantee the suitability of these Drawings for the Contractor’s purpose. Graphic Screens shall be submitted for approval.

1. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each floor [wing] [tower] [other] of each building.

a. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens.

b. Indicate the location of temperature sensors associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the floor plan screens.

c. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Use a distinct line symbol to demarcate each terminal unit zone boundary. Use distinct colors to demarcate each air handling unit zone.

d. Mechanical floor plan Drawings will be made available to the Contractor upon request for the purpose of determining zone boundaries. Indicate room numbers as provided by the Owner.

e. Provide a drawing link from each space temperature sensor symbol and equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen.

2. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and a plan screen of the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide a drawing link from each equipment symbol shown on the graphic plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic screen.



3. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic buildingkey plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphicallyindicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link graphic buildingkey plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scalegraphic floor plan screen to the building key plan and to each of the other graphicfloor plan screens.

4. Provide a graphic Site plan with links to and from each building plan.

B. System Schematic Screens: Provide graphic system schematic screen for each HVACsubsystem controlled with each I/O point in the Project appearing on at least onegraphic screen. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints,current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc. as applicable.General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. Input/output devices shallbe shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineeringunits for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors)shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use ofa pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the mouse. Indicateall adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic screen or, if spacedoes not allow, on a supplemental linked-setpoint screen.

1. Provide graphic screens for each air handling system. Indicate outside airtemperature and enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied,unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down). Link screens for air handlers to the heatingsystem and cooling system graphics. Link screens for supply and exhaustsystems if they are not combined onto one screen.

2. Provide a graphic screen for each zone. Provide links to graphic systemschematic screens of air handling units that serve the corresponding zone.

3. Provide a cooling system graphic screen showing all points associated with thechillers, cooling towers and pumps. Indicate outside air dry-bulb temperatureand calculated wet-bulb temperature. Link screens for chilled water andcondenser water systems if they cannot fit onto one cooling plant graphic screen.

4. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reportsshowing current and monthly electric uses, demands, peak values, and otherpertinent values.

C. Bar Chart Screens: On each graphic Bar Chart Screen, provide drawing links to thegraphic air handling unit schematic screens.

1. Provide a graphic chilled water valve screen showing the analog output signal ofall chilled water valves in a bar chart format, with signals expressed aspercentage of fully open valve (percentage of full cooling). Indicate the dischargeair temperature and setpoint of each air handling unit, cooling system chilledwater supply and return temperatures and the outside air temperature andhumidity on this graphic. Provide drawing links between the graphic cooling plantscreen and this graphic screen.



2. Provide a graphic heating water valve screen showing the analog output signal of all air handling unit heating water valves in a bar chart format, with signals expressed as percentage of fully open valve (percentage of full heating). Indicate the temperature of the controlled medium (such as AHU discharge air temperature or zone hot water supply temperature) and the associated setpoint and the outside air temperature and humidity.

D. Alarms: Each programmed alarm shall appear on at least one graphic screen. In general, alarms shall be displayed on the graphic system schematic screen for the system that the alarm is associated with (for example, chiller alarm shall be shown on graphic cooling system schematic screen). For all graphic screens, display analog values that are in a ‘high alarm’ condition in a red color, ‘low alarm’ condition in a blue color. Indicate digital values that are in alarm condition in a red color.



AE Project Number: BAS Software_Programming_Retrofit 25 15 10 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 15 10 – BAS SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING - RETROFIT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY



2. Alarm.


4. Graphics.

B. Fully configure systems and furnish and install all software, programming and dynamic colorgraphics that completely integrate and operate from the existing system currently in operationat the institution. All access, programming, alarming, and system configuration shall beutilized from the existing system software and database without any third party programs orgateways.

C. Refer to Section 25 00 10, Building Automation System (BAS) General - Retrofit for generalrequirements as well as requirements for interface with Owner’s WAN.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 POINT STRUCTURING AND NAMING

A. General:



1. The intent of this Section is to require a consistent means of naming points across the Owner’s WAN. Configure the systems from the perspective of the Owner’s WAN, not solely the local Project.

2. The following requirement establishes a standard for naming points and addressing Buildings, Networks, Devices, Instances, and the like.

3. The convention is tailored towards the Owner’s WAN and as such, the interface shall always use this naming convention.

4. Native BACnet systems shall also use this naming convention. For non-BACnet systems, the naming convention shall be implemented as much as practical, and any deviations from this naming convention shall be approved by the Owner.

5. Each controller shall have English language descriptors for all system points, variables, parameters etc. located and accessible from the controller memory. All point naming shall match between all system files and record documents.

B. Point Summary Table:

1. The BAS Provider shall coordinate with the Owner’s Building Automation System department to compile and submit a proposed Point Summary Table for review prior to any object programming or project startup. The Contractor shall support and not impede direct negotiations between the BAS Provider and the Owner to allow the customizing necessary for structuring the BAS point names to meet the Owner’s needs. The UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Manager of Building Automation will provide the format form of the Point Summary Table to be submitted to the BAS Provider upon request. Contactor shall ensure final BAS point names have the approval of the Owner’s Manager of Building Automation System prior to any object programming or project startup.

2. The Point Summary Table shall be kept current throughout the duration of the Project by the Contractor as the Master List of all points for the Project. Project closeout documents shall include an up-to-date accurate Point Summary Table. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner the final Point Summary Table prior to final acceptance of the system. The Point Summary Table shall be used as a reference and guide during the commissioning process.

C. Point Naming Convention

1. All proposed point names shall reference the existing UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON BAS Acronym Standards which can be located and viewed on the Apogee BAS Server.

D. Device Addressing Convention:

1. BACnet network numbers and Device Object IDs shall be unique throughout the network.

2. All assignment of network numbers and Device Object IDs shall be coordinated with the Owner.

3. Coordinate with the Owner or a designated representative to ensure that no duplicate Device Object IDs occur.

4. Alternative Device ID schemes or cross project Device ID duplication if allowed shall be approved before Project commencement by the Owner.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly and completely configure BAS system software, supplementalsoftware, network communications, CSS, OWS, remote operator workstation, portableoperators terminal, printer, and remote communications.

3.02 SITE-SPECIFIC APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

A. Provide all database creation and Site-specific application control programming as requiredby these Specifications, national and local standards and for a fully functioning system.Provide all initial Site-specific application programming and thoroughly documentprogramming. Generally meet the intent of the written sequence of operation. It is theContractor’s responsibility to request clarification on sequence issues that require suchclarification.

B. All Site-specific programming shall be fully documented and submitted for review andapproval, both prior to downloading into the panel, at the completion of functionalperformance testing, and at the end of the Warranty Period. Programs shall utilize commentlines which will also reside in the field panel.

C. All programming, graphics and data files must be maintained in a logical system ofdirectories. All file names shall adhere to the naming convention format as established in theOwner’s Standard Acronyms documentation. All files developed for the Project will be theproperty of the Owner and shall remain on the workstation(s)/server(s) at the completion ofthe Project.

3.03 ALARMS

A. This Section supersedes and over rules all references to building automation alarms in theContract Documents, including all sequences of operations and other sections of the BASSpecification in regards to alarms. The Contractor shall support and not impede directnegotiations between the BAS Provider and the Owner to allow the customizing necessaryfor customizing alarms and alarm parameters to meet the Owner’s needs.

B. The BAS Provider is required to submit a point summary to confirm building automation pointnames as specified herein The BAS Provider shall submit this point summary with theaddition of identifying all alarms which includes detail information on the alarm parameters tothe UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Manager of Building Automation for approval prior to thebeginning of any commissioning process of the building automation system.

C. The UNIVERSITY OF HOUSTON Manager of Building Automation will provide the formatform to the BAS Provider upon request. The Owner shall grant approval of alarms to beverified through commissioning by issuing the approved alarms to the Contractor. Theapproved alarms issued to the Contractor shall be used for the Functional Test Proceduresalarms tested. The Contractor shall initiate the start of this process immediately after buildingautomation submittal have been approved and monitor the progress to ensure theconstruction schedule is not delayed.

D. Analog Input Alarms:

1. Duct Static Pressure:

a. Alarm @ +(-) 0.3 inches from set point for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.



b. Normal @ +(-) 0.2 inches from set point for 5 minutes.

c. Alarm is active after fan is proven ON for the minimum time necessary to allow thesensor to be within the alarm parameter.


2. Duct Air Temperatures:

a. Alarm @ +(-) 2.0 degrees F from set point for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.

b. Normal @ +(-) 1.0 degrees F from set point for 5 minutes.

c. Alarm is active after fan is proven ON for the minimum time necessary to allow thesensor to be within the alarm parameter.


3. Space or Room Temperature:



4. Duct or Space Humidity:

a. Alarm @ (+) 15 percent from set point (60 percent) for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.

b. Alarm @ (-) 20 percent from set point (60 percent) for 5 minutes @ Priority 3.

c. Normal @ 5 percent from offset alarm parameters for 5 minutes.

d. Point is always ready to alarm.

5. Water temperature sensors which are inputs to control loops:

a. Submit reasonable alarm parameter to prevent nuisance alarming Priority 3.

b. Owner will confirm alarm.

6. All other Analog Inputs:

a. BAS Provider shall utilize their expertise and recommend not less than three (3)analog input alarms which protect the Owner’s best interests.

b. Submit at Priority 3 with recommended alarm parameters.

c. Identify recommended alarms in submittal.

d. Owner will confirm alarm.

E. Digital Inputs Alarms:

1. Proofs (current sensor, air flow switches, water differential pressure switches etc).

a. Digital inputs paired with BAS digital output will have the ability to alarm at all times@ Priority 3.



b. Alarm will delay for the reason time needed when the state of the digital output changes to prevent nuisance alarms.

c. Point is in alarmed condition when the value of the digital input does not equal the value of the digital output after the time delay.

d. Point is in the Normal condition when the value of the digital input equals the value of the digital output after the time delay.

e. Digital input proofs without a paired digital output shall not alarm and be for monitoring purposes only.

2. Safeties (high static cutout, freeze condition, excessive vibration, high humidity cutout, VFD fault, etc.).

a. The digital input shall be always ready to alarm without delay.

b. The digital input shall display “ALARM” at Priority 3 at the Alarm screen when activated.

c. The digital input shall display “NORMAL” at the Alarm screen when deactivated.

3. Monitoring Digital Inputs (auxiliary drain pan alarm, Liebert Unit general alarm, water detector, etc) the exception is air filter differential pressure switch.

a. All digital inputs which “deactivated” is the normal state of planed operations shall alarm when the normal state of planed operation changes.

b. The digital input shall display “ALARM” at Priority 3 at the Alarm screen when activated.

c. The digital input shall display “NORMAL” at the Alarm screen when deactivated.

4. Air Filters:



c. The digital input shall display “DIRTY” when activated.

d. The digital input shall display “CLEAN” when deactivated

F. Analog Outputs Alarms:

1. All Analog Outputs:

a. BAS Provider shall utilize their expertise and recommend any analog output alarms which protect the Owner’s best interests.



G. Digital Outputs Alarms:

1. Refer to digital inputs paired with digital outputs as specified herein.



2. All Digital Outputs:

a. BAS Provider shall utilize their expertise and recommend any digital output alarmswhich protect the Owner’s best interests.



H. All alarms shall be enhanced to alarm and display the alarm Priority level at the alarm screentable of the specific Owner approved BAS workstations

I. Priority 2 Critical Alarms: All incubator temperature alarms, ultra low temperature alarms, andany other alarm that the Owner deems critical shall report to the Owner specified destinations as a Priority 2 alarm. The Contractor, with Owner approved time delays and triggered points, shall enhance the alarm to prevent nuisance alarming.

J. Priority 3 Mechanical Critical Alarms: All mechanical equipment alarms, which has beenidentified by the Owner and is achievable with the I/O point available in the Project, shallreport to the Owner specified destinations as a Priority 3 alarm. The Contractor, with Ownerapproved time delays and triggered points, shall enhance the alarm to prevent nuisancealarming.

K. Priority 4 Mechanical Alarms: Dirty air filters alarms and non critical alarms, which has beidentified by the Owner and is achievable with the I/O point available in the Project, shallreport to the Owner specified destinations as a Priority 4 alarm. The Contractor, with Ownerapproved time delays and triggered points, shall enhance the alarm to prevent nuisancealarming.

L. Nuisance Alarms: All alarms which have been identified by the Owner as a nuisance alarmdue to numerous times in and out of alarm shall be addressed and corrected by theContractor in a manner that the Owner has approved.

M. Contractor shall review Owner’s current and typical BAS existing alarms. The Contractorshall use this data as a guideline in identifying all alarmable points for this Project. TheContractor shall submit all virtual and physical points involved in the Project with all alarmablepoints identified for the Owner to review. Contractor is responsible for complying with allalarming requests by the Owner that is achievable with the I/O point available in the Project,with existing BAS database, and with the creation of any necessary virtual points.

3.04 GRAPHIC SCREENS

[ENGINEER MUST PROVIDE ELECTRONIC CONTROL DESIGN FLOOR PLANS TO THE CONTRACTOR.]

A. Background resolution shall be 1280 x 1024 for all graphics.

B. Floor Plan Screens: The Contract Document Drawings will be made available to theContractor in AutoCAD LT 2002 format upon request. These Drawings may be used only fordeveloping backgrounds for specified graphic screens; however the Owner does notguarantee the suitability of these Drawings for the Contractor’s purpose. Graphic Screensshall be submitted for approval.

1. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each floor [wing] [tower] [other] of each building.

a. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment roomscreens.



b. Indicate the location of temperature sensors associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the floor plan screens.

c. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Use a distinct line symbol to demarcate each terminal unit zone boundary. Use distinct colors to demarcate each air handling unit zone.

d. Mechanical floor plan Drawings will be made available to the Contractor upon request for the purpose of determining zone boundaries. Indicate room numbers as provided by the Owner.

e. Provide a drawing link from each space temperature sensor symbol and equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen.

f. The Owner may approve the substitution of tabular graphics in lieu of floor plan graphics as circumstances apply. Contractor shall verify with Owner whether to create tabular or floor plan graphics.

2. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale graphic floor plan screen to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens.

3. Provide a graphic for each system of the Project. Contact Owner to identify all systems requiring a graphic. An example of the AHU system is:

a. Provide graphic screens for each air handling system to include but not limited to describe area served and any information the Owner has identified as pertinent.

b. Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics.

c. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems if they are not combined onto one screen.

4. Provide a graphic for each system of the Project. Contact Owner to identify all systems requiring a graphic. An example of the CHW system is:

a. Provide a cooling system graphic screen showing all points associated with the chillers, cooling towers and pumps.

b. Indicate outside air dry-bulb temperature and calculated wet-bulb temperature.

c. Link screens for chilled water and condenser water systems if they cannot fit onto one cooling plant graphic screen.

5. Link graphic screens to all pertinent graphics and/or pertinent data/ information the Owner has requested.

a. Link the appropriate sequence of operations to graphics. (.rtf format).

b. Link approved schematic control Record Drawing to graphic. (.pdf format)

6. Submit all graphics per Section 25 00 10 for Owner approval.


AE Project Number: BAS Communications Devices 25 30 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 30 00 – BAS COMMUNICATION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. RELATED DOCUMENTS



C. Refer to Section 25 00 00 - Building Automation System (BAS) General for definitions andabbreviations.

D. 23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing

B. SUMMARY

A. Provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated system connecting BCs,AACs, ASCs and Gateways to the Owner’s Wide Area Network (UNIVERSITY OFHOUSTON WAN).

1. Local Supervisory LAN Gateways/Routers.

2. Chiller Controls Interface Device (CID).

3. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD’s).

B. Provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated system connecting BCs,AACs, ASCs and Gateways to the Owner’s Wide Area Network (UNIVERSITY OFHOUSTON WAN).

C. Designated IP Address by Owner (within project budget).

D. Controllers serving fire alarm system must be rated per NFPA

C. REFERENCE STANDARDS






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. GENERAL

D. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. LOcal Supervisory LAN Gateways/Routers

E. The Supervisory Gateway shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that acts as a gateway/router between the Supervisory LAN CSSs or OWS and the Primary LAN.

F. The Gateway shall perform information translation between the Primary LAN and the Local Supervisory LAN, which is 100 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP and shall use BACnet over IP.

G. The gateway shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, real-time clock, communication ports, and power supply as specified for a BC in Section 25 14 00. Each gateway/router shall be mounted in a lockable enclosure unless it is a PC that also serves as an OWS.

H. The gateway/router shall allow centralized overall system supervision, operator interface, management report generation, alarm annunciation, acquisition of trend data, and communication with control units. It shall allow system operators to perform the following functions from the CSS, OWSs, and POTs:

1. Configure systems.

2. Monitor and supervise control of all points.

3. Change control setpoints.

4. Override input values.

5. Override output values.

6. Enter programmed start/stop time schedules.

7. View and acknowledge alarms and messages.

8. Receive, store and display trend logs and management reports.

9. Upload/Download programs, databases, etc. as specified.

I. Upon loss of power to the Gateway, the battery shall provide for minimum 100 hour backup of all programs and data in RAM.

J. The Gateway shall be transparent to control functions and shall not be required to control information routing on the Primary LAN

C. Chiller Controls Interface Device (CID)

K. The CID shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that acts as a gateway between the control protocol and the applicable chiller controller.



L. The CID shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, communication ports and,power supply.

M. Each CID shall support full bi-directional communications translation as more fully specifiedin Section 25 15 00.

N. The following points shall be mapped as a minimum:

1. CHW Supply and Return Temperatures.

2. CW Supply and Return Temperatures.

3. Power Consumption (kW).

4. Percent of Power Consumption (compared to maximum).

5. Bearing Temperature.

6. Suction and Head Pressures.

7. Suction and Head Temperatures.

8. All available alarms; common alarm as minimum.

9. Chiller Status.

10. Enable/Disable.

11. Current Limit Percent.

12. CHW Setpoint and Setpoint Reset.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. PREPARATION

O. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do notproceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptableto Installer.

B. INSTALLATION

C. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referencedstandards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

E. Provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated system.

F. Closely coordinate with the owner, or designated representative, to establish IP addresses andcommunications to assure proper operation of the building automation system with owner’swan.

G. Closely coordinate with owner’s commissioning agent and TAB firm.



AE Project Number: BAS Comminications Devices - Retrofit 25 30 10 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 30 10 – BAS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - RETROFIT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY


1. Local Supervisory LAN Gateways/Routers.

2. Chiller Controls Interface Device (CID).

3. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD’s).

B. Provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated system connecting BCs,AACs, ASCs and Gateways to the Owner’s Wide Area Network (UNIVERSITY OFHOUSTON WAN).

C. Designated IP Address by Owner (within project budget).





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


2.02 LOCAL SUPERVISORY LAN GATEWAYS/ROUTERS

A. The Supervisory Gateway shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that actsas a gateway/router between the Supervisory LAN CSSs or OWS and the Primary LAN.



B. The Gateway shall perform information translation between the Primary LAN and the LocalSupervisory LAN, which is 100 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP and shall use BACnet over IP.

C. The gateway shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, real-time clock,communication ports, and power supply as specified for a BC in Section 25 14 10. Eachgateway/router shall be mounted in a lockable enclosure unless it is a PC that also serves asan OWS.

D. The gateway/router shall allow centralized overall system supervision, operator interface,management report generation, alarm annunciation, acquisition of trend data, andcommunication with control units. It shall allow system operators to perform the followingfunctions from the CSS, OWSs, and POTs:

1. Configure systems.

2. Monitor and supervise control of all points.

3. Change control setpoints.

4. Override input values.

5. Override output values.

6. Enter programmed start/stop time schedules.

7. View and acknowledge alarms and messages.

8. Receive, store and display trend logs and management reports.

9. Upload/Download programs, databases, etc. as specified.

E. Upon loss of power to the Gateway, the battery shall provide for minimum 100 hour backupof all programs and data in RAM.

F. The Gateway shall be transparent to control functions and shall not be required to controlinformation routing on the Primary LAN

2.03 CHILLER CONTROLS INTERFACE DEVICE (CID)

A. The CID shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that acts as a gatewaybetween the control protocol and the applicable chiller controller.

B. The CID shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, communication ports and,power supply.

C. Each CID shall support full bi-directional communications translation as more fully specifiedin Section 25 15 10.

D. The following points shall be mapped as a minimum:

1. CHW Supply and Return Temperatures.

2. CW Supply and Return Temperatures.

3. Power Consumption (kW).

4. Percent of Power Consumption (compared to maximum).



5. Bearing Temperature.

6. Suction and Head Pressures.

7. Suction and Head Temperatures.

8. All available alarms; common alarm as minimum.

9. Chiller Status.

10. Enable/Disable.

11. Current Limit Percent.

12. CHW Setpoint and Setpoint Reset.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION



C. Provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated system.

D. Closely coordinate with the Owner, or designated representative, to establish IP addresses and communications to assure proper operation of the building automation system with Owner’s WAN.

E. Coordinate with Owner’s Commissioning Agent and TAB firm.



AE Project Number: Integrated Auto Controls Sequences of Operation 25 90 00 – 1 Revision Date: 1/29/2018

SECTION 25 90 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROLS SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andother Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The Contractor's attention is specifically directed, but not limited, to the following documents foradditional requirements:1. Uniform General Conditions for Construction Contracts, State of Texas, 2015 (UGC).2. The University of Houston’s Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions for

Construction.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements, including, but not limited to, thefollowing:

1. Successful creation of sequences of operation

2. Sequence of operation as carried forward through commissioning and into the long-termoperation of the building

3. Points list

4. Monitoring capability and alarms

5. System storage capability

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 91 13 – “General Commissioning Requirements”2. Section 23 05 93 – “Testing, Adjustment and Balancing”

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. Conduct a BAS Mockup session to prove sequence of operations, graphics and overall acceptance priorto construction. The owner, MEP consultant and General Contractor shall be present and the mockupsession shall be conducted at the controls vendor’s facility. Controls vendor shall provide BMS withrecords of testing results demonstrating 100% functionality. The Mockup session shall take no longerthan one week. At completion, all parties present shall sign off that the mockup was completed andproven to meet the design intent.

B. If Commissioning agent must make return trips, a fee will apply. Commissioning may be done inphases with the Cx agent’s approval.


A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by aspecific edition date.



B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable tothis Project.

C. The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for building automation systems (BAS) shall be the BuildingManagement Systems shop. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with theapplicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:

1. ASHRAE 90.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.

B. Submit a flow diagram identifying the components that must be controlled to achieve the desiredoperational results. The sequence can generally be written with a subsection for each of the major airhandling unit components. Fan control may be addressed in one section, temperature control inanother, and various safety devices and accessories detailed separately1. Identify the airflow pathway and piping connections. Airflow and water flow rates do not need

to be included as this information should be included on equipment schedules. The flow ratescould be included if desired, or diagrams can be left more generic. The latter permits use of thesame diagram for multiple units with similar configurations. Include all inputs and variables thatmust be controlled. Components that are not inputs or controlled variables should be left out tomaintain a simple diagram that is easy to read.

2. Categorize the purpose of the equipment: for example, comfort heating or cooling for humanoccupants. maintaining acceptable temperatures for a data center or specific pressurerelationships. Include any other equipment that is affected by the sequence, for example, amakeup air unit must interlock with the exhaust fan(s) that create the need for the makeup airunit. A system with multiple purposes should have all purposes noted.

3. Identify the required inputs and output, e.g. space sensors, air temperature sensors, static ordifferential pressure sensors, etc. Note what inputs are already available for use in the controlsystem and whether the required input devices are already included as a part of the equipmentor specified for other purposes. Confirm that additional devices are indicated in theconstruction documents and specified at this time.

4. List any code required functions of the system (such as ASHRAE 90.1).5. Incorporate Owner’s operational requirements and expectations. Identify any desired system

features which may conflict with overall successful operation or code requirements. Review thesystem design for additional components necessary to suit the owner’s desired operation.

C. Develop a matrix of points (see Table 1 for sample matrix). The points can be classified as digital oranalog. Using the information gathered in the previous steps, create a points list designating all theinputs and outputs that are controlled or monitored by the BMS.1. The system should be designed to permit expansion and be capable of handling at least 125% of

the number of points currently specified. Allowances should also be made for virtual points.These are points that are calculated or passed through the controls system as opposed tohardwired physical points. Virtual (“pseudo”) points must be approved byOwner/Commissioning Agent.

2. Eliminate unnecessary points, such as those at fans, CO2 monitors, and humidity sensors.



3. Sequences should always be as simple as possible while still meeting the performancerequirements. Unnecessarily complex control sequences can overwhelm even the mostexperienced operator because they are more difficult to operate and maintain.

D. Review monitoring capability and alarms. Alarms may be generally categorized as Critical (mainequipment failure), intermediate (high humidity or excessive CO2 events), or nuisance alarms. Allalarms shall be delayed 15 seconds.

E. Specify the storage capability of the system. Data should be retained for [30, 60, or 90] days. Readingsshall be sampled and recorded every 15 minutes. BMS device storage is backed up daily.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Sequences of Operation (Design engineer shall submit SOO for BMS --and EHLS as needed -- review and approval.

A. Wortham House—Overview:



Two chillers with dual chill water pump control system - ambient control economizer mode; multiple air handlers with humidity control; seasonally sensitive; single chiller is not adequate; failure alarm on chillers and pump, chilled water temperature, room temperature sensor shall have nuisance alarm.

B. IDF Rooms/MDF rooms—Overview:

Different building air; monitor room temperature: e.g. communicating BacNet thermometer; humiditymonitoring desirable

C. Computing center—Overview:

Multiple chiller sequence of operation; add BacNet communication cards as retrofit, rotation between2 primary chillers shall be automated; third chiller is only brought on to supplement primary as needed

D. Classrooms—Overview:

Requires temperature, humidity, and CO2 monitors

E. Retail— Overview: Not available

F. Laboratories—Overview:

VAV may feature 5-6 physical points: damper, reheat, temperature sensor discharge temperatures andhumidity.

1. AHU- if the exhaust fails:

If the AHUs receive a signal noting that the exhaust manifold is down (all fans are in alarm andoff), all but the AHU with the least run time shall shut down and the remaining operational AHUshall reduce to the minimum allowable speed of the VSD to maintain a Static pressure of thebuilding to a positive nature. The labs shall keep the Exhaust valves open and the Supply valvesto reduce in the labs to maintain a static pressure in the labs to neutral/or negative. Upon theexhaust manifold returning to operation, the AHU system shall return to normal operation. Chillwater pump must be on emergency or standby power to maintain some tepid temperature tothe building in high ambient conditions. Low ambient conditions- 58Degrees F- the Hot waterpump must stay operational on standby power and the preheat coil will operate a conditions toprovide tepid conditions to the building at low ambient conditions. A customized evacuationmessage shall be issued via the addressable fire alarm system; coordinate with FireMarshal/EHLS. Requirements (10-15 points) 3 different temp sensor (pre-heat, chilled,discharge) fans status, start stop, isolation damper (2) VFD speed VFD alarm, CFM release

2. Exhaust- if the AHU fails:

If the Exhausts receive a signal noting that the AHU manifold is down (all fans are in alarm andoff), all but the Exhaust with the least run time shall shut down and the remaining operationalExhaust shall reduce to the minimum allowable speed of the VSD to maintain a Static pressureof the building to a positive nature/or static. The labs shall keep the Air Handling valves openand the Exhaust valves to reduce in the labs to maintain a static pressure for the labs toneutral/or negative. Upon the AHU manifold returning to operation, the Exhaust system shallreturn to normal operation. Chill water pump shall stay operational and the exhaust shall pull



the air from the AHU to maintain some temperature relief to the buildings. If the Temperature is at low ambient conditions, 58degrees F the Hot water pump shall stay running to allow for the building to operate a tepid temperature during low ambient conditions.

G. Wet Labs—Overview: Not available

H. High Hazard Lab —Overview:

Controls must be located outside the laboratory space

I. Biological Safety Labs- Levels 1&2—Overview: Not available

J. Instructional Labs —Overview: Not available

K. General office spaces — Overview: Not available

L. Auditoriums —Overview: Not available

M. Kitchens —Overview: Consider systems that use infrared or temperature to turn on the exhaust fan.Hilton hoods exhaust fan are triggered by heat and smoke; sensor will shut off gas.

N. Central Plant — Overview:

Freeze protection is required for any system with more than 30% outside make up air: Engineeringdrawings are required on any system with pre-heat. Systems are typically maintained at 55 deg. F;sensor shall trip at 34 degrees and close outside air damper, open all valves on coils.


SECTION 25 00 00 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS (BAS ... · possible to access any data from any...

Documents

Transcript of SECTION 25 00 00 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS (BAS ... · possible to access any data from any...